JP7338670B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a game board on which a game area is formed and game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls shot from the game ball shooting means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between a guided state in which the game ball is guided to the ball entry section and a non-guided state in which the guidance is not performed according to the game situation, diversification of the game is achieved (for example, patent Reference 1).

JP-A-2002-78904

In the gaming machine of the type described above, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the ball-entering section in order to increase the degree of attention paid to the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing attention to games.

The present invention
A game machine comprising a game board on which a game area is formed,
a first ball-entering section and a second ball-entering section provided in the game area, into which game balls enter;
A first guide means for moving the game ball to a first guide position for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion and a first non-guide position for not performing the guide;
A second guide means for moving the game ball to a second guide position for guiding the game ball to the second ball entering portion and a second non-guide position for not performing the guide;
It is possible to configure a first guide path that guides the game ball to the first ball entering portion together with a guide path formed by the first guide means when the game ball is arranged at the first guide position by the first guide means. There is a guide path formed by the second guide means and a second guide path for guiding the game ball to the second ball entering portion when the game ball is positioned at the second guide position by the second guide means. a passage forming means capable of
Of the passage structuring means, the predetermined passage structuring means and the specific passage structuring means are displaceable between a projecting position projecting into the game area and a retracted position where projection into the game area is suppressed,
The first guide passage is formed with a first insertion portion through which the predetermined passage forming means is inserted , and the second guide passage is inserted with the specific passage forming means. characterized in that a second insertion portion is formed .

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the game.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a front view showing the configuration of the game board unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the back side. It is a rear view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a back pack unit. (a) A partial enlarged view of FIG. 6 showing a variable winning unit and its peripheral configuration, (b) A perspective view of the variable winning unit as seen from the front side. FIG. 11(a) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 11(a), and (b) is a transverse cross-sectional view of the variable winning unit. (a) Schematic diagram showing a drive mechanism, (b) A arrow view of FIG. 13 (a), (c) B arrow view of FIG. 13 (a). (a) A schematic diagram showing the movement of the drive mechanism, (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the movement of the drive motor and the state of each variable winning device. (a1) Schematic diagram showing the variable winning unit in the first guidance state, (a2) Schematic diagram showing the first guidance route, (b1) Schematic diagram showing the variable winning unit in the second guidance state, (b2) A schematic diagram showing a second guide route. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a distribution table; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main controller; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart showing a state switching process of the variable winning unit. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a ball entering the first ball entering section; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a ball entering the second ball entering section; It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the hit type and the increase in possession balls. It is a schematic diagram comparing the variable winning unit shown in the first embodiment and a conventional variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the variable winning unit. (a) A perspective view showing a variable winning unit in the second embodiment, (b) a front view of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram showing a state change of the variable winning unit. (a) A schematic diagram showing a variable winning unit in the third embodiment, (b) a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a movable body and a movable core. (a) A front view showing a variable winning unit in the fourth embodiment, (b) a perspective view of the variable winning unit, and (c) a longitudinal sectional view of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram showing a state change of the variable winning unit. (a) Schematic diagram showing the configuration of the variable winning unit in the fifth embodiment, (b) Schematic diagram showing the relationship between the entering ball portion and the number of prize balls, (c) Switching of the guidance destination during the opening/closing execution mode 1 is a schematic diagram showing the . It is a flow chart showing a state switching process of the variable winning unit. (a) A flowchart showing guidance start processing, (b) a flowchart showing guidance end processing. 4 is a timing chart showing the flow of switching of guidance destinations; It is a schematic diagram showing switching of guidance destinations. It is a schematic diagram showing switching of guidance destinations. (a) A schematic diagram showing a variable winning unit in the sixth embodiment, (b) (c) a schematic diagram showing switching of guidance destinations, and (d) a schematic diagram showing another variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the variable winning unit. (a) A perspective view showing a variable winning unit in the seventh embodiment, (b) a front view of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram showing a state change of the variable winning unit. (a) A schematic diagram showing a variable winning unit in the eighth embodiment, (b) and (c) a schematic diagram showing a state change of the variable winning unit, and (d) a schematic diagram showing a flow of game balls. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram showing a transmission path of driving force in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 11B is a flowchart showing guidance start processing, and FIG. 9C is a flowchart showing guidance end processing. 4 is a timing chart showing movement of each movable plate; It is a schematic diagram showing a state change of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram showing a state change of the variable winning unit. (a) A schematic diagram showing a variable winning unit in the tenth embodiment, (b) a schematic diagram showing a holding structure, and (c) a schematic diagram showing a state change of the variable winning unit. (a) Schematic diagram showing a variable winning unit in the eleventh embodiment, (b) and (c) schematic diagrams showing the flow of game balls. (a) A schematic diagram showing the variable winning unit in the twelfth embodiment, (b), (c) a schematic diagram showing the flow of game balls, (d) a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning type and the operation period, (e) It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the hit type and the increase in possession. (a) A front view of the variable winning unit in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) a perspective view of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram showing switching of guidance destinations. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the variable winning unit. (a) A front view of a variable winning unit according to a fourteenth embodiment, (b) a longitudinal sectional view of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram showing switching of guidance destinations. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram of a variable winning unit in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram of a variable winning unit in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the variable winning unit.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 3, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main section 12 attached to the outer frame 11 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting a long frame material to four sides, and is formed so as to form a rectangular frame shape as a whole. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with the outer frame 11 on an island facility or the like of the game hall.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. Specifically, an upper supporting metal fitting 17 is fixed to a connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 17 is fixed to a connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. A side support fitting 18 is provided. A support mechanism is constituted by these upper support metal fittings 17 and lower support metal fittings 18, and the main part 12 of the game machine rotates to the outer frame 11 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front. , and can be rotated forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the right side as the tip of rotation (see FIGS. 3 and 4).

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine main section 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a door frame 14 arranged behind the inner frame 13. A back pack unit 15 is provided. In addition, the inner frame 13 of the game machine main portion 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the game machine.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view of the game machine. ing. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatable backward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the game machine. It is said that

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a frame body 20 made of synthetic resin whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers substantially the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. there is A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame 20 so that substantially the entire game area PE, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front. It is closed from the rear side of the front door frame 14.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23 . A partition portion is formed in the glass holder to partition the holding area of the glass panel 23 in the front and rear direction, and the two glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear direction with the partition portion interposed therebetween. In other words, by securing a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the glass panels 23 doubly cover the game area PE from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加state.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20 . Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, in view of the improvement of safety and security, it is preferable to adopt a plurality of glass panels and to face each glass panel in the front and rear with a predetermined gap therebetween. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a transparent synthetic resin panel member in place of the glass panel.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, along the periphery of the window portion 21, an annular decorative portion 26 containing light emitting means such as an LED is provided. The annular illumination portion 26 lights up or flashes in accordance with changes in the gaming state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined reach is reached. Further, an error display lamp portion 27 is provided at the top of the pachinko machine 10 at the center of the annular illumination portion 26, and lights up when a problem such as an error occurs. A prize ball lamp part 28 that lights up is provided. In addition, speaker units 29 for outputting sound effects, BGM, etc. according to the game state are provided at positions close to the left and right winning ball lamp units 28 (see FIG. 3).

Below the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32 (see FIG. 2). The upper tray 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, aligning them in a line, and guiding them to a game ball shooting mechanism described later. In addition, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing game balls that have become surplus in the upper plate 33 and a game ball that has not reached the game area PE (see FIG. 3) out of the game balls shot by the game ball shooting mechanism. It has a function as a receptacle for storing the ejected game balls when the balls are returned to the player.

A game ball shooting handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower swelling portion 32 so as to protrude forward. By operating the game ball shooting handle 41, a game ball is shot from a game ball shooting mechanism which will be described later. The shooting speed of the game ball increases as the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) of the game ball shooting handle 41 increases. It reaches the area PE. Further, by adjusting this operation amount by the player, it becomes possible to separate the hitting of the game ball into the right route and the left route, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3 , a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the rear surface of the front door frame 14 . The passage forming unit 45 is molded of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage leading to the lower tray 34 . In the passage forming unit 45, a receptacle projecting rearward and opening upward is formed at an upper corner of the passage forming unit 45, and the receptacle is divided into left and right by a partition wall to form an entrance of the front door side upper tray passage. A section and an entrance section of the front door side lower tray passage are partitioned. The upstream side of the front door side upper tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage communicates with a game ball distribution section to be described later. A game ball entering the plate passage is guided to a lower plate 34. - 特許庁

Projection shafts are provided at the upper end and lower end of the rear surface of the front door frame 14 on the rotation base end side. These projecting shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13 .

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. FIG. In FIG. 5, as in FIG. 3, the configuration inside the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11 . The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11 . The inner frame base member 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11 , and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base member 50 . A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain board is arranged below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the curtain board. It will be posted. A slight clearance may be provided between the curtain plate and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference.

Support metal fittings 71 and 72 are attached to upper and lower ends of the front face of the inner frame base body 50 on the base end side of rotation (left side in FIG. 5). Although not shown, the support metal fittings 71 and 72 have shafts, and the bearings provided on the front door frame 14 are inserted into the shafts, whereby the front door frame is attached to the inner frame 13 . 14 is rotatably supported.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is disposed on the rotating tip side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50 . The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end of the inner frame base body 50 (vertical frame member to be described later). have. Hook receiving members 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 on the inner frame base member 50 have slits for protruding to the front side of the inner frame 13 corresponding to the front door hook members 76 respectively. formed in this way. The front door hook members 76 protruding through the slits are engaged with the front door hook members 76 provided on the front door frame 14 in one-to-one correspondence with the front door hook members 76. The front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. The locking device 75 also has an inner frame hook member 77 extending rearward of the inner frame 13 . The main part 12 of the game machine is locked with respect to the outer frame 11 in a closed state by hooking these inner frame hook members 77 on the hook receiving member 19 fixed to the outer frame 11 .

A cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed on the inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75 ). The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (the hook members 76 and 77, the interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is arranged adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned right (clockwise), the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned left (counterclockwise). , and the locking of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released.

A housing recess 51 for housing the game board unit 80 is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base body 50 . The housing recess 51 is recessed toward the rear of the game machine according to the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is fixed by a manual lock mechanism in a state of being fitted into the housing recess 51 from the front of the game machine. . A substantially rectangular window hole 52 is formed in the bottom of the housing recess 51 , and the rear structure of the game board unit 80 (a rear block 80 b described later) protrudes rearward of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52 . . It should be noted that almost the entire window hole 52 is covered from the front of the game machine by the game board unit 80 attached to the inner frame base body 50 .

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 includes a game board 80a mainly made of a wooden board, and various game parts (variable display device, control device, movable performance mechanism, etc.) to be described later, which are provided on the back side of the game board 80a. is integrated with the rear block 80b mounted on the base body 251. As shown in FIG.

The above-described game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed on the front surface of the game board 80a. As already explained, the game area PE is covered with the glass unit 22 (specifically, the glass panel 23 on the rear side). The glass unit 22 is arranged so that the gap between the rear side glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game board 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is the same as the game area PE. They are arranged so that they are not lined up in front and back at certain points. This suppresses ball clogging in the game area PE. The game board 80a is not limited to being made of wood, and can be made of synthetic resin.

The game board unit 80 (in particular, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game board 80a) will be described below with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as seen from the rear.

The game board 80a is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its thickness direction (front-rear direction). As shown in FIG. 6, each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82, a variable winning unit 83, a through gate 84, and the like. When game balls enter the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, and the variable winning unit 83, the game balls are detected by the detection sensors provided corresponding to the respective ball entry portions, and based on the detection result, a predetermined number of game balls are detected. Prize balls (payout of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player. In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80a (game area PE), and game balls that do not enter various ball entry portions are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86. . In the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the game ball entering the out hole 86, the entry of the game ball into the general winning hole 81, the operating hole unit 82, and the variable winning unit 83 is also referred to as "winning". do.

In addition, various game parts such as a large number of game nails 87 and windmills 94 are arranged on the game board 80a in order to appropriately distribute the downflow paths of the game balls. Due to various configurations such as the game nail 87 and the windmill, the downflow path of the game ball is differentiated, and winning to the above-described general winning opening 81 or the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

A central opening is formed in the center of the game board 80a, and a transparent opening cover is attached so as to cover the central opening from the back side of the game board unit 80. - 特許庁The variable display unit 85 and the like belonging to the back block 80b are positioned behind the central opening, and the variable display unit 85 and the like are visible from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening (opening cover).

An operating port unit 82, a through gate 84, and the like are arranged around the central opening. The operating port unit 82 is provided with an upper operating port 91 provided below the variable display unit 85 and a lower operating port 92 provided below the upper operating port 91 . Of these two operating ports 91 and 92, the lower operating port 92 is provided with an electric accessory 93 as an opening/closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric accessory 93 has a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit for driving the movable piece, and has an open state (assist state) in which the ball can or easily enters the lower operation opening 92, and the same state. It can be switched to a closed state (non-assisted state) in which ball entry is impossible or difficult.

The through gate 84 is arranged on the upstream side (specifically, the side of the variable display unit 85) from the lower operation port 92, and the lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 84 is won. In this case, the electric accessory 93 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

When a ball enters the upper working port 91, three game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the lower working port 92, four game balls are put out. However, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above.

The variable winning unit (special ball entry device or special ball entry means) 83 has a plurality of ball entry parts, and guide states for guiding game balls to these ball entry parts (details will be described later in the first guide state and second guide state). state) and a non-guidance state in which the guidance is not provided. Normally, the variable prize winning unit 83 is maintained in a non-guiding state, and when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution state) (jackpot: a special It is configured to be switched to the guidance state (when winning the transition to the game state). The opening/closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a jackpot is won. It is set so that switching to the guidance state is repeated with a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) as the upper limit.

Next, a supplementary description of the variable display unit 85 will be given. The variable display unit 85 has a pattern display device 95 that variably displays (variably displays) a pattern triggered by the winning of the operation ports 91 and 92 . The pattern display device 95 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and its display contents are controlled by a display control device which will be described later. On the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95, for example, patterns are displayed side by side in the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are variably displayed by being horizontally scrolled. When a jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset activated line, and the opening/closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot) is entered. The pattern display device 95 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix display device or a 7-segment display device.

A center frame 96 is provided on the game board 80a so as to surround the central opening. The center frame 96 is fixed to the game board 80a from the front side thereof. In this fixed state, the center frame 96 and the glass unit 22 stand upright from the front of the game board 80a. It is configured so that the clearance dimension between and is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is prevented from colliding with the pattern display device 95, and the flowing path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is set to the right side of the variable display unit 85 (specifically, the center frame 96). It is roughly divided into the above-mentioned right route that bypasses from the left side and the above-mentioned left route that bypasses from the left side.

A stage on which a game ball can roll left and right is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion forming the lower portion of the center frame 96 . A game ball entering from an inlet formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 96 is discharged onto the stage through a warp passage also formed in the center frame 96 . Regarding the stage, the game ball that reaches the stage is relatively easy to flow into the upper working port 91, specifically compared to the game ball that does not go through the stage, it is easier to flow into the upper working port 91. This contributes to increasing the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on this stage. In this embodiment, as described above, the central opening is covered with a transparent opening cover, and game balls that have reached the stage are regulated so as not to move toward the rear block 80b (variable display unit 85).

A first holding lamp portion and a second holding lamp portion are provided on the front surface of the frame portion forming the lower portion of the center frame 96 . The first holding lamp portion corresponds to the upper operating port 91, and the number of times the game ball passes through the upper operating port 91 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by the lighting of the first holding lamp portion. It has become. The second holding lamp portion on the right side corresponds to the lower operating port 92, and the number of times the game ball passes through the lower operating port 92 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the second holding lamp portion. It is designed to be

The actuation openings 91 and 92 are arranged at positions near the variable display unit 85 . Since the transition to the special game state can be triggered by the winning of the operation ports 91 and 92, the player pays attention to whether the operation ports 91 and 92 win or not, and grasps whether or not to shift to the special game state. Therefore, it is considered that attention is focused on the pattern display device 95 . The actuation openings 91 and 92 are provided near the variable display unit 85 in order to concentrate the player's attention on the vicinity of the variable display unit 85 .

At the right end of the game board 80a, a game area partitioning member 98 is arranged to partition and form the game area PE together with a guide rail 100, which will be described later. The game area partitioning member 98 is provided with a stopper member with which a game ball flying along the guide rail 100 collides and a main display unit 99 . The stopper member is a buffer member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member is weakened and then flows down the game area PE. In other words, the stopper member is provided with a force reducing function for weakening the force of the game ball that collides with it.

Here, a supplementary description of the main display unit 99 will be given. The main display unit 99 is embedded in the game area partitioning member 98 , and a part thereof is arranged so as to face the glass unit 22 . A main display section on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed is provided in the facing portion. The main display unit 99 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the content displayed on the main display section is controlled by the main control device.

The main display portion is an upper operation port display portion for displaying the lottery result based on the winning at the upper operation port 91, and the lower operation port display portion for displaying the lottery result based on the winning at the lower operation port 92. and a display. In the display unit for the upper working port, the winning of the upper working port 91 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of the stoppage of the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working port 91 is performed. The results are made explicit. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 91 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the fluctuation display is stopped in the display unit for the upper operation port, and the stop result is predetermined. is displayed, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the display unit for the lower working port, the winning of the lower working port 92 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working port 92 is performed. The results are made explicit. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the lower operation port 92 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the display unit for the lower operation port stops the variable display, and the stop result is a predetermined result. is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode according to the result.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 91 and 92, the corresponding operation port display unit starts a variable display, displays a predetermined stop result, and the game continues until the variable display is stopped. corresponds to one time. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, for example, a single display area is provided, and even if a prize is won in any of the operation ports 91 and 92, the single display area is displayed. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the time until the variable display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed is one game round. It is also possible to

The main display portion of the main display unit 99 is also provided with a through-gate display portion for displaying the lottery result based on the winning of the through-gate 84 in addition to the above two display portions. In the through-gate display unit, the winning of the through-gate 84 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through-gate 84 is clearly indicated. be done. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 84 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric duty open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit and the variable display is not performed. After being stopped, it shifts to the power release state. In the electric operation open state, the electric accessory 93 provided in the lower operation opening 92 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 84 is retained up to four times, and the number of times the game ball is retained is displayed on the main display portion of the main display unit 99. A pending number display is provided.

The main display section described in detail above is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and game balls are prevented from moving in front of these various display sections. Therefore, its visibility is guaranteed.

Referring again to FIG. 5, the structure of the inner frame 13 will be described. Below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50, a game ball is shot into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball shooting handle 41. A game ball shooting mechanism 110 for shooting is provided.

(Game ball launching mechanism 110)
The game ball shooting mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 for shooting a game ball placed at a predetermined shooting standby position, a shooting rail 112 for defining the shooting direction of the game ball shot by the solenoid 111, and a game ball at the shooting standby position. A ball feeding device 113 that supplies balls and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components. It is integrated with the inner frame base body 50 .

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an oblique state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board unit 80 side. A groove portion having a substantially V-shaped cross section is formed in the launch rail 112, and a game ball is fitted in the groove portion so that the front and rear positions of the game ball are defined.

At a position near the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112, a ball stopper is arranged to stop the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the launch standby position described above. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

Solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. By reciprocating the output shaft of the solenoid 111 in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply/shooting control device, the game ball placed at the shooting standby position moves to the game board unit 80 side, in detail. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game board unit 80. - 特許庁

The guide rail 100 defines the game area PE together with a game area dividing member 98 fixed to the game board unit 80 (specifically, the front surface of the plate) so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. . In addition, the guide rail 100 consists of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 which are arranged so as to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 opened to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion 105 located above the game area PE. A game ball shot based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the shooting rail 112→the guide rail 100 (the entrance portion 104→the exit portion 105). In the game board unit 80, on the tip side of the exit portion 105, more specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, there is a return prevention member 106 that prevents the game ball that has reached the game area PE from returning into the guide passage 103. It is attached to prevent the game ball that reaches the game area PE first from hindering the launch of the following game ball.

Each of the rails 101 and 102 that constitute the guide rail 100 has an arcuate shape centered on the substantially central portion of the game area PE. Therefore, the game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is likely to move (sliding or rolling) along the outer rail 102, that is, while in contact with the outer rail 102 due to the centrifugal force generated by itself. In other words, when the game ball is launched so as to reach the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guide path 103 constitutes a passage area (passage route) through which the game ball passes. However, the area along the inner rail 101 is substantially an area through which the game ball does not pass.

As shown in FIG. 5, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other obliquely across the lower edge of the game board unit 80. are placed. In other words, both rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are laterally shifted near the lower edge of the game board unit 80 . As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower edge of the game board unit 80, and a gap of a predetermined distance is formed between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112. As shown in FIG.

A foul ball passage is arranged below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage is formed integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 . If the game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return in the guide path 103 as foul balls, the foul balls enter the foul ball path through the gap. Become. The foul ball passage communicates with the front door side lower tray passage, and the game ball entering the foul ball passage is discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in FIG. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next.

A through hole is formed in the inner frame base body 50 on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, on the side supporting the front door frame 14) to penetrate the inner frame base body 50 in the front-rear direction. A passage forming member 121 is arranged in the . The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50 and has a main body side upper tray passage 122 and a main body side lower tray passage 123 . The upstream side of the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 communicates with a game ball distribution section which will be described later. In addition, below the passage forming member 121, the socket portion of the passage forming unit attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted, and below the main body side upper plate passage 122, the front door side upper plate passage is arranged, A front door side upper tray passage is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage 123 .

Below the passage forming member 121 in the inner frame base body 50, an opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 is attached. The opening/closing member 124 is urged to a front position to close the upper tray passage 122 and the lower tray passage 123 on the main body side. By being in the closed state, game balls are prevented from falling out of the passages 122 and 123.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the open/close member 124 is pushed open by the receptacle provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 against the urging force. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage communicate with each other, and further, the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage communicate with each other.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base body 50 and the game board unit 80) will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing metal fitting 132 is attached to the back surface of the inner frame base body 50 on the rotation base end side (the right side in FIG. 8). Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing metal fitting 132 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction. A plurality of fixing levers 134 are provided on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state.

As already explained, the bottom portion of the accommodation recess (game board accommodation portion) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 is penetrated in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and opened to the back side of the inner frame base body 50. A window hole 52 is formed, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 housed in the housing recess 51 . Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back surface of the game board unit 80 (back block 80 b ), and these various components are exposed on the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 52 . Here, the back structure of the game board unit 80 will be described with reference to FIG.

As already explained, the back block 80b is attached to the back of the game board unit 80. As shown in FIG. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 opened to the game board 80a side. By fixing the base body 251 to the back of the game board unit 80, the game board 80a and the back block 80b are integrated.

The front side of the base body 251 serves as an arrangement area for movable performance mechanisms and the like, and the rear side serves as an arrangement area for the control device for controlling these various configurations and the variable display unit 85 (symbol display device 95). It's becoming

More specifically, a portion of the base body 251 protrudes toward the back side of the inner frame base body 50, and the above-described pattern display device 95 (see FIG. 6) and its pattern display device are attached to the protruded portion. A display controller for driving 95 is attached. The pattern display device 95 and the display control device are stacked in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50) so that the pattern display device 95 is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side. Further, a notification/effect control device 140 is mounted on the rear surface of the base body 251 so as to be positioned behind the display control device.

The notification/effect control device 140 is equipped with a notification/effect control board that controls the output of sound, lamp display, and display control device in accordance with instructions from the main control device described later, and the notification/effect control board is transparent. It is housed in a board box 141 made of resin material or the like.

A main control device unit 160 is provided below the notification/production control device 140 so as to cover the base body 251 from behind. The main controller unit 160 has a synthetic resin mount 161 fixed to the back of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the back block 80b) and a main controller 162 mounted on the mount 161. there is The main control device 162 is provided with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that governs the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power supply, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a board box 163 made of, for example.

The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a box sealing portion 164 as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of box sealing portions 164 are provided on the short sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover are combined in an unopenable manner. The base and box cover are adapted to be unopenably joined. The sealing process by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and even if unauthorized opening should occur, such a situation can be detected early and easily. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even after the package has been opened. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole of the plurality of box sealing portions 164 . When the circuit board box 163 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the main control circuit board housed therein or when the main control circuit board is inspected, the connecting portion between the box sealing portion into which the locking pin is inserted and the circuit board box 163 body is opened. disconnect. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If the history of the opening of the circuit board box 163 is left in the circuit board box 163, it can be easily found that the circuit board box 163 has been illegally opened.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are unopenably connected by a pedestal sealing portion 165 . More specifically, the pedestal sealing portion 165 has locking holes and locking pins in the same manner as the box sealing portion 164 . The mounting base 161 is connected inseparably. As a result, when the board box 163 is illegally removed, the fact can be easily grasped.

The portion of the front face of the base body 251 that faces the lower back surface of the game board unit 80 corresponds to the game board openings of the general winning port 81, the operating port unit 82, and the variable winning unit 83, and on the downstream side. A collection passage (not shown) is formed to gather in one place. As a result, all the winning game balls such as the general winning opening 81 are gathered under the game board unit 80 through the recovery path. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting game balls that have entered various winning holes.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls collected under the game board unit 80 are discharged into the discharge passage by the collection passage. It should be noted that the out port 86 is similarly connected to the discharge passage, and the game balls that have not won any of the prize winning ports are discharged into the discharge passage through the out port 86 .

Further, the base body 251 constituting the back block 80b includes a detection sensor for the general prize winning opening for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 81 as a detection sensor for each ball entry portion described above, and an operation opening 91. , 92 are mounted, and a detection sensor for an operation port for detecting a game ball that has entered 92 is mounted, and these various detection sensors constitute a winning detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main controller 162 , and detection information (detection signals) from each detection sensor is output to the main controller 162 .

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from behind by a back pack unit 15. As shown in FIG. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as a main body of the back pack unit 15, and a payout mechanism 202, a discharge passage board, and a controller assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. .

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 10, includes a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion protruding to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. 212. The protective cover part 212 has a shape in which left and right sides and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 85 .

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate. Various output terminals are provided on the external terminal board, and various signals are output to the game hall side management control device (hall computer) through these output terminals. As shown in FIG. 11, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower locking pins 214 at the right end as seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the locking pins 214 are provided on the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting it through the portion 133 . The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixed levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by contact.

A payout mechanism part 202 is arranged on the base part 211 so as to bypass the protective cover part 212 . The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 arranged on the top of the back pack 201 and opened upward, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. be. A tank rail 222 gently sloping downstream is connected to the side of the tank 221 , and a vertically extending case rail 223 is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222 . A dispensing device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution portion 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 224 .

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or a discharge passage to be described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper tray 33 via the side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage. It is

At the lower end of the base portion 211, the discharge passage board and control device collective unit 204 is attached so as to sandwich the lower end in the front and rear direction. The discharge passage board has a rearwardly open discharge passage formed on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204 , and the opening of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204 . The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game balls to the island facilities of the game hall, etc., and the game balls drawn out from the collection passage or the like to the discharge passage pass through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Ejected.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241 on which a payout control device 242 and a power supply/launch control device 243 are mounted. The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is accommodated in a board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box 244. For example, when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing device 224, pressing the state return switch 245 clears the ball clogging.

The power/fire control device 243 has a power/fire control board housed in a board box 246 . The power supply/shooting control board generates and outputs a predetermined power supply required by various control devices, etc., and further controls the launching of game balls accompanying the operation of the game ball shooting handle 41 by the player. Specifically, drive control of the solenoid 111 constituting the game ball shooting mechanism 110 and drive control of the ball feeding device 113 are executed.

A power switch 247 is provided in the power/launch control device 243 . By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (on state) and a cut off state (off state).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, and even in the event of a power failure, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure. It is possible. For example, when the power supply is cut off according to a normal procedure such as when the game hall is closed, the state before the cutoff is stored and held. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 166 provided in the main controller 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front side of the game machine by opening the main part 12 (inner frame 13) of the game machine to expose the rear part of the inner frame 13. FIG. On the other hand, when the locking device 75 restricts the opening of the game machine main section 12, the various switches cannot be operated from the front side of the game machine. In other words, the various switches described above are difficult to operate when the main part 12 of the game machine is closed. making it difficult.

In the game machine of the type described in detail above, the design display device 95 is enlarged to enhance the display effect function. However, if an attempt is made to enlarge the pattern display device 95, the region (the above-mentioned game region PE) where the game balls flow down will be squeezed, and there will be restrictions on the arrangement of various game components arranged in the game region PE. becomes stronger. There is room for improvement in the structure of these game parts in allowing various game parts to coexist in the limited game area PE. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the configuration of the variable winning unit 83 provided in the game board unit 80 is devised in consideration of such circumstances. A supplementary description of the variable winning unit 83 will be given below with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11(a) is a partial enlarged view of the game board unit 80 (FIG. 6) showing the variable winning unit 83 and its peripheral configuration, FIG. 11(b) is a perspective view of the variable winning unit 83, and FIG. 12(a) is a variable FIG. 12(b) is a longitudinal sectional view showing the internal structure of the variable winning unit 83 (partial sectional view along line AA in FIG. 11(a)), and FIG.

(Variable winning unit 83)
An opening 89 (see FIG. 12) penetrating back and forth is formed at a lower portion of the game board 80a, more specifically at a position between the out port 86 and the operating port unit 82. As shown in FIG. The variable winning unit 83 is fixed to the game board 80a while being fitted into the opening 89 from the front of the game machine.

As shown in FIG. 11, the variable winning unit 83 has a housing 310. A pair of left and right ball-entering parts 331, 341 are provided on the front part 312 of the housing 310 so as to protrude from the front surface of the game board 80a. is formed. A body portion 311 of the housing 310 is formed with ball passages 333 and 343 for guiding game balls entering the ball entering portions 331 and 341 to the back side of the game board 80a. The game balls that have moved to the back side of the game board 80a through the ball passages 333 and 343 are returned to the island facility of the game hall through the collection passage of the back block 80b.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), detection sensors 334, 344 for detecting game balls passing through the ball passages 333, 343 are provided at intermediate positions of the ball passages 333, 343, respectively. The detection sensors 334 and 344 are connected to the main controller 162, and the main controller 162 (more specifically, the MPU) sends signals to the ball entry sections 331 and 341 based on detection information (detection signals) from the detection sensors 334 and 344. The presence or absence of a ball entry is monitored. When the main controller 162 specifies that a ball has been entered into the ball entry sections 331 and 341, a privilege is given to the player.

In the present embodiment, there is a difference between a privilege based on a ball entering the first ball-entering section 331 and a privilege based on a ball entering the second ball-entering section 341 . Specifically, when a ball enters the right ball entry section 331 (corresponding to the "first ball entry section"), a first predetermined number (specifically, 15) of prize balls are given as a privilege. When a ball enters the left ball entering portion 341 (corresponding to the “second ball entering portion”), the benefits are more advantageous to the player than the benefits based on the ball entering the right ball entering portion 331. A second predetermined number (specifically, 10) of game balls are given as a privilege. In the following description, the ball-entering portion 331 on the right side is called the "first ball-entering portion 331", and the ball-entering portion 341 on the left side is called the "second ball-entering portion 341".

As shown in FIG. 11, the first ball-entering portion 331 and the second ball-entering portion 341 have an entrance portion 332 of the first ball-entering portion 331 and an entrance portion 342 of the second ball-entering portion 341 through which a game ball can pass. are arranged so as to face each other with a gap (specific area SE) between them. That is, the game ball that enters the first ball entering portion 331 and the game ball that enters the second ball entering portion 341 are both configured to pass through the specific region SE, and the specific region SE is located on both sides. It serves as an introduction to inlet portions 332 and 342 .

Movable bodies 350 and 360 that are slidable in the front-rear direction are arranged behind the specific area SE. The movable bodies 350 and 360 are substantially flat plate-shaped, and are arranged in an inclined state so that the plate surface faces obliquely upward. A body portion 311 of the housing 310 is formed with an accommodating portion 313 that accommodates the movable bodies 350 and 360 . The accommodating portion 313 communicates with slits 314 and 315 formed in the front surface portion 312, and the movable bodies 350 and 360 accommodated in the accommodating portion 313 can appear and disappear with respect to the specific area SE through the slits 314 and 315. It's becoming In the following description, the position projected into the specific area SE through the slits 314 and 315 (specifically, the position where the amount of projection is larger than the radial dimension of the game ball) is called a projected position, and is specified by being housed in the housing portion 313. A position where projection into the region SE is avoided is called a retreat position.

The movable bodies 350 and 360 are on standby at the retracted position in the normal game state, and move to the protruding position from the retracted position when shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state. You will have to move accordingly.

A body portion 311 of the housing 310 is formed with guide grooves with which the left and right ends of the movable bodies 350 and 360 are engaged. Due to these guide grooves, the moving direction of the movable bodies 350 and 360 becomes a direction that intersects (perpendicularly) with the side-by-side direction of the first ball-entering portion 331 and the second ball-entering portion 341, more specifically, the thickness direction of the game board 80a. is defined as The engagement between the guide grooves and the movable bodies 350, 360 is maintained regardless of whether the movable bodies 350, 360 are at any position from the retracted position to the projected position.

In the specific area SE, the movable bodies 350 and 360 are arranged at the projecting positions, thereby forming a guide path for guiding the game ball to the ball entering portions 331 and 341 . Here, the relationship between each movable body 350, 360 and the guide path (guide destination of the game ball) will be described.

When the movable body 350 is arranged at the projecting position, the first guide path (see FIG. 15 ( a) see) is formed. In other words, the movable body 350 is arranged at the projecting position, so that the first guide path leading to the first ball entering portion 331 appears in the specific area SE. The game ball that has reached the specific area SE hits the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350 and changes direction to head toward the first ball entering portion 331, avoiding passing through the specific area SE. In the following description, this movable body 350 will be referred to as the first movable body 350 . In addition, the first movable body 350 is arranged at the projecting position, thereby functioning as a “ball receiving portion” that receives a game ball flowing down the game area PE from below.

On the other hand, when the movable body 360 is arranged at the projecting position, the upper surface 361 of the movable body 360 causes the second guide to be downwardly inclined from the first ball entering portion 331 side to the second ball entering portion 341 side. A path (see FIG. 15(b)) is formed. In other words, the movable body 360 is arranged at the projecting position, so that the second guide path leading to the second ball entering portion 341 appears in the specific area SE. The game ball that has reached the specific area SE hits the upper surface 361 of the second movable body 360 and changes direction to head toward the second ball entering portion 341, avoiding passing through the specific area SE. In the following description, this movable body 360 is referred to as a second movable body 360. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that the second movable body 360 is arranged at the projecting position, and thus functions as a "ball receiving portion" that receives the game ball flowing down the game area PE from below.

As described above, the variable winning unit 83 shown in this embodiment includes the first variable winning device having the first ball-entering part 331 and the first movable body 350, the second ball-entering part 341 and the second movable body 360. The first variable winning device and the second variable winning device switch to a receiving state in which game balls are received and a non-receiving state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the receiving state. It is possible. In view of this situation, the gap (upper inlet OE) between the upper end of the first ball entering portion 331 and the upper end of the second ball entering portion 341 is the ball inlet (inlet) to each variable winning device. ) is formed.

The first movable body 350 extends from a location close to the upper edge of the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entrance portion 341 to a location close to the lower edge of the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entrance portion 331, and is the second movable body. The body 360 extends from a point near the upper edge of the inlet portion 332 of the first ball-entering portion 331 to a point near the lower edge of the inlet portion 342 of the second ball-entering portion 341 . That is, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 intersect at an intermediate position between the first ball-entering portion 331 and the second ball-entering portion 341 . Specifically, the second movable body 360 is formed with a recessed portion 363 penetrating in the thickness direction of the second movable body 360 . The recessed portion 363 extends in the sliding direction so as to straddle the front end and the rear end of the second movable body 360. By inserting the first movable body 350 into the recessed portion 363, Both movable bodies 350 and 360 are in a crossed state.

Here, the vertical width of the entrance portions 332, 342 of the ball entrance portions 331, 341 is larger than the gap between the entrance portions 332, 342, and the specific region SE is horizontally long. The height difference between the most upstream portion (the end on the side of the second ball entrance portion 341) and the most downstream portion (the end portion on the side of the first ball entrance portion 331) of the first movable body 350 and the height of the second movable body 360 The height difference between the most upstream portion (the end on the first ball entrance portion 331 side) and the most downstream portion (the end portion on the second ball entrance portion 341 side) is equivalent to the vertical width of the inlet portions 332 and 342. In addition, the lateral width of both movable bodies 350 and 360 in the direction in which the ball entering portions 331 and 341 are arranged is equal to the above-mentioned gap (more specifically, it is slightly smaller). Therefore, at the intersection of the two movable bodies 350 and 360, the intersection angle of the portions facing upward and downward is an obtuse angle (specifically, 120°), and the intersection angle of the portions facing right and left is an acute angle (hoe). Iku is 60°). The inclination of the first movable body 350 with respect to the horizontal plane is less than 45 degrees (specifically, 30 degrees), and the inclination of the second movable body 360 with respect to the horizontal plane is also less than 45 degrees. (specifically 30°).

When viewed from the front of the game machine, the specific area SE is divided into an upper area, a lower area, a right area, and a left area by the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360. Among these areas, the position overlapping the lower area Out port 86 is located at . That is, the out port 86 is arranged between the first ball-entering portion 331 and the second ball-entering portion 341 .

Of the game balls that have reached the specific area SE, those that do not enter either the first ball entry part 331 or the second ball entry part 341 flow directly into the out port 86 and are discharged from the game area PE. It will be done. Although the variable winning unit 83 is arranged near the inner rail 101, there is a gap between the inner rail 101 and the first ball entering portion 331 and the second ball entering portion 341. A larger gap is ensured, and the game ball that reaches the lower part of the game area PE without passing through the specific area SE flows into the out port 86 so as to cross the lower part of the variable winning unit 83. - 特許庁

Here, in the present embodiment, the drive source for the first movable body 350 and the drive source for the second movable body 360 are shared, and the power from the drive source (driving motor 321) is used for driving. One of the features is that it is configured to be transmitted to each of the movable bodies 350 and 360 via a mechanism. The configuration of the driving mechanism of the variable winning unit 83 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. FIG. 13(a) is a schematic diagram showing the drive mechanism, FIG. 13(b) is a view on arrow A in FIG. 13(a), FIG. 13(c) is a view on arrow B in FIG. 13(a), FIG. 14(a) is a schematic diagram showing the movement of the drive mechanism, and FIG. 14(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the movement of the drive motor 321 and the state of each winning device.

A drive motor 321 is mounted on the body portion 311 of the housing 310 . The drive motor 321 is connected to the main controller 162, and the output shaft 322 rotates based on a drive signal from the main controller 162 (specifically, MPU). The drive motor 321 is a stepping motor, and the rotation angle is controlled by pulses of the drive signal from the main controller 162 .

As shown in FIG. 13( a ), a drive gear 323 (specifically, a bevel gear) is fixed to an output shaft 322 of a drive motor 321 . A transmission block 325 is provided to transmit forces to the movable bodies 350,360.

For example, when the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are slid forward and backward, the movable bodies 350 and 360 are configured so that power is transmitted to the central portion in the width direction of the movable bodies 350 and 360. It is possible to prevent the orientation of the head from deviating to the left or right (the occurrence of rotation such as swinging). However, since both movable bodies 350 and 360 shown in this embodiment intersect at the central portion as described above, it is difficult to transmit power to the central portion of both movable bodies 350 and 360 . In addition, since the movable bodies 350 and 360 are originally horizontally long, when power is transmitted to the central portion, a difference in movement between the left and right ends is likely to occur. It is assumed that this hinders stabilization of the operation of the movable bodies 350 and 360 . In the following, a device for eliminating the occurrence of such inconvenience will be described. Although the transmission block 325 is composed of a transmission portion for the first movable body 350 and a transmission portion for the second movable body 360, these transmission portions have the same basic configuration. Therefore, in the following description, the transmission section for the first movable body 350 will be described first, and the transmission section for the second movable body 360 will be referred to.

The transmission part for the first movable body 350 is a driven gear 326 (composite of a bevel gear and a spur gear) that is arranged on the left and right of the drive gear 323 and rotates following the drive gear 323 by engaging with the drive gear 323. gear) and a rack 329 that moves in the front-rear direction as the driven gear 326 rotates. The rack 329 is connected to the left and right ends of the first movable body 350, respectively, and the first movable body 350 slides back and forth as the rack 329 moves back and forth. By transmitting the power of the driving gear 323 to the left and right ends of the first movable body 350, the generation of low tension due to power transmission is suppressed, and the movement of the first movable body 350 is stabilized.

When the driven gears 326 are arranged on the left and right sides of the drive gear 323, the rotation directions of the drive gears 323 are reversed. Therefore, by interposing a reversing gear 328 between one driven gear 326 and the rack 329, the rotation direction, that is, the operating direction of the rack 329 is unified.

The basic configuration of the transmission section for the second movable body 360 is similar to that of the transmission section for the first movable body 350. have. Here, the driven gear 327 is arranged between the driven gears 326 . Specifically, the driven gears 326 and 327 are arranged alternately at regular intervals in the rotation direction of the drive gear 323 .

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the driving gear 323 has an engaging portion 324a which has a plurality of teeth arranged in the rotation direction and engages with the driven gears 326 and 327, and the teeth are omitted ( blank portions 324b that avoid engagement with the driven gears 326 and 327 are formed alternately. More specifically, the driving gear 323 rotates in the rotational direction from an engagement portion 324a (0° to 89°) → a blank portion 324b (90° to 179°) → an engagement portion 324a (180° to 269°) → The blank part 324b (270° to 359°) is divided into four parts. is avoided, and when the driven gear 327 for the second movable body 360 and the drive gear 323 are engaged, the engagement with the driven gear 326 for the first movable body 350 is avoided. is avoided.

When the drive motor 321 rotates in the counterclockwise direction (first specific direction) in the initial state in which both the movable bodies 350 and 360 are arranged at the retracted positions, the drive gear 323 follows the driven gear 323 and rotates. 326 rotates. As a result, the first movable body 350 moves from the retracted position to the projected position (see FIG. 14(b)). When the drive motor 321 operates in this way, engagement between the drive gear 323 and the driven gear 327 is avoided. Therefore, the power of the drive motor 321 is prevented from being transmitted to the second movable body 360, and the second movable body 360 remains at the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), by moving the first movable body 350 to the protruding position, the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350 moves to the upper edge of the entrance portion 342 of the second ball-entering portion 341 and the first first movable body 350. As shown in FIG. It is arranged on the imaginary line connecting the lower edge of the inlet portion 332 in the ball-entering portion 331, and slopes downward from the second ball-entering portion 341 side to the first ball-entering portion 331 side in the specific region SE to the first ball-entering portion 331. A first guide path GP1 is formed to guide the game ball.

By switching the first variable winning device from the non-accepting state to the accepting state in this manner, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE enters the first ball entering section 331 . In addition, in the receiving state, the movement path (for example, the second guide path GP2) of the game ball toward the second ball entering portion 341 is cut off by the first movable body 350, and the game ball bounces back to the first movable body 350. It is avoided that the played game ball enters the second ball entering section 341.例文帳に追加

When the return condition is established after the first movable body 350 is placed at the projecting position (receiving state), the drive motor 321 rotates clockwise (second specific direction), and the driven gear rotates accordingly. 326 rotates. As the driving gear 323 returns to the initial angle (0°), the first movable body 350 returns from the projecting position to the retracted position (see FIG. 14(b)). When the drive motor 321 operates in this way, engagement between the drive gear 323 and the driven gear 327 is avoided. Therefore, the power of the drive motor 321 is prevented from being transmitted to the second movable body 360, and the second movable body 360 remains at the retracted position.

When the first movable body 350 moves to the retracted position, the first guide path GP1 formed in the specific area SE disappears, and the first variable winning device switches from the acceptance state to the non-acceptance state.

Next, when the driving motor 321 rotates in the clockwise direction (second predetermined direction) in the initial state in which both the movable bodies 350 and 360 are arranged at the retracted positions, the driving gear 323 follows the driving motor 321 . The driven gear 327 rotates. As a result, the second movable body 360 moves from the retracted position to the projecting position (see FIG. 14(b)). When the drive motor 321 operates in this manner, engagement between the drive gear 323 and the driven gear 326 is avoided. Therefore, the power of the drive motor 321 is prevented from being transmitted to the first movable body 350, and the first movable body 350 remains at the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), by moving the second movable body 360 to the projecting position, the upper surface 361 of the second movable body 360 moves from the upper end of the inlet portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331 to the second movable body 360. As shown in FIG. It is arranged on the imaginary line connecting the lower end of the entrance portion 342 in the ball-entering portion 341, and slopes downward from the first ball-entering portion 331 side to the second ball-entering portion 341 side in the specific region SE to the second ball-entering portion 341. The second guide path GP2 for guiding the game ball is formed.

In this way, the second variable winning device is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state, so that the game ball that has reached the specific area SE enters the second ball entering section 341 . In addition, in the receiving state, the movement path (for example, the first guide path GP1) of the game ball toward the first ball entering portion 331 is cut off by the second movable body 360, and the ball bounces back to the second movable body 360. It is avoided that the played game ball enters the first ball entering section 331.例文帳に追加

When the return condition is established after the second movable body 360 is placed at the protruding position (receiving state), the drive motor 321 rotates counterclockwise (first predetermined direction), and follows it. Gear 327 rotates. As the drive gear 323 returns to the initial angle (0°), the second movable body 360 returns from the projecting position to the retracted position (see FIG. 14(b)). When the drive motor 321 operates in this manner, engagement between the drive gear 323 and the driven gear 326 is avoided. Therefore, the power of the drive motor 321 is prevented from being transmitted to the first movable body 350, and the first movable body 350 remains at the retracted position.

As the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position, the second guide path GP2 formed in the specific area SE disappears, and the above-described second variable winning device switches from the acceptance state to the non-acceptance state.

In the variable prize winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the link mechanism is used to transmit to the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 . In this link mechanism, the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position in conjunction with the movement of the first movable body 350 to the projected position, and the first movable body 360 moves in conjunction with the movement of the second movable body 360 to the projected position. Movable body 350 moves to the retracted position. Therefore, when one of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 is placed at the projecting position, the other is prevented from being placed at the projecting position. In other words, the state in which both movable bodies 350 and 360 are arranged at the projecting position is avoided. By limiting the movable bodies positioned in the specific area SE in this way, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has reached the specific area SE from remaining in the specific area SE.

(Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

A main control board provided in the main controller 162 is equipped with an MPU. The MPU is a ROM storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM. It is an element containing a RAM, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. A part of the functions of the MPU 602, for example, the functions of the ROM and the functions of the RAM may be provided as separate elements.

The MPU is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU is connected to a power failure monitoring board provided in the main controller 162, the payout controller 242, various detection sensors, and the like. A power supply/launch control device 243 is connected to the blackout monitoring board, and power is supplied to the MPU via the blackout monitoring board. In addition, as part of the various detection sensors, a detection sensor for the general winning opening 81, a detection sensor for the upper working opening 91, a detection sensor for the lower working opening 92, a detection sensor for the through gate 84, and a variable winning unit 83 detection sensors 334 and 344 are connected, and based on the detection information (detection signals) from these various detection sensors, the MPU of the main control unit 162 executes winning judgment (ball entry judgment) for each ball entry section. be done. In addition, the MPU executes a jackpot generation lottery based on winnings to the upper working port 91 and the lower working port 92, and executes a support generation lottery based on winnings to the through gate 84. - 特許庁

A power outage monitoring board, a payout control device 242 and a notification/production control device 140 are connected to the output side of the MPU. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 242, for example, based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning ball portion. In this case, the command information storage area of the ROM is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. When the winning to the general winning opening 81 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and the winning to the first ball entering section (first variable winning device) 331 is specified. When it does, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output, and when the winning to the second ball entry section (second variable winning device) 341 is specified, 10 game balls are paid out. is output, and when the winning to the upper working port 91 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output, and the winning to the lower working port 92 is specified. In that case, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

Various commands such as a variation start command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command and an ending command are output to the notification/production control device 140 . In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area of the ROM is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various types of information are included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU, there are a driving section for driving the electric accessory 93 attached to the lower operating port 92, a driving motor 321 for driving the movable bodies 350 and 360 of the variable winning unit 83, a main display unit 99 (main display section), the display section for the number of holdings, the display section for various ball entry sections, etc. are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board, and the MPU executes drive control of various drive units and the like through the driver circuits.

That is, in the special game state (opening/closing execution mode), the drive motor 321 in the variable winning unit 83 is controlled by the MPU so as to switch the variable winning device between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state. In addition, when the electric accessory 93 of the lower operation port 92 is elected in the open state (support winning), the driving part for the electric accessory 93 is controlled by the MPU so that the electric accessory 93 is opened and closed. is executed. Further, in each game round, display control of the display portion for the upper operation port or the display portion for the lower operation port in the main display unit 99 (main display portion) is executed in the MPU.

Furthermore, an external terminal board is connected to the output side of the MPU. The external terminal plate is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal or the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal upon state transition. The MPU can output a jackpot signal through a jackpot signal output terminal to the management control device on the game hall side when the game results in a jackpot result. Specifically, normally, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and a HI level signal is output when a jackpot result is obtained. Note that the output mode of this signal may be reversed.

The blackout monitoring board relays between the main control board and the power/launch controller 243, and monitors the maximum voltage output from the power/launch controller 243, which is a DC stable 24 volts. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162 .

The power supply/launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the operating power required for each of the main control board and the payout control device 242 is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. .

The power/shooting control device 243 controls the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 110, and the game ball shooting mechanism 110 (specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. More specifically, an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball shooting handle 41 are connected to the power/shooting control device 243 . The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) of the game ball shooting handle 41. Based on the information from this operation level detection sensor, the game ball shooting intensity (shooting speed) of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is determined. ) will be determined. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player touches the game ball shooting handle 41, and the power/shooting control device 243 detects when the player touches the game ball shooting handle 41 based on this information. It is configured to be able to grasp whether or not When it is determined that the player is touching the game ball shooting handle 41 based on the information from the touch sensor and the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball shooting handle 41 is being operated, the game ball is shot. will be allowed.

Information from the touch sensor is transmitted to the main control device 162 , the notification/production control device 140 , and the display control device 150 via the power/emission control device 243 .

The notification/effect control device 140 has a notification/effect control board on which an MPU is mounted, and the MPU stores various control programs and fixed value data in a ROM, and the control program stored in the ROM. A RAM or the like, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data during execution, is incorporated.

The MPU of the notification/production control device 140 drives and controls the lamp portions 26 to 28 and the speaker portion 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and the display control device 150. control. More specifically, in the notification/production control device 140, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the pattern display device 95 changes the pattern display mode and the pattern stop display mode (for example, the pattern is stopped). The type of combination) is determined, presence or absence of reach occurrence, content of reach effect, and the like are determined, and the determined content is added to the above command and transferred to the display control device 150 .

The display control device 150 has a display control board on which an MPU is mounted. In the MPU, various control programs and fixed value data are stored in a ROM, and when the control program stored in the ROM is executed, various data are stored. etc., a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM storing image data, a video RAM temporarily storing image data read from the character ROM, etc. there is The MPU executes display control of the symbol display device 95 based on commands input from the notification/effect control device 140 .

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

The MPU of the main control unit 162 uses various counter information during the game to set the jackpot generation lottery, set the display of the main display unit (set the light emission mode), set the pattern display of the pattern display device 95, etc. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the winning type counter C2 used when judging the winning type such as the probability variable big winning result or the normal big winning result, and the pattern display device 95 are changed. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when executing the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 99 and the pattern display device 95 A variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time is used. Further, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 93 of the lower operating port 92 is to be in the electric role open state.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main controller 162 . The reserved ball storage area of the RAM is provided with a reserved area and an execution area for the operating opening. The reservation area is provided with first to fourth areas as reservation areas for the upper operation opening. Each numerical value information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas as reserved information.

In the first area to the fourth area, each numerical value information is displayed in the order of the first area, second area, third area, and fourth area when winning to the upper opening 91 occurs multiple times in succession. Stored sequentially. Since four areas are provided in this way, up to four entry histories of game balls into the upper working opening 91 are reserved and stored.

In addition, a first area to a fourth area are provided as lower working opening reservation areas, and in accordance with the winning history to the lower working opening 92, a winning random number counter C1 and a winning type counter stored in the lottery counter buffer. Each numerical value information of C2 and reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas as reserved information.

In the first area to the fourth area, each numerical value information is displayed in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area when winning to the lower opening 92 occurs multiple times in succession. Stored sequentially. Since four areas are provided in this manner, up to four entry histories of game balls into the lower operation opening 92 are retained and stored.

The execution area is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the holding area when starting the variable display on the operation port display section of the main display section. is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area.

More specifically, the hit random number counter C1 is configured such that it is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operation opening 91 or the lower operation opening 92.例文帳に追加

Random number values for winning a jackpot are stored as a success/failure table (success/failure information group) in a success/failure table storage area as success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 603 . As the right/wrong table, a right/wrong table for the low-probability mode (low-probability right/wrong information group) and a right/wrong table for the high-probability mode (high-probability right/wrong information group) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode of the lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the above lottery, the values of the random numbers for winning the jackpot (that is, winning information) are three values of "7", "307", and "507". is. That is, "7", "307", and "507" among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599" correspond to the jackpot result, and the actual jackpot probability by one lottery is 1/200. It's becoming On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the values of the random numbers for winning the jackpot (that is, winning information) are "5", "7", "36", and "36". . . 30 of "572" and "598". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from 0 to 599, ``5'', ``7'', ``36'', . The actual jackpot probability is 1/20. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary. In addition, in each lottery mode, values of random numbers other than those that result in winning a jackpot are out.

The hit type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 49, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 49). Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are set differently in the mode of drive control of the variable winning unit 83 in the open/close execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode includes an opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the first prize winning mode in which the first ball entering portion 331 is the destination of the ball, and an opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the second prize winning mode in which the second ball entering portion 341 is the destination of the ball. It is divided into

(Distribution of game results)
The distribution destination of the game result for the hit type counter C2 (that is, the lottery result of the winning lottery and the distribution lottery) is stored in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM of the main control unit 162. (distribution information group). Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. 17 . As shown in FIG. 17, the distribution table includes a distribution table (first distribution information group) for the upper working port in FIG. 17(a) and a distribution table for the lower working port in FIG. 17(b). A table (second distribution information group) is set.

In the distribution table for the upper working port, as shown in FIG. result), 8R normal jackpot results (low-probability game results) are set, and in the distribution table for the lower opening, as shown in FIG. A jackpot result (high-probability game result), an 8R probability variable jackpot result B (high-probability game result), and an 8R normal jackpot result (low-probability game result) are set.

The 16R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the first winning mode corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode is executed and the number of continuous rounds is 16R. This is a jackpot result in which the mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which have been shifted due to the 16R variable probability jackpot result, are continued until the next jackpot result.

The 8R probability variable jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the second winning mode corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is executed and the number of continuous rounds is 8R. This is a jackpot result in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted to the 8R probability variable jackpot result A, are continued until the next jackpot result.

The 8R probability variable jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the first winning mode corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is executed and the number of continuous rounds is 8R. This is a jackpot result in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted to the 8R probability variable jackpot result A, are continued until the next jackpot result.

The 8R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the second winning mode corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode is executed and the number of continuous rounds is 8R. This is a jackpot result in which the mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode, which is shifted due to the 8R normal jackpot result, is continued until the number of games executed during the mode reaches 100 times.

In the distribution table for the upper working port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 49", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. It corresponds to the result A, and "30 to 49" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result. On the other hand, in the distribution table for the lower working port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 49", "0 to 14" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot result, and "15 to 29" corresponds to the 8R It corresponds to the probability variable jackpot result B, and "30 to 49" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result.

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS mainly controls the variation display time in the upper and lower operation port display portions of the main display unit 99 (main display portion D) and the variation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 95. It is used in making decisions in the MPU of device 162 . The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the display unit for the upper operation port and the display unit for the lower operation port and at the start of the variation of the pattern by the pattern display device 95 .

The electric accessary product release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role holding area of the RAM of the main controller at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 84.例文帳に追加Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 93 of the lower operation opening 92 to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 190, the electric accessory 93 is controlled to open state, and if C4=191 to 250, the electric accessory 93 is not controlled to open state.

As already described, the MPU of the main controller 162 determines the variable display time in the upper and lower operating aperture display sections using at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS. The variable display time table storage area of the ROM is used for determination. Also, in the MPU, the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the execution area are used to determine the stop result in the upper working opening display section and the lower working opening display section DR. However, the stop result table storage area of the ROM is used for the determination.

(Regarding various processes executed by the MPU of the main controller 162)
Next, each control process executed by the MPU of main controller 162 will be described. MPU processing can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, normal processing that is executed after the main processing ends, and timer interrupt processing that is started by periodically interrupting the normal processing. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the normal processing will be explained.

(timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically (for example, at intervals of 2 msec) by the MPU of the main controller 162 .

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 162 is read, the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, when it is determined that a ball has entered the upper working opening 91, a winning detection flag for the upper working opening is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM, and a ball has entered the lower working opening 92. If it is determined, the winning detection flag for the lower opening is stored in the various flag storage areas. Further, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 84, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in various flag storage areas. When it is determined that a ball has entered the first ball entering section 331, the winning detection flag for the first ball entering section 341 is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM. When it is determined that the ball has entered, the winning detection flag for the second ball entering section is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM.

In the subsequent step S103, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessary product opening counter C4 are incremented by 1, respectively, and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM.

In the subsequent step S104, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 84 is executed. In the winning process for through, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for through gate is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM. On the condition that the number of stored accessory pending memories is less than 4, the value of the electric role product release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electrical role pending area. Then, when the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning processing for the through gate is ended.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, and in this step S105, the winning process for the operating ball portion accompanying the winning to the operating openings 91 and 92 is executed, and this timer interrupt process is performed. exit.

In the prize winning process for the operating ball entering section, first, whether or not the game ball has entered the upper operating port 91 (start winning) is determined whether or not the winning detection flag for the lower operating port is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM. or not. When it is determined that the winning detection flag is stored, that is, when a detection signal indicating that the game ball has entered the upper operation port 91 is received, three game balls are paid to the payout control device 242. Set the prize ball command to make it come out. Then, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer HC on the game hall side of information indicating that the game ball has entered the upper working hole 91 . As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a prize has been awarded to the upper opening 91 .

After that, the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the reservation area for the upper operation port is read, and the reservation storage number related to the upper operation port reserved and stored in the reservation area is set. Subsequently, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the winning process ends.

On the other hand, when the winning detection flag for the upper working port is not stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM, that is, when the winning to the lower working port 92 instead of the upper working port 91 has occurred, the payout control device A prize ball command for paying out four game balls is set in 242 . The set prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output process of the normal process to be described later.

Subsequently, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer HC on the game hall side of information indicating that the game ball has entered the lower operation hole 92 . As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a prize has been awarded to the lower opening 92 .

After that, read out the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the reservation area for the lower side operation entrance section, set the reservation storage number related to the lower operation opening reserved and stored in the reservation area, and then acquire information Processing is performed, and the prize winning processing ends.

On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter either the upper operation opening 91 or the lower operation opening 92, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

In the information acquisition process, first, it is determined whether or not the set start pending storage number is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the number of starting pending memories is the upper limit, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit, the number of starting pending memories in the corresponding holding area for the result display section is incremented by 1, and the total The value stored in the pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as common pending number) is incremented by one.

After that, each value of the updated winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area, that is, 1 Store in the storage area corresponding to the incremented pending storage number.

In other words, when the start suspension memory number for the upper working opening is set, each value of the updated winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS is set to the upper working opening entry ball. Store in the first storage area of the empty storage areas in the reserve area for the club, that is, the start reserve storage number for the upper-side operation entry club incremented by 1 and the corresponding reserve area.

In addition, when the starting suspension memory number for the lower working port is set, each value of the updated hit random number counter C1, hit type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is reserved for the lower working entrance part. It is stored in the first memory area of the empty memory areas of the area, that is, the memory area corresponding to the start reservation memory number for the lower working ball entry portion incremented by one.

Subsequently, it is a process for making the notification/production control device 140 and the display control device 150, which are the control devices on the sub side (secondary side), recognize that the winning to the upper operating port 91 or the lower operating port 92 has occurred. Execute pending information confirmation processing and pending command setting processing. After that, if the winning detection flag is stored, the flag is erased and the information acquisition process is terminated. The pending command set in the pending command setting process will be transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 in the external output process of the normal process to be described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed during the remaining time.

In the normal process, in step S201, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242 . In addition, if a command for effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game cycle such as a variation start command, a type command, a variation end command, or a command corresponding to the effect for the open/close execution mode is set, it is notified. - Transmit to the production control device 140 . Also, according to the information set in the external output buffer of the RAM, the output setting for the external terminal board is performed.

Next, in step S202, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM.

In the subsequent step S203, a game round control process is executed to advance the game of each game round. In this game round control process, the success or failure of the jackpot or the like and the distribution judgment of the jackpot type are performed, and the setting of the fluctuation display of the pattern by the pattern display device 95, the display section for the operation opening in the main display unit 99 (main display section) and other display control.

After that, in step S204, game state transition processing for shifting the game state is executed. Although the details will be described later, this game state transition process shifts the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode), a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like.

In step S205, an electric role support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 93 provided in the lower operation opening 92 is executed. In this electric role support process, numerical information obtained from the electric role product release counter C4 stored in the electric role reservation area of the RAM is used to determine whether or not to open the electric role product 93. (support lottery) is performed, and when the electric role open state is won, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 93 is executed. In addition, display control of the through-gate display section in the main display unit 99 (main display section) is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the power opening lottery.

As already described, as modes of support by the electric accessory 93, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set, and transition to either support mode is performed in the game state transition process. In this case, if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM, the high frequency support mode is set, and if the flag is not set, the low frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not a high-frequency support flag is set in various flag storage areas of the RAM. Then, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 93 is in the open state is set larger than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role open state is won, and one time Set a longer open time. In the case of the high-frequency support mode, when the open state of the electric accessory 93 is won and the open state of the electric accessory 93 occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. Set the closing time to be shorter than the opening time of one time.

Incidentally, when shifting to the open/close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM.

In the subsequent step S206, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, on the condition that a shooting permission signal output from the power supply/shooting control device 243 is input based on the shooting operation being performed on the game ball shooting handle 41, a predetermined The solenoid 111 of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is excited once during the shooting period (0.6 sec in this embodiment). As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE. In other words, when irregular hitting such as so-called stop hitting is not performed, the shooting operation of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined cycle on the condition that the shooting operation is performed.

In subsequent step S207, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM. The power failure flag is set when the occurrence of power failure is confirmed by the power failure monitoring board and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board to the NMI terminal of the MPU, and is cleared in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S210, the variation type counter CS is updated.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power failure flag has been set, it means that a power failure has occurred, so the power failure processing from step S211 onwards is executed. That is, in step S211, the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then in step S212 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored, and in step S213 access to the RAM is prohibited. continues in an infinite loop until it can no longer run.

(Game state transition processing)
Next, the game state transition processing of step S204 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 20 and 21. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the game state transition process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special game state (during opening/closing execution mode). If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process advances to step S302 to determine whether it is the timing at which the first game cycle has ended (specifically, the timing at which a fixed display period set in advance has elapsed since the end of the variable display). judge. If it is not the time when the game cycle ends, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If it is the timing at which the game round ends, the process proceeds to step S303 to determine whether the game result of the current game round (result of the winning/failure lottery) corresponds to the transition to the special game state (opening/closing execution mode). determine whether or not Specifically, in the RAM of the main controller 162, any of the 16R probability variable jackpot result corresponding flag, the 8R probability variable jackpot result corresponding flag, the 8R probability variable jackpot result corresponding flag, and the 8R normal jackpot result corresponding flag is stored. determine whether or not If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If any one of the above flags is stored, a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) start process is executed in step S304. By the start processing, the operation regulation of the variable winning unit 83 by the lock device is released, and the operation of the variable winning unit 83 is allowed until the opening/closing execution mode is completed.

In step S305, it is determined whether or not the stored jackpot result corresponding flag corresponds to 16R. When an affirmative determination is made in step S305, "16" is set in the round number counter OC provided in various counter areas of the RAM in step S306. If a negative determination is made in step S305, "8" is set in the round number counter OC provided in various counter areas of the RAM in step S307.

After executing the processes of steps S306 and S307, it is determined in step S308 whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the first winning mode. That is, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot result or the 8R probability variable jackpot result B described above. If an affirmative determination is made in step S308, the process proceeds to step S309. In step S309, the first winning mode flag is set in various flag storage areas of the RAM.

After executing the process of step S309, or when a negative determination is made in step S308, the process proceeds to step S310, and an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 150 at step S201 in the normal processing (FIG. 19). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 95, and the determined display mode is output from the notification/effect control device 140 to the display control device 150 as a display content command. In the display control device 150, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/production control device 140, the display corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode of this time, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the pattern display device 95 is executed so that the moving image display of the character, etc., and the switching of the background image, etc. are performed. After executing the process of step S310, the external signal setting process is executed in step S311, and the game state transition process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S301, when it is determined that the game is in the special game state (during opening/closing execution mode) in step S301, the process proceeds to step S312. In step S312, it is determined whether or not the standby time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. When the waiting time for the opening has passed, the state switching process (ball entry control process) of the variable winning unit 83 is executed in step S313. Here, the state switching processing of the variable winning unit 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(State switching process of variable winning unit 83)
In the state switching process of the variable winning unit 83, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball is being guided to either the first ball entering section 331 or the second ball entering section 341. . Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the drive motor 321 in the variable winning unit 83 . If guidance to the ball-entering sections 331 and 341 is not in progress, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the value of the round number counter OC is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S402, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC is "0". The timer counter TC is a counter that is referred to when ascertaining the guidance period and the non-guidance period (interval period) to the ball-entering units 331 and 341, and its value is changed each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. is decremented by "1". If a negative determination is made in step S403, this state switching process ends.

When the value of the round number counter OC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC is "0", the process proceeds to step S404 to determine whether the current opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the first winning mode. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is in the opening/closing execution mode in which the first ball-entering section 331 is the guidance destination. When an affirmative determination is made in step S404, the flow advances to step S405 to execute processing for forming a flow path (first guide route GP1) to the first ball entering portion 331. FIG. Specifically, a drive signal is output to rotate the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 by 90° in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction). On the other hand, if the current opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the second winning mode, a negative determination is made in step S404, and the process proceeds to step S406. In step S406, a process of forming a flow path (second guide route GP2) to the second ball entering portion 341 is executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to rotate the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 by 90 degrees in the second specific direction (clockwise direction).

After executing the process of step S405 or step S406, the process advances to step S407 to set the timer counter TC to "15000" (equivalent to 30 sec), and in the subsequent step S408 to set the winning counter PC to "8". In other words, in the variable winning unit 83 of the present embodiment, (1) the occurrence of a predetermined number of winnings (8) and (2) the elapse of a predetermined guidance period (30 sec) are set as round end conditions (guidance end conditions). be done.

After executing the process of step S408, in step S409, a guidance start command indicating that guidance to the ball-entering sections 331 and 341 has started (that the round has started) is set, and this state switching process is executed. finish. This set guidance start command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification/effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the start of guidance based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S401, if it is determined in step S401 that guidance to the first ball-entering section 331 or the second ball-entering section 341 is in progress, the process proceeds to step S410, and the value of the timer counter TC is set to "0". ” is determined. If the value of the timer counter TC is not "0", the process advances to step S411 to determine whether or not the game ball has won a prize in one of the first ball entering section 331 and the second ball entering section 341 which is set as the guide destination. is determined based on detection signals from the detection sensors 334 and 344 . If no prize has been won, the state switching process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a prize has been won, a winning command setting process is executed in step S412. The winning command is output to the notification/effect control device 140, and the effect during the opening/closing execution mode executed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 changes according to the winning command.

After executing the command setting process in step S412, the process proceeds to step S413. In step S413, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the subsequent step S414, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S414, that is, if the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or if an affirmative determination is made in step S410 (that is, if the value of the timer counter TC is determined to be "0") case) means that the round end condition (guidance end condition) is satisfied. In this case, guidance end processing is executed in step S415. Specifically, when the current opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the first winning mode, the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 is rotated by 90° in the second specific direction to return to the initial state. A drive signal is output to the drive motor 321 . On the other hand, if the opening/closing execution mode this time corresponds to the second winning mode, the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 is rotated by 90 degrees in the first specific direction to return to the initial state. output the drive signal to

After performing the process of step S415, it progresses to step S416 and performs the update process of the round number counter OC. Specifically, when the value of the round number counter OC is not "0", the same round number counter OC is decremented by 1, and when the value of the round number counter OC is "0", the same round number counter OC is Keep the value of '0'.

After that, in step S417, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the round number counter OC is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S417, the process proceeds to step S418. At step S418, the timer counter TC is set to "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec).

After executing the process of step S417, a guidance end command is set in step S419, and this state switching process ends. This set guidance end command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the end of the round based on the received guidance end command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

Returning to the description of step S417, when it is determined in step S417 that the value of the round number counter OC is "0", the process proceeds to step S420. In step S420, an ending start process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time is set for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM is set in waiting time counter areas provided in various counter areas of the RAM.

After that, in step S421, after setting the ending command, the state switching process ends. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 20), after executing the state switching process in step S313, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter OC is "0" in step S314. It is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has passed. If the value of the round number counter OC is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not passed, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the round number counter OC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has passed, in step S316, after executing the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the game is executed. Terminate state transition processing. When the opening/closing execution mode of this time corresponds to the probability variable jackpot result, the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 93 is set to the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the current opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the normal jackpot result, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 93 is set to the high frequency support mode. Unlike the probability variable jackpot result, the upper limit is set for the number of times of support for the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the normal jackpot result. Specifically, "100" is set to the number-of-games counter stored in various counter areas of the RAM. As a result, the high-frequency support mode is maintained until 100 games are played after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the high-frequency support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode when the number reaches "100". .

Here, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 22 and 23, the game flow in the first winning mode and the game flow in the second winning mode will be additionally explained.

In the first winning mode, the object to be driven is limited to the first movable body 350, and when the round start condition is satisfied, the first movable body The former of 350 and second movable body 360 moves from the retracted position to the projecting position. As a result, a first guide path GP1 that slopes downward toward the first ball-entering portion 331 is formed in the specific area SE between the ball-entering portions 331 and 341 .

In this state, the game ball flowing down the game area PE and reaching the specific area SE of the variable winning unit 83 changes its moving direction so as to face the first ball entering portion 331 side, and hits the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350. By moving along, it flows into the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entrance portion 331 . At this time, since the movement of the game ball toward the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entering portion 341 is restricted by the first movable body 350, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE does not flow into the entrance portion 342. Avoided.

When the number of winnings to the first ball entering section 331 reaches the predetermined number (upper limit number), or when the guidance period elapses before reaching the upper limit number, FIG. , the first movable body 350 moves from the protruded position to the retracted position. As a result, the guidance of the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331 is canceled, and the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is difficult to enter the first ball entering portion 331 .

When a predetermined interval period has passed after the end of guidance, the first movable body 350 moves to the projecting position again as shown in FIGS. 22(a)→22(b). As a result, the guidance to the first ball-entering portion 331 is resumed. In the first winning mode, such motion of the first movable body 350 is repeated, so that the winning to the first ball entering portion 331 occurs frequently, and the winning ball based on the entering ball to the second ball entering portion 341. increases the number of balls held by the player.

In the second winning mode, the object to be driven is limited to the second movable body 360, and when the round start condition is satisfied, the first movable body The latter of 350 and second movable body 360 moves from the retracted position to the projecting position. As a result, a second guide path GP2 that slopes downward toward the second ball-entering portion 341 is formed in the specific region SE between the ball-entering portions 331 and 341 .

In this state, the game ball flowing down the game area PE and reaching the specific area SE of the variable winning unit 83 changes its moving direction so as to face the second ball entering portion 341 side, and hits the upper surface 361 of the second movable body 360. By moving along, it flows into the inlet portion 342 of the second ball entering portion 341 . At this time, since the movement of the game ball toward the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331 is restricted by the second movable body 360, the inflow of the game ball reaching the specific area SE into the entrance portion 332 is prevented. Avoided.

When the number of prizes won into the second ball entering section 341 reaches the upper limit number described above, or when the guidance period described above has passed before the upper limit number is reached, FIG. 23(b) → FIG. As shown, the second movable body 360 moves from the extended position to the retracted position. As a result, the guidance of the game ball to the second ball entering portion 341 is canceled, and it becomes difficult for the game ball that has reached the specific area SE to enter the second ball entering portion 341 .

When a predetermined interval period has passed after the end of guidance, the second movable body 360 moves to the projecting position again as shown in FIGS. 23(a)→23(b). As a result, the guidance to the second ball-entering portion 341 is resumed. In the second prize winning mode, by repeating such a movement of the second movable body 360, prize winning to the second ball entering portion 341 occurs frequently, and a prize ball based on the ball entering the second ball entering portion 341 is generated. increases the number of balls held by the player.

Regarding the first ball-entering part 331 and the second ball-entering part 341, although the ball-entering probability of the game ball reaching the specific area SE is the same, it is given based on the ball entering the ball-entering parts 331 and 341. There are differences in benefits. Therefore, when the first winning mode and the second winning mode are compared, there is a difference in the increasing rate (increasing speed) of the held balls. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 24, the variation of the holding ball depending on the type of the jackpot result will be described.

The 16R probability variable jackpot result corresponds to the first winning mode, and the guide destination of the game ball is set to be the first ball entering section 331 . The privilege based on the ball entering the first ball entering section 331 is 15 prize balls, and the number of balls possessed by the player is greatly increased.

The 8R probability variable jackpot result B also corresponds to the first winning mode, and the guide destination of the game ball is set to be the first ball entering section 331 as in the 16R probability variable jackpot result. However, while the number of rounds to be executed for the 16R probability variable jackpot result is "16", the number of rounds to be executed for the 8R probability variable jackpot result B is "8". Therefore, although the increasing speed of the possessed balls is the same as the 16R high probability big hit result, the total number of winning balls is about half of the 16R high probability big hit result.

Regarding the 8R probability variable jackpot result A, similarly to the 8R probability variable jackpot result B, it is common in that it shifts to a high probability game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, and during the opening and closing execution mode. It is the same as the 8R probability variable jackpot result B in that the number of rounds to be executed is also "8". However, the 8R probability variable jackpot result A corresponds to the second winning mode, and the guide destination of the game ball is set to be the second ball entering section 341 . The privilege based on the ball entering the second ball entering section 341 is 10 prize balls, which is less than the prize ball based on the ball entering the first ball entering section 331. - 特許庁As for the first ball entry part 331 and the second ball entry part 341, the game ball entry probability is the same, so the increase speed of the player's balls and the total number of acquisitions are lower than the 8R probability variable jackpot result B. It will happen.

Regarding the 8R normal jackpot result, like the 8R variable jackpot result A, it corresponds to the second winning mode. The total number of acquisitions will be less.

By thus providing a difference in the manner in which the privilege is granted, the monotony of the game in the opening/closing execution mode is suppressed. If a plurality of variable winning devices with different benefits to be given are used in combination, the diversification of games can be realized. However, if an attempt is made to secure the occupied area of those variable winning devices, it becomes difficult for them to coexist with other game components arranged in the game area PE. Regarding the variable winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment, it is necessary to devise a configuration in which the first variable winning device having the first ball winning portion 331 and the second variable winning device having the second ball winning portion 341 coexist. As a result, it is possible to dramatically reduce the area occupied. Here, with reference to FIG. 25, a supplementary explanation will be given of the difference from the conventional variable winning unit. FIG. 25(a) is a schematic diagram showing the variable winning unit 83 shown in this embodiment, and FIG. 25(b) is a schematic diagram showing a conventional variable winning unit 83X. are listed side by side.

In the gaming machine shown in FIG. 25(b), the variable winning unit 83X is composed of two variable winning devices (the first ball-entering section 331X and the second ball-entering section 341X). This is the same as the variable winning unit 83 shown (see FIG. 25(a)). Here, the first ball-entering portion 331X has a horizontally long shape, and the entrance portion 332X of the first ball-entering portion 331X can be opened and closed by a first movable body 350X (first shutter) that also has a horizontally long shape. covered. The second ball entrance portion 341X also has a horizontally long shape, and the entrance portion 342X of the second ball entrance portion 341X is covered by a horizontally long second movable body 360X (second shutter) in an openable and closable state. ing. By moving the first movable body 350X from the closed position to the open position, the ball is allowed to enter the entrance portion 332X of the first ball-entering part 331X, and by moving the second movable body 360X from the closed position to the open position, , the ball is allowed to enter the inlet portion 342X of the second ball-entering portion 341X.

In this variable winning unit 83X, two laterally long variable winning devices are vertically arranged to reduce the size of the variable winning unit 83X. However, since the areas where game balls are introduced into the respective ball entry sections 331X and 341X are individually set, the area occupied by the entire variable winning unit 83X is increased.

On the other hand, in the variable winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment, the area (specific area SE) sandwiched between the first ball-entering part 331 and the second ball-entering part 341 is a It functions as an introductory region, and the introductory region to each of the ball entry portions 331 and 341 is shared. Specifically, the inflow port OE to the specific area SE substantially functions as an entrance port for both variable winning devices. As a result, even if the lead-in area is increased to improve the frequency of ball entry into the ball entry portions 331 and 341, the variable winning unit 83 is prevented from increasing in size. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25, the vertical width L1 of the variable winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment is approximately half the vertical width L2 of the conventional variable winning unit 83X.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a gaming machine of the type in which a player is awarded a privilege by entering a ball into a ball entering portion formed in the game area PE, the player is more likely to receive benefits when the size of the ball entering portion is larger than when the size of the ball entering portion is small. It is easy to give the impression that it is easy to enter the ball. However, when it is attempted to dispose a large-sized ball-entering part in the game area PE, there is a concern that the area occupied by the ball-entering part in the game area will increase, and the degree of freedom of arrangement will be significantly reduced. In particular, when trying to diversify the game by simultaneously using a plurality of ball-entering units with differentiated benefits based on ball-entering, it is possible that a plurality of large-sized ball-entering units exist in the game area PE. It is assumed that the influence on the above arrangement will be stronger.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, the area (specified area SE) sandwiched between the first ball entrance portion 331 (more specifically, the entrance portion 332) and the second ball entrance portion 341 (more specifically, the entrance portion 342) is It is shared as an introduction area for introducing a game ball to the ball parts 331 and 341, and the game ball that has reached this specific area SE is guided to each ball entry part 331 by a first movable body 350 and a second movable body 360 as "guide means". , 341, the occurrence of the above inconvenience is suppressed. That is, while miniaturizing the ball-entering portions 331 and 341 themselves, the gap between the first ball-entering portion 331 and the second ball-entering portion 341 (that is, the inlet OE to the predetermined area) is made as if the ball-entering portions 331 and 341 are connected. It can be made to look like an entrance. This makes it possible to make the ball entering portions 331 and 341, which are actually small, appear larger than they actually are. Enlarging the appearance of the entrance by using the two ball-entering portions 331 and 341 in this way gives the player the impression that it is easy to enter the ball, which is advantageous in increasing the player's willingness to play.

It should be noted that each ball entering portion 331, 341 shown in the present embodiment is such that the distance between the first ball entering portion 331 and the second ball entering portion 341 is equal to the entrance portion of the ball entering portions 331, 341 in the front view of the gaming machine. It is configured to be larger than the opening width (longitudinal width) of 332 and 342 . As a result, it is possible to suitably exhibit the visual effect while suppressing the useless expansion of the area occupied by the variable winning unit 83 . Further, the movable bodies 350 and 360 described above are almost entirely contained within the specific area SE, and are prevented from protruding outside the specific area SE when viewed from the front of the game machine. Such a configuration is preferable for exhibiting the visual effect.

Under the condition that the variable winning unit 83 is in the first guidance state and the second guidance state, the game ball that has reached the specific region SE passes through (passes by) the specific region SE as it is. , 341 as an entrance. Here, in the present embodiment, the first movable body 350 forming the first guide path GP1 and the second movable body 360 forming the second guide path GP2 receive a game ball flowing down the game area PE and It is configured such that the flowing direction is changed so as to face the entrance sphere portions 331 and 341, which are the guide destinations. The first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are formed so as to straddle the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entrance portion 331 and the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entrance portion 341 . Therefore, almost all of the game balls that have reached the specific area SE under the conditions of the first guiding state and the second guiding state go to the first ball entering section 331 or the second ball entering section 341. It will be guided, and it is configured to avoid the passing of the game ball described above. As a result, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

In the structure in which the game ball is guided to the ball entry portions 331 and 341 by the inclination of the guide paths GP1 and GP2, if the inclination is gentle, the period required for guidance becomes longer, and if the inclination is increased, the vertical width of the variable winning unit 83 is increased. It gets bulky. Therefore, the horizontal width of each of the guide routes GP1 and GP2 in the side-by-side direction of the ball-entering portions 331 and 341 is aligned with the distance between the ball-entering portions 331 and 341, and the height difference between the guide routes GP1 and GP2 is adjusted to the ball-entering portions 331 and 341. By aligning the vertical width of 341, smooth guidance of the game ball can be realized while maximizing the guidance paths GP1 and GP2 so as to fit within the specific area SE.

When the two ball entry portions 331 and 341 are arranged side by side and the entrance portions 332 and 342 are opposed to each other, the ball is more likely to enter the ball entry portion which is not the guide destination. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, each of the guidance routes GP1 and GP2 is formed so as to block the inlet OE of the specific area SE and the entrance portion of the ball-entering portion that is not the guidance destination. It is possible to preferably avoid entering a ball into a non-existent ball entering portion.

In the configuration in which the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2 are formed in the specific area SE, the two guide routes GP1 and GP2 are partially overlapped so that the gap (flow A game ball passing through the entrance OE) can be used as a guide target, and both guide routes GP1 and GP2 can be favorably coexisted within a limited range.

When the specific area SE functions as an introduction part to the first ball-entering part 331 and the second ball-entering part 341, it becomes difficult or impossible to arrange other game parts in the specific area SE. . Therefore, by using this specific region SE as the motion region of the first movable body 350 for the first guide route GP1 and the second movable body 360 for the second guide route GP2, the motions of these movable bodies 350 and 360 can be In securing the area, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of dead space around the variable winning unit 83 in which other game components cannot be arranged. This is a preferable configuration for suitably improving the degree of freedom of arrangement of the variable winning unit 83 .

The first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are slidable in the thickness direction of the game board 80a, and the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by the movable bodies 350 and 360 protruding into the specific area SE. be done. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the expansion of the operation area of the movable bodies 350 and 360 to the part outside the specific area SE in the game area PE. Therefore, the coexistence of the variable winning unit 83 and the peripheral parts can be preferably realized.

As described above, it is preferable to use a plurality of variable prize winning devices each having a movable body and a ball-entering portion in order to diversify the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the area occupied by the prize winning devices will increase and the restrictions on the arrangement of the prize winning devices will become stronger. There is a concern that such restrictions on the placement may hinder the above-described effect of improving the degree of attention. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2 formed by the movable bodies 350 and 360 intersect, and one of the guide routes GP1 and GP2 is crossed. parts are shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the area occupied by the prize winning device from becoming large, and to suitably exhibit the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game. In addition, since the movement destination of the game ball is reversed while the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are partly overlapped, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in understanding the guide destination of the game ball due to the compression of the occupied area.

A first movable body 350 that forms the first guide path GP1 and a second movable body 360 that forms the second guide path GP2 receive a game ball flowing down the game area PE, and the ball entering portion serves as a guide destination in the flowing direction. It is configured to be changed so as to face the 331, 341 side. By constructing the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2 to intersect at the intermediate portion of the guide routes GP1 and GP2, the total length of the guide routes GP1 and GP2 (the width of receiving the game ball) is increased while at the same time It is possible to suitably suppress the increase in the size of the winning device caused by this. The intersection of the first guidance route GP1 and the second guidance route GP2 is located in the specific region SE, which is the region sandwiched between the first ball-entering portion 331 and the second ball-entering portion 341, and The guide routes GP1 and GP2 have the same length and inclination with respect to the horizontal plane. As a result, further miniaturization of the winning device is realized.

As shown in the present embodiment, both ball entry portions 331 and 341 are arranged such that entrance portions 332 and 342 face each other, and guide paths GP1 and GP2 are inclined downward toward those entrance portions 332 and 342. It is a sloping passageway. In this manner, in a configuration in which the game ball is guided using the inclinations of the guide paths GP1 and GP2, the movement speed of the game ball depends on the inclination angle. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the intersection point of the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2 in the specific area SE, the total length of the guide routes GP1 and GP2 (the receiving width of the game ball) is increased, the increase in size of the prize winning device caused by it can be suppressed.

In the configuration in which the first guide path GP1 formed by the first movable body 350 and the second guide path GP2 formed by the second movable body 360 intersect, the existence of the guide path on one side is dependent on the existence of the other movable body. It can be a factor that hinders the movement of In this regard, in the present embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are slidable in the thickness direction of the game board 80a. When the first movable body 350 is arranged at the projecting position (corresponding to the "guide position"), a part of the first movable body 350 projects from the front surface of the game board 80a to form the first guide path GP1. In the state where the second movable body 360 is arranged at the protruding position (corresponding to the "guide position"), a part of the second movable body 360 protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80a to form the second guide path GP2. It will be done. With such a configuration, the existence of the first guide path GP1 becomes a factor that hinders the movement of the second movable body 360, and the existence of the second guide path GP2 becomes a factor that hinders the movement of the first movable body 350. It is possible to suitably suppress As a result, it is possible to suitably alleviate the decrease in the degree of freedom in setting the operation timings of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 .

As described above, in the structure in which both movable bodies 350 and 360 are slid in the thickness direction of the game board 80a, one movable body 360 is formed with a recessed portion 363 (corresponding to the "insertion portion"). By inserting the other movable body 350 into the notch 363, it is possible to suitably avoid the movement of the other movable body being hindered by one movable body.

In a configuration in which the movable bodies 350 and 360 are flat plate-shaped and the rolling surfaces of the game balls on the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by the plate surfaces, the recessed portions 363 form the rolling surfaces (crossing points). A blank occurs. If this blank becomes excessively large, the game ball will drop through the blank, and the guiding function may deteriorate. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, among the thickness dimensions of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360, at least the movable body 350 in which the recessed portion 363 is not formed (the thickness of the movable body 350 that is inserted through the insertion portion) By forming the thickness dimension of the side movable body 350) to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

When a ball enters the first ball-entering section 331, 15 prize balls are given to the player as a "first privilege", and when a ball enters the second ball-entering section 341. , 10 prize balls are given to the player as a "second privilege". In this way, when there is a difference in the superiority of each ball entering portion 331, 341, it is difficult to smoothly guide the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331 on the side that is advantageous to the player. It is assumed that this may be a factor that lowers the player's desire to play, or that the superiority of the first ball-entering section 331 is lowered, making it difficult to differentiate the game. Therefore, the above-described blanks are formed not in the first guide route GP1 leading to the first ball-entering portion 331 to which a large privilege is granted, but to the second guide route GP2 leading to the second ball-entering portion 341 to which a small privilege is granted. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of these various inconveniences.

As for the above-described first guidance route GP1 and second guidance route GP2, it is difficult or impossible to dispose other game components on the routes. Therefore, a configuration is adopted in which the area in which the first guide path GP1 is formed is used as the operation area of the second movable body 360 and the area in which the second guide system GP2 is formed is used as the operation area of the first movable body 350. By doing so, it is possible to suitably secure the operation area. If such a coexistence relationship is established, even if the overall length of each of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 is increased to increase the receiving width of the game ball, it is preferable that the ball entry device is enlarged due to this. can be suppressed to

The ball entry sections 331 and 341 are provided side by side in the game area PE, and the game ball is guided to the respective ball entry sections 331 and 341 using the movable bodies 350 and 360 as variable "guide sections". This is preferable for realizing diversification of games and increasing attention to the games. However, if a drive section (actuator) is provided for each of the ball entry sections 331 and 341, there is a concern that the electrical configuration of the gaming machine will become complicated.

In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the drive mode of the drive motor 321 to the first drive mode (rotation in the first specific direction), the first guide path GP1 is formed by the first movable body 350. Then, by setting it to the second drive mode (rotation in the second specific direction), the second guide path GP2 is formed by the second movable body 360, and the configuration for switching the guide destination of the game ball, that is, the variable winning according to the drive mode If the unit 83 is configured to switch between the non-guiding state/first guiding state/second guiding state, it is possible to diversify the games while preventing the electrical configuration of the game machine from becoming complicated.

As described above, in order to switch the guide destination according to the difference in the operation mode of the drive motor 321, the rotation direction of the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 is reversed as shown in the present embodiment. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation stability when performing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the reliability of the game machine due to the operation failure or the like with a simple configuration.

When the first movable body 350 for the first ball-entering section 331 and the second movable body 360 for the second ball-entering section 341 are used together, if the movable bodies 350 and 360 simply share the driving section, The following inconveniences may occur. That is, when the first movable body 350 is moved, the second movable body 360 follows it, and when the second movable body 360 is moved, the first movable body 350 follows it. As a result, there is concern that the load on the driving unit will increase and the responsiveness during state switching will decrease.

Therefore, in the transmission block 325 shown in this embodiment, when the first movable body 350 is moved, power transmission to the second movable body 360 is avoided, and when the second movable body 360 is moved, By avoiding the transmission of power to the first movable body 350, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load when the plurality of movable bodies 350 and 360 are to be driven, and to suitably suppress a decrease in responsiveness. In addition, by devising so that the timings of the operations of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 do not overlap, and by limiting the targets of power transmission from the drive motor 321, the decrease in responsiveness can be more preferably suppressed. It is possible.

It should be noted that the variable winning unit 83 shown in the first embodiment can also be configured as follows.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described first embodiment, the out port 86 is arranged between the inlet portion 332 of the first ball-entering portion 331 and the inlet portion 342 of the second ball-entering portion 341, but it is limited to this. isn't it. It is also possible to dispose other ball entry parts (for example, general winning openings, operation openings, through gates, etc.) between the entrance part 332 of the first ball entry part 331 and the entrance part 342 of the second ball entry part 341. is. A specific example will be described below with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 26(a), a through gate 84A through which game balls can pass is provided above the specific area SE. A lower operating port 92A is provided at a position below the through gate 84A with the movable bodies 350 and 360 interposed therebetween, and a game ball passing through the through gate 84A is directed toward the lower operating port 92A.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), for the electric accessory 93A attached to the lower working opening 92A, the guide piece 93aA slides in the front-rear direction to guide the ball entering the lower working opening 92A. It is configured to switch between the non-guiding state and the non-guiding state. By aligning the movement direction of the guide piece 93aA with the movement direction of the movable bodies 350 and 360, the movement area of the electric accessory 93A and the movement areas of the movable bodies 350 and 360 are prevented from overlapping each other.

<Modification 2>
In the above-described first embodiment, the entrance portions 332 and 342 of the ball entry portions 331 and 341 are oriented sideways, so that the movable bodies 350 and 360 are positioned at the retracted positions, and the game passes through the specific region SE. Although the balls are prevented from flowing into the inlet portions 332, 342, in the configuration in which the inlet portions 332, 342 are always open, the possibility of accidental ball entry cannot be denied in the above state. Therefore, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 27(a), a first shutter 370B for opening and closing the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entrance portion 331 and a second shutter 380B for opening and closing the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entrance portion 341 are provided. are provided, and when the movable bodies 350 and 360 are arranged at the retracted position, the shutters 370B and 380B prevent the balls from entering the respective ball-entering portions 331 and 341. It is possible to suitably avoid entering a ball.

The shutters 370B and 380B are movable between a protruding position where they protrude into the specific area SE through slits 318B and 319B formed in the front surface portion 312B of the housing 310B and a retracted position where the protruding is avoided. It is connected to the movable bodies 350 and 360 via. The movement of the variable winning unit 83B will be described below with reference to FIGS. 27(b) to (d). 27(b) to (d), for convenience of explanation, the movable bodies 350, 360 and the shutters 370B, 380B arranged at the retracted positions are indicated by dashed lines.

As shown in FIG. 27(b), both shutters 370B and 380B are waiting at the projecting position while both movable bodies 350 and 360 are waiting at the retracted position.

In the first winning mode, as shown in FIGS. 27(b) to 27(c), the first movable body 350 moves from the retracted position to the projecting position, and interlocking (synchronously) therewith the first shutter 370B is opened. Move from the extended position to the retracted position. As a result, the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331 is opened, and the ball can enter the entrance portion 332 via the first guide path GP1. When the first movable body 350 moves to the retracted position as the round end condition is satisfied, the first shutter 370B moves from the retracted position to the protruding position in conjunction with (synchronized with) this (Fig. 27(c) → Figure 27(b)). As a result, the entrance portion 332 of the first ball-entering portion 331 is closed, and the ball cannot be entered into the entrance portion 332 .

In the second winning mode, as shown in FIGS. 27(b) to 27(d), the second movable body 360 moves from the retracted position to the projecting position, and interlocking (synchronously) therewith, the second shutter 380B is opened. Move from the extended position to the retracted position. As a result, the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341 is opened, and the ball can enter the entrance portion 342 via the second guide path GP2. When the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position with the fulfillment of the round end condition, the second shutter 380B moves from the retracted position to the protruded position in conjunction with (synchronized with) this (FIG. 27(d) → FIG. 27(b)). As a result, the entrance portion 342 of the second ball-entering portion 341 is closed, and the ball cannot be entered into the entrance portion 342 .

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are intersected by inserting the first movable body 350 into the recessed portion 363 formed in the second movable body 360 . It was realized. In such a configuration, as the width of the recessed portion 363 increases, the blank formed on the rolling surface of the second guide path GP2 increases. As a result, it is assumed that the behavior of the game ball moving along the second guide path GP2 is likely to be disturbed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28(a), it is preferable to form a concave portion (groove portion 353C) into which the second movable body 360C is received at a portion of the lower surface 352C of the first movable body 350C that intersects with the second movable body 360C. Thereby, the width of the recessed portion 363C formed in the first movable body 350C can be reduced. In order to embody such a technical idea, a structure corresponding to the groove portion 353C may be arranged on the upper surface side of the first movable body 350C. However, in such a configuration, unevenness occurs on the rolling surface forming the first guide path GP1, which causes disturbance in the behavior of the game ball heading toward the first ball entering portion 331. FIG. In other words, by forming the groove portion 353C on the lower surface side instead of the upper surface side, the smoothness of the rolling surface of the game ball on the first guide path GP1 is ensured, and the rolling surface of the game ball on the second guide path GP2 is smooth. There is a technical significance that it can promote the smoothing of

Incidentally, the target for forming the notch is not limited to the first movable body 350, and the second movable body 360 can also be formed. Moreover, when forming a notch in the first movable body 350 , a structure corresponding to the groove portion 353</b>C may be arranged in the second movable body 360 .

<Modification 4>
In the above-described first embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are configured to intersect. It is sufficient that the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2 formed by the second movable body 360 intersect. For example, as shown in FIG. 28(b), cutouts 353D and 363D are formed in both the first movable body 350D and the second movable body 360D, and the ball entrance portions 331 and 341 are arranged side by side. A configuration in which a gap is formed between the first movable body 350D and the second movable body 360D may be employed.

<Modification 5>
In the first embodiment described above, the second movable body 360 is disposed at a position overlapping the first guide path GP1 formed by the first movable body 350, and the second guide path formed by the second movable body 360 Although the first movable body 350 is arranged at the position overlapping GP2, it is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the movable body that forms the other guide path is arranged at a position overlapping at least one of the guide paths. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 28(c), the first movable body 350E may be arranged at a position overlapping the second guide path GP2 formed by the second movable body 360E. In this case, it is not always necessary to cross the first guidance route GP1 and the second guidance route GP2.

<Modification 6>
In a configuration in which the specific area SE sandwiched between the first ball entering part 331 and the second ball entering part 341 functions as an introduction area when game balls flow into the ball entering parts 331 and 341, the specific area SE is The gaming machine is covered from the front with a cover part or the like to reduce the visibility of game balls passing behind the cover part (specific area SE) and the visibility of entrance parts 332, 342 and movable bodies 350, 360 located behind the cover part. may be configured. Most of the game balls that reach the specific area SE under the condition that the first guide route GP1 is formed flow into the first ball entry part 331, and are specified under the condition that the second guide route GP2 is formed. Most of the game balls that have reached the area SE flow into the second ball entry section 341 . In view of such circumstances, the gap (inflow port OE) between the first ball-entering portion 331 (specifically, the upper end) and the second ball-entering portion 341 (specifically, the upper end) is an entrance to the variable prize winning device. This impression can be given to the player, and it is preferable to impress that the gap (inflow port OE) larger than the size of the actual ball entry portions 331 and 341 is the entrance, in order to improve the player's desire to play. . Therefore, by lowering the visibility of portions (entrance portions 332, 342 of entrance portions 331, 341, etc.) other than the gap (inflow port OE) by the above-described cover portion, the above effect can be exhibited more preferably. can. Incidentally, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 6, the variable winning unit 83 is positioned below the game area PE, and is arranged so as to be lower than the eye level of the player. Therefore, the player looks into the gap (inflow port OE) between the ball entry parts 331 and 341 from above, and even if the cover part covers the entire specific area SE, the gap ( The visibility of the inlet OE) is not obstructed.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are crossed by inserting the first movable body 350 into the recess 363 formed in the second movable body 360 . did. In such a configuration, the presence of the recessed portion 363 causes a blank on the rolling surface of the second guide path GP<b>2 formed by the second movable body 360 . If a game ball moving along the second guide path GP2 touches the edge of the recessed portion 363 while crossing this blank, the behavior of the game ball may be disturbed. This is advantageous in suppressing the monotony of the game movement by giving a difference between the movement of the game ball toward the first ball entering section 331 and the movement of the game ball toward the second ball entering section 341. . However, if consideration is given to smoothing the movement of the game ball toward either the first ball-entering portion 331 or the second ball-entering portion 341 so that the game progresses quickly, the blank can be made as small as possible. preferable. One of the features of the present embodiment is that it is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 29, the above device will be described, focusing on differences from the first embodiment. FIG. 29(a) is a perspective view of the variable winning unit 83F, and FIG. 29(b) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83F.

The housing 310F of the variable winning unit 83F is formed with a core 390F protruding from the front surface 312F to the specific area SE. The core 390F is arranged at an intersection where the first movable body 350F (specifically, the first guide path GP1) and the second movable body 360F (specifically, the second guide path GP2) intersect.

The first movable body 350F has a notch 353F formed in a portion protruding into the specific region SE, thereby bifurcating a predetermined range including the front end. The slit 314F is also divided into two so as to be positioned on both left and right sides of the core 390F. Similarly to the first movable body 350F, the second movable body 360F also has a recessed portion 363F formed in a portion protruding into the specific region SE, thereby bifurcating a predetermined range including the front end. Along with this, the slits 314F formed in the front surface portion 312F are also divided into two so as to be positioned on both left and right sides of the core 390F.

The core 390F is formed so as to have a rhombic cross section, and the upper surface thereof is provided with a first inclined portion 391F inclined downward to the right and a second inclined portion 392F inclined downward to the left. The first inclined portion 391F is located on the same plane as the upper surface 351F of the first movable body 350F, and the second inclined portion 392F is located on the same plane as the upper surface 361F of the second movable body 360F.

Thus, when the core 390F is arranged in the specific area SE, there is a possibility that the gaming ball passing through the specific area SE hits the core 390F. A gaming ball that hits the core 390F changes its moving direction, and there is a possibility that it will head toward the entrance portion 332 of the first ball-entering portion 331 or the entrance portion 342 of the second ball-entering portion 341 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, a first shutter 370F for opening and closing the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entrance portion 331 and a second shutter 380F for opening and closing the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entrance portion 341 are provided. When the bodies 350F and 360F are arranged at the retracted position, the shutters 370F and 380F avoid accidental ball entry into the ball entry portions 331 and 341. there is

The shutters 370F and 380F are movable between a protruding position where they protrude into the specific area SE through slits 318F and 319F formed in the front surface portion 312F of the housing 310F and a retracted position where the projection is avoided. are connected to the movable bodies 350F and 360F via the .

Now, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 30, the movement of the variable winning unit 83F will be described.

In the state (initial state) in which the game ball is not guided to either the first ball entering portion 331 or the second ball entering portion 341, as shown in FIG. , and both shutters 370F and 380F are on standby at the projecting positions. As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is not allowed to enter the ball entry portions 331 and 341 .

In the first winning mode, as shown in FIGS. 30(a) to 30(b), the first movable body 350F moves from the retracted position to the projecting position, and interlocking (synchronously) therewith the first shutter 370F is opened. Move from the extended position to the retracted position. As a result, the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331 is opened, and the ball can enter the entrance portion 332 via the first guide path GP1.

When the first movable body 350F is arranged at the projecting position, the core 390F is inserted into the notch 353F of the first movable body 350F, and the blank of the upper surface 351F of the first movable body 350F is the first inclined portion of the core 390F. Complemented by 391F. That is, a series of rolling surfaces are formed by the upper surface 351F of the first movable body 350F and the first inclined portion 391F of the core 390F. In this rolling surface, the blank portion is complemented by the core 390F (first inclined portion 391F). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disturbance of the behavior of the game ball moving along the first guide path GP1, and smoothly guide the game ball toward the first ball entering portion 331. FIG.

In this state, the entire core 390F including the second inclined portion 392F is accommodated in the notch 353F of the first movable body 350F, and is prevented from protruding toward the first guide path GP1. This suppresses the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first guide path GP1 from being disturbed by being caught by the edge of the second inclined portion 392F.

When the first movable body 350F moves to the retracted position as the round end condition is satisfied, the first shutter 370F moves from the retracted position to the protruding position in conjunction with (synchronously with) the first movable body 350F. As a result, the entrance portion 332 of the first ball-entering portion 331 is closed, and the ball cannot be entered into the entrance portion 332 (see FIG. 30(b)→FIG. 30(a)).

In the second winning mode, as shown in FIGS. 30(a) to 30(c), the second movable body 360F moves from the retracted position to the projecting position, and interlocking (synchronized) therewith, the second shutter 380F is opened. Move from the extended position to the retracted position. As a result, the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341 is opened, and the ball can enter the entrance portion 342 via the second guide path GP2.

When the second movable body 360F is arranged at the projecting position, the core 390F is inserted into the recessed portion 363F of the second movable body 360F, and the blank of the upper surface 361F of the second movable body 360F is the second inclination of the core 390F. Complemented by part 392F. That is, a series of rolling surfaces are formed by the upper surface 361F of the second movable body 360F and the second inclined portion 392F of the core 390F. In this rolling surface, the blank portion is complemented by the core 390F (second inclined portion 392F). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disturbance of the behavior of the game ball moving along the second guide path GP2 and guide the game ball smoothly toward the first ball entering portion 331 .

In this state, the entire core 390F including the first inclined portion 391F is accommodated in the recessed portion 363F of the second movable body 360F, and is prevented from protruding toward the second guide path GP2. This prevents the behavior of the game ball flowing down the second guide path GP2 from being disturbed by being caught by the edge of the second inclined portion 392F.

When the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position as the round end condition is satisfied, the second shutter 380F moves from the retracted position to the protruding position in conjunction with (synchronously with) the second movable body 360 . As a result, the entrance portion 342 of the second ball-entering portion 341 is closed, and the ball cannot be entered into the entrance portion 342 .

By forming a recess in either one of the first movable body and the second movable body through which the other can be inserted, the first movable body and the second movable body can be intersected. However, in such a configuration, the width of the recess increases due to the influence of the thickness of the movable body and the intersection angle of the two movable bodies. In consideration of such circumstances, it is not preferable to tighten the restrictions on the thickness and crossing angle of the movable body. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, if the cores 390F disposed at the intersections of the movable bodies 350F, 360F are used together to form the guide paths GP1, GP2, the movable bodies 350F, 360F It is possible to relax the restrictions on the thickness and crossing angle of the . This realizes a practically preferable configuration.

In a game machine of a type equipped with a variable prize winning device that changes the probability of entering a ball into a ball-entering section, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game by enhancing the contrast between guidance and non-guidance. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the winning device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) at the time of guidance is wide. However, when trying to expand the receiving width by simply enlarging the movable body that forms the guide path, the area occupied by the prize-winning device increases. In other words, when trying to increase the number of game balls to be guided by increasing the receiving width of the game balls, the area occupied by the movable body increases. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, the core 390F (corresponding to the "passage forming portion") forming part of one guide path is used to form part of the other guide path. If so, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience described above. This can contribute to an improvement in the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the variable winning units 83F.

When the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by the movable bodies 350F and 360F and the core 390F, gaps such as steps are formed in the guide paths GP1 and GP2 due to positional deviations between the movable bodies 350F and 360F and the core 390F. occur. Such a gap can be a factor that interferes with smooth flow, such as game balls being caught. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the moving directions of the movable bodies 350F and 360F are configured to match the projecting direction of the core 390F, the occurrence of the inconvenience caused by the positional deviation of the movable bodies 350F and 360F can be suppressed. can.

Further, when a game ball is caught between the movable bodies 350F, 360F and the core 390F, the core 390F may be deformed such as strain. In this regard, by devising the operation direction of each movable body 350F, 360F as shown in the present embodiment, when the movable body 350F, 360F moves from the retracted position to the projecting position, the movable body 350F, 360F and the core 390F can move. It is possible to avoid that a game ball is caught between. By protecting the core 390F in this way, it is possible to contribute to the smooth flow of game balls along the guide paths GP1 and GP2.

<Third Embodiment>
In the second embodiment, the fixed core 390F is used to reduce the blank of the rolling surface. Here, if the core 390F is provided with a function of forming a rolling surface, deformation such as distortion occurs in the core 390F, and the boundaries between the core 390F and the movable bodies 350F and 360F at the rolling surface. A step may occur in a part. Considering that the core 390F is arranged in the specific area SE, which is the passing area of the game ball, it is assumed that the chances of the game ball colliding with the core 390F increase. In order to suppress deformation of the core 390F, it is effective to improve the strength of the core 390F, but in view of the fact that the core 390F is cantilevered, it is important to reinforce its root portion. Due to such circumstances, there is a concern that the distance from the slits 318F and 319F located on both sides of the core 390F increases, and as a result, it becomes difficult to reduce the blank formed on the rolling surface.

One of the features of the present embodiment is that measures are taken in view of such circumstances. The countermeasure will be described below with reference to FIG. 31, focusing on the differences from the second embodiment. FIG. 31(a) is a perspective view showing the variable winning unit 83G, and FIG. 31(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the movable bodies 350G, 360G and the core 390G.

The core 390G is assembled to the housing 310G so as to be slidable in the same direction (back and forth direction) as the sliding direction of the first movable body 350G and the second movable body 360G. The position is switched between a projecting position projecting from 312G into the specific area SE and a retracted position avoiding projecting into the specific area SE.

A spring 396G is provided in the housing 310G as a biasing means for biasing the core 390G rearward, and the core 390G is in a standby state at the retracted position due to the biasing force of the spring 396G.

An arm portion 355G is formed at the rear end portion of the first movable body 350G, and the arm portion 355G abuts on a receiving portion 395G formed on the rear surface of the core 390G from behind. Similarly, an arm portion 365G is also formed at the rear end portion of the second movable body 360G, and the arm portion 365G abuts on the receiving portion 395G of the core 390G from behind.

As shown in FIGS. 31(1) to 31(2), when the first movable body 350G slides from the retracted position to the projecting position, the arm portion 355G of the first movable body 350G moves the receiving portion 395G forward. As a result, the core 390G moves forward against the biasing force of the spring 396G. That is, the core 390G moves from the retracted position to the projecting position together with the first movable body 350G. As a result, the first guide path GP1 is formed by the first movable body 350G and the core 390G (see FIG. 31(a2)). When the round end condition is satisfied and the first movable body 350G moves from the projecting position to the retracted position, the core 390G moves to the retracted position by the biasing force of the spring 396G. At this time, the arm portion 355G of the first movable body 350G functions as a stopper that prevents the core 390G from returning in advance, and the movements of the first movable body 350G and the core 390G are synchronized.

Note that when the core 390G is interlocked with the first movable body 350G, the core 390G moves away from the arm portion 365G of the second movable body 360G, and the second movable body 360G and the core 390G are not interlocked.

As shown in FIGS. 31(1) to 31(3), when the second movable body 360G slides from the retracted position to the projecting position, the arm portion 365G of the second movable body 360G moves the receiving portion 395G forward. As a result, the core 390G moves forward against the biasing force of the spring 396G. That is, the core 390G moves from the retracted position to the projecting position together with the second movable body 360G. As a result, the second guide path GP2 is formed by the second movable body 360G and the core 390G (see FIG. 31(a3)). When the round end condition is satisfied and the second movable body 360G moves from the projecting position to the retracted position, the core 390G moves to the retracted position by the biasing force of the spring 396G. At this time, the arm portion 365G of the second movable body 360G functions as a stopper that prevents the core 390G from returning in advance, and the movements of the second movable body 360G and the core 390G are synchronized.

Note that when the core 390G is interlocked with the second movable body 360G, the core 390G moves away from the arm portion 355G of the first movable body 350G, and the first movable body 350G and the core 390G are not interlocked.

In this way, if the core 390G is made movable, the core 390G waits at the retracted position in the initial state, and is prevented from protruding into the specific area SE. As a result, the chances of the game ball colliding with the core 390G can be reduced, and the core 390G can be protected.

Note that when the core 390G is arranged at the projecting position, the core 390G is sandwiched between either the first movable body 350G or the second movable body 360G. Therefore, even if a game ball collides with the core 390G and a stress that deforms the core 390G is generated, the stress can be released to the movable bodies 350G and 360G. Moreover, since excessive deformation is restricted by the movable bodies 350G and 360G, concerns about plasticity and the like can be eliminated. For the reasons described above, it is possible to preferably alleviate the influence of the decrease in strength caused by the core 390G being movable.

Further, as shown in the second embodiment, when the fixed core 390F is arranged in the specific area SE, the flowing direction of the game ball reaching the specific area SE hits the core 390F and changes. . Therefore, in a situation where the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are not formed by the movable bodies 350F and 360F, the shutters 370F and 380F provided side by side to the ball-entering portions 331 and 341 prevent accidental Suppressed ball entry.

In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the core 390F is on standby at the retracted position when the ball-entering portions 331 and 341 are not guided, and the protrusion into the specific region SE is avoided. there is Therefore, the rebounding of the game ball as described above does not occur. For the above reasons, it is possible to suppress accidental entry of a ball into the ball entry portions 331 and 341 while making the structures corresponding to the shutters 370F and 380F defective.

In addition, when the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are not formed, the protrusion of the core 390G into the game area PE is suppressed, thereby reducing the chance of the game ball flowing down the game area PE colliding with the core 390G. . By protecting the core 390G in this way, when the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by the core 390 and the movable bodies 350G and 360G, the relative positions of the two fluctuate and the game ball can be guided smoothly. You can prevent it from breaking.

When the core 390G is of a retractable type, the core 390G moves to the protruding position following the movement of the movable bodies 350G and 360G to the protruding position, thereby adjusting the formation timing of the guide paths GP1 and GP2. Displacement and the like can be suppressed.

As described above, if the core 390G is of the retractable type, various effects such as protection of the core 390G can be expected. However, the need for a separate driving section for driving the core 390G hinders the simplification and miniaturization of the configuration of the variable winning unit 83G. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the moving directions of the movable bodies 350G and 360G and the core 390G are unified, and the arm portions 355G and 365G (corresponding to "action portions") provided on the movable bodies 350G and 360G are ) pushes the core 390G to the protruding position, there is no need to add a new drive unit. As a result, excessive complication of the configuration of the variable winning unit 83G can be suppressed, and the size of the variable winning unit 83G can be reduced.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode, the guide destination of the game ball is the first ball entering portion 331, and in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode, the guidance destination of the game ball is Although it is configured to be the second ball-entering section 341, a third winning mode may be provided in which the guide destination is switched to the first ball-entering section 331 and the second ball-entering section 341 in a predetermined order (for example, alternately). In such a configuration, it is not always necessary to return the core 390F to the retracted position each time the guide destination is switched. For example, when the first movable body 350F and the second movable body 360F, which are arranged at the projecting position, are switched, the core 390F is transferred between the first movable body 350F and the second movable body 360F, and the core A configuration in which 390F is maintained at the projecting position (a configuration in which return to the retracted position is avoided) is also possible.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the variable winning unit 83 shown in the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 wait at the retracted position under the condition that the game ball is not guided to the ball entry portions 331 and 341. It was configured to In the variable winning unit 83H shown in the present embodiment, the first movable body 350H and the second movable body 360H are arranged to stand by at the protruded position under the condition that the game ball is not guided to the entering ball parts 331 and 341. A part of the configuration is changed from the first embodiment in realizing such a configuration. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 32, the variable winning unit 83H shown in the present embodiment will be described centering on the differences from the variable winning unit 83 shown in the first embodiment. 32(a) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83H, FIG. 32(b) is a perspective view of the variable winning unit 83H, and FIG. 32(c) is a vertical sectional view of the variable winning unit 83H.

In the initial state (non-guiding state) in which the game ball is not guided to any of the ball entering portions 331 and 341, both the first movable body 350H and the second movable body 360H are arranged at the projecting position as shown in FIG. . In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 in the initial state is 0°.

When the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction) in the initial state, the first movable body 350H moves from the projecting position to the retracted position. When the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction (clockwise direction) under the condition that the first movable body 350H is arranged at the retracted position, the first movable body 350H protrudes from the retracted position. Return to position. Thus, when the first movable body 350H moves between the retracted position/protruded position, the second movable body 360H is maintained at the protruded position.

When the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction (clockwise direction) in the initial state, the second movable body 360H moves from the projecting position to the retracted position. When the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction) under the condition that the second movable body 360H is arranged at the retracted position, the second movable body 360H moves from the retracted position. Return to protruding position. Thus, when the second movable body 360H moves between the retracted position/projected position, the first movable body 350H is maintained at the projected position.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), in the state where both movable bodies 350H and 360H are arranged at the projected position, both movable bodies 350H and 360H are moved by the upper surface 351H of the first movable body 350H and the upper surface 361H of the second movable body 360H. A series of stages ST spanning 360H are formed, and game balls can be temporarily parked on the stages ST.

The portion of the upper surface 351H of the first movable body 350H forming the stage ST is inclined downward toward the crossing point, and the portion of the upper surface 361H of the second movable body 360H forming the stage ST is also inclined downward. It slopes down towards the intersection. In other words, the stage ST is configured such that the central portion in the direction in which the ball entrance portions 331 and 341 are arranged side by side is the lowest. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the stage ST moves toward the central portion.

A game ball is allowed to move across the central portion between the right and left portions of the stage ST. That is, the game ball dropped to the first movable body 350H side moves to the second movable body 360H side, or the game ball dropped to the second movable body 360H side moves to the first movable body 350H side. movement is allowed.

Here, the right side portion and the left side portion of the stage ST have the same inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane, and have the same overall length. Therefore, the game ball that has reached one of the right side portion and the left side portion is prevented from passing over the center portion and flowing out of the stage ST from the other side.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), the housing 310H is formed with a connecting passage 317 that guides the game ball placed on the stage ST to the lower side of the stage ST. More specifically, an inflow port 317aH of a communication passage 317H is formed in a portion (the central portion) of the front surface portion 312H of the housing 310H that is directly above the intersection of the two movable bodies 350H and 360H. An outflow port 317bH of the connecting passage 317H is formed in a portion directly below the intersection of 360H.

As shown in FIG. 32(c), the upper surface 351H of the first movable body 350H and the upper surface 361H of the second movable body 360H are slightly downwardly inclined toward the front surface portion 312H of the housing 310H. This inclination guides the game ball placed on the stage ST to the inflow port 317aH of the communication passage 317H. Note that the backward tilt angle is extremely small compared to the left and right tilt angles, so that the backward tilt is suppressed from hindering the movement of the game ball along the guide paths GP1 and GP2. there is

Here, referring to the schematic diagram of FIG. 33, the flow of guiding the game ball to the first ball-entering section 331 and the second ball-entering section 341 will be described. In addition, in FIG. 33, for convenience of explanation, the movable bodies 350H and 360H arranged at the retracted positions are indicated by broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), when both the first movable body 350H and the second movable body 360H are arranged at the protruded position (non-guiding state or initial state), the second movable body 350H consists of the first movable body 350H. A first guide path GP1 is cut by the second movable body 360H, and a second guide path GP2 made up of the second movable body 360H is cut by the first movable body 350H. As a result, neither the first ball entering portion 331 nor the second ball entering portion 341 can guide the game ball. More specifically, the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331 and the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entering portion 341 are covered by the movable bodies 350H and 360H from the central side of the specific area SE, Entry into the ball entry portions 331 and 341 is avoided. In this state, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is separated from the variable winning unit 83H through the stage ST→communication path 317H.

In the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the first prize mode, when the round start condition is established, the second movable body 360H moves from the projecting position to the retreating position as shown in FIGS. 33(a)→33(b). As a result, the severing of the first guide path GP1 by the second movable body 360H is released, and the first ball entering portion 331 is released. As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is guided to the first ball entering section 331 and flows into the first ball entering section 331 . For example, the game ball staying on the stage ST in the state shown in FIG.

When the round end condition is satisfied, the second movable body 360H returns from the retracted position to the projecting position as shown in FIGS. 33(b) to 33(a). As a result, the first guide path GP1 is again cut off by the second movable body 360H, and the first ball entering portion 331 is closed. After that, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE leaves the variable winning unit 83H through the stage ST→communication passage 317H.

As described in detail above, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode, the first movable body 350H is maintained at the projecting position, and the second movable body 360H moves to the projecting position/retracted position as the round progresses. is repeated, the first variable winning device is switched between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state. Considering such circumstances, it can be said that the first variable winning device in the present embodiment is composed of the first ball entering portion 331, the first movable body 350H and the second movable body 360H.

In the open/close execution mode corresponding to the second prize mode, when the round start condition is established, the first movable body 350H moves from the projecting position to the retreating position as shown in FIGS. 33(a)→33(c). As a result, the severing of the second guide path GP2 by the first movable body 350H is released, and the second ball entering portion 341 is released. As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is guided to the second ball entering section 341 and flows into the second ball entering section 341 . For example, the game ball staying on the stage ST in the state shown in FIG.

When the round end condition is satisfied, the first movable body 350H returns from the retracted position to the projecting position as shown in FIG. 33(c)→FIG. 33(a). As a result, the second guide path GP2 is again cut off by the first movable body 350H and the second ball-entering portion 341 is closed. After that, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE leaves the variable winning unit 83H through the stage ST→communication passage 317H.

As described in detail above, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode, the second movable body 360H is maintained at the projected position, and the first movable body 350H moves to the projected position/retracted position as the round progresses. is repeated, the first variable winning device is switched between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state. Considering such circumstances, it can be said that the second variable winning device in the present embodiment is composed of the second ball entering portion 341, the first movable body 350H and the second movable body 360H.

According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, the game ball arriving during the interval period does not immediately leave the variable winning unit 83H, but temporarily stays on the stage ST. Therefore, the game balls remaining on the stage ST when the guidance is resumed can be included in the guide objects to the ball entry sections 331 and 341, and the dropout of the game balls can be reduced. In this way, by increasing the number of ball-entering opportunities, it is possible to suppress irregular hitting such as avoidance of shooting game balls in accordance with the interval period, and to facilitate the progress of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the combination of the two movable bodies 350H and 360H arranged at the protruded positions functions as a shutter that covers the ball entrance sections 331 and 341, respectively. ing. As a result, it is possible to suppress accidental ball entry into the ball entry sections 331 and 341 under a situation where the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) has not yet been entered. Since the movable bodies 350H and 360H serve as guide means and blocking means, the drive mechanism can be simplified, and the durability and operational stability of the variable winning unit 83H can be improved.

In addition, when the first movable body 350H is arranged at the retracted position, at least a part of the inlet 317aH of the communication passage 317H is closed (covered), thereby allowing the flow of air to the inlet 317a. You may provide the block|blocking part which blocks|blocks the inflow of a game ball. Similarly, when the second movable body 360H is arranged at the retracted position, the second movable body 360H blocks (covers) at least a part of the inlet 317aH of the communication passage 317H. You may provide the prevention|blocking part which blocks the inflow of a ball|bowl. These blocking portions may be configured, for example, by standing portions that stand upward from the front end portions of the movable bodies 350H and 360H.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the guide destination of the game ball is defined to be either the first ball entering section 331 / the second ball entering section 341 depending on the type of jackpot, but in the present embodiment, a predetermined The guide destination of the game ball is switched in the order of . Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 34, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. FIG. 34(a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the variable winning unit 83, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the entering ball portion and the number of prize balls, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of switching of the guidance destination. is.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), in the present embodiment, a drive section 321a for the first movable body 350 and a drive section 321b for the second movable body 360 are provided, respectively. Movements of the drive units 321a and 321b can be individually controlled. As a result, restrictions on the positional relationship between the movable bodies 350 and 360 are relaxed as compared with the first embodiment.

Also, as shown in FIG. 34(b), a privilege granted to the player based on the ball entering the first ball entering section 331 and a privilege granted to the player based on the ball entering the second ball entering section 341 The privilege to be given is the same (15 pieces). In other words, there is no difference in the superiority or inferiority of the privilege depending on the guidance destination of the game ball in the opening and closing execution mode.

As the jackpot results, a 16R probability variable jackpot result, an 8R probability variable jackpot result, and an 8R normal jackpot result are set. As shown in FIG. 34(c), regardless of the jackpot result, the ball entry section to which the game ball is guided is switched in a predetermined order. Specifically, the guide destination is alternately switched between the first ball-entering portion 331 and the second ball-entering portion 341 .

Next, the state switching processing of the variable winning unit 83 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG.

(State switching process of variable winning unit 83)
As shown in FIG. 35, in the state switching process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether the game ball is being guided to either the first ball entering section 331 or the second ball entering section 341. judge. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the drive motor 321 in the variable winning unit 83 . If guidance to the ball-entering sections 331 and 341 is not in progress, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the round number counter OC is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S503, this state switching process ends. When the value of the round number counter OC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC is "0", the process advances to step S504 to execute guidance start processing.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), in the guidance start process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the round to be started this time is the first round (first round). If an affirmative determination is made in step S601, the process proceeds to step S602, in which the first movable body 350 is moved from the retracted position to the projecting position to form a flow path (first guide path GP1) to the first ball entering portion 331. Perform processing to move to Specifically, a driving signal for moving the projecting position is output to the driving section 321a. Thereby, the first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331 is formed in the specific area SE.

If a negative determination is made in step S601, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, it is determined whether or not the round to be started is an even-numbered round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S603, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, a process of moving the first movable body 350 to the retracted position is performed. Specifically, a drive signal for moving to the retracted position is output to the drive section 321a.

If a negative determination is made in step S603, that is, if the round to be started is an odd-numbered round, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, a process of moving the second movable body 360 to the retracted position is performed. Specifically, it outputs a drive signal for moving to the retracted position to the drive section 321b.

Returning to the description of FIG. 35 again, after executing the guidance start process in step S504, the process proceeds to step S505. At step S505, the timer counter TC is set to "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec), and at the next step S506, the winning counter PC is set to "8".

After executing the process of step S506, in step S507, a guidance start command indicating that the guidance to the ball-entering sections 331 and 341 has started (that the round has started) is set, and this state switching process is started. finish.

Returning to the description of step S501, if an affirmative determination is made in step S501, that is, if it is determined that guidance to the first ball-entering section 331 or the second ball-entering section 341 is in progress, the process proceeds to step S508, and timer It is determined whether or not the value of the counter TC is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC is not "0", the process advances to step S509 to determine whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entering section 331 or the second ball entering section 341 which is set as the guidance destination. is determined based on detection signals from the detection sensors 334 and 344 . If no prize has been won, the state switching process is terminated.

If a prize has been won, a winning command setting process is executed in step S510. The winning command is output to the notification/effect control device 140, and the effect during the opening/closing execution mode executed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 changes according to the winning command.

After executing the command setting process in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511. In step S511, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the subsequent step S512, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". If the value of the winning counter PC is not "0", the state switching process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S512 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or if an affirmative determination is made in step S508 (that is, if it is determined that the value of the timer counter TC is "0") , means that the round end condition (guidance end condition) is satisfied. In this case, a guidance end process is executed in step S513.

As shown in FIG. 36(b), in the guidance end processing, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the round to end this time is the final round. Specifically, in the case of the 16R variable probability jackpot result, it is determined whether or not the 16th round is over, and in the case of the 8R probability variable jackpot result or the 8R normal jackpot result, it is determined whether the 8th round is over. judge.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S701, the process proceeds to step S702. In step S702, processing is performed to move the second movable body 360 from the projecting position to the retracted position. Specifically, a drive signal for moving to the retracted position is output to the drive section 321b. As a result, both the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 return to the retracted positions, and the variable winning unit 83 returns to the initial state (non-guiding state).

If a negative determination is made in step S701, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the round to end this time is an even-numbered round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, processing is performed to move the first movable body 350 from the retracted position to the projecting position. Specifically, a driving signal for moving the projecting position is output to the driving section 321a.

If a negative determination is made in step S703, that is, if the round to end this time is an odd-numbered round, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, processing is performed to move the second movable body 360 from the retracted position to the projecting position. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the projecting position is output to the drive unit 321b.

As shown in FIG. 35, after executing the guidance end processing in step S513, the process advances to step S514 to execute update processing of the round number counter OC. Specifically, when the value of the round number counter OC is not "0", the same round number counter OC is decremented by 1, and when the value of the round number counter OC is "0", the same round number counter OC is Keep the value of '0'.

After that, in step S515, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the round number counter OC is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S515, the process proceeds to step S516. At step S516, the timer counter TC is set to "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec).

After executing the processing of step S516, a guidance end command is set in step S517, and this state switching processing ends. This set guidance end command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the end of the round based on the received guidance end command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

Returning to the description of step S515, if it is determined in step S515 that the value of the round number counter OC is "0", the process proceeds to step S518. In step S518, ending start processing is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time is set for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM is set in waiting time counter areas provided in various counter areas of the RAM.

After that, in step S519, after setting the ending command, the state switching process ends. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39, the movement of the variable winning unit 83 in the open/close execution mode will be described. FIG. 37 is a timing chart showing the flow of games in the open/close execution mode, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are schematic diagrams showing the relationship between the state of the variable winning unit 83 and the flow of game balls.

At the timing of the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the two movable bodies 350 and 360 are both arranged at the retracted positions, and the game ball that has reached the specific area SE passes through the specific area SE and heads for the out port 86 (Fig. 38(a)). At the timing ta1 after the opening effect ends, that is, at the start timing of the first round, the first movable body 350 moves from the retracted position to the projecting position as shown in FIG. As a result, the first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331 is formed in the specific area SE, and the first variable winning device switches from the non-accepting state to the accepting state (see FIG. 38(b)). ). In this state, the game ball that reaches the specific area SE rolls along the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350 and flows into the first ball entering portion 331 .

At timing ta2 when the number of balls entering the first ball entering portion 331 reaches a predetermined number (upper limit number) and the round end condition is satisfied, the second movable body 360 moves from the retracted position to the projecting position. As a result, the first guide path GP1 is cut off by the second movable body 360, and the first ball entry portion 331 is covered by the two movable bodies 350 and 360 from the center side of the specific area SE, and the first variable winning device is received. state to the non-accepting state (see FIG. 38(c)).

The second guide path GP2 is formed by moving the second movable body 360 to the projecting position. The game ball that has reached the SE is prevented from heading toward the second ball entering section 341. - 特許庁In this state, the game ball reaching the specific area SE temporarily stops on the stage ST formed by the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350 and the upper surface 361 of the second movable body 360 .

In other words, the game ball that reaches the specific area SE during the interval period between rounds is restricted from flowing down the specific area SE and stays on the stage ST. In this embodiment, the interval period is 2 sec, and the game ball shooting cycle is 0.6 sec. Therefore, about three game balls are accumulated on the stage ST during the interval period.

The total length of the stage ST is more than three times the diameter of the game ball, and the number of game balls that can be parked (maximum number of stored game balls) is greater than the maximum number of game balls to be shot during the interval period. is also increasing.

At the timing ta3 when the interval period has elapsed from the timing ta2, that is, at the start timing of the second round, the first movable body 350 moves from the projecting position to the retracted position. As a result, the second variable winning device switches from the non-accepting state to the accepting state (see FIG. 38(d)). As a result, the game balls remaining on the stage ST are directed toward the second ball entering portion 341 and flow into the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entering portion 341 .

The maximum amount of game balls stored in the stage ST is smaller than the predetermined number (for example, 4), and game balls exceeding the predetermined number drop to the side of the variable winning unit 83 . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large number of benefits due to the occurrence of the above-described upper limit number of balls being entered.

At timing ta4 when the number of balls entering the second ball entering portion 341 reaches a predetermined number (upper limit number) and the round end condition is satisfied, the first movable body 350 moves from the retracted position to the projecting position. As a result, the second guide path GP2 is cut off by the first movable body 350, and the second ball-entering portion 341 is covered by the two movable bodies 350 and 360 from the center side of the specific area SE, and the second variable winning device is received. state to the non-accepting state (see FIG. 39(e)).

The first guide path GP1 is formed by moving the first movable body 350 to the protruded position. The game ball that has reached the SE is prevented from heading toward the first ball entering section 331. - 特許庁In this state, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is temporarily stopped on the stage ST. In other words, the game ball that reaches the specific area SE during the interval period between rounds is restricted from flowing down the specific area SE and stays on the stage ST.

At the timing ta5 when the interval period has elapsed from the timing ta4, that is, at the start timing of the third round, the first movable body 350 moves from the projecting position to the retracted position. As a result, the first variable winning device switches from the non-accepting state to the accepting state (see FIG. 38(f)). As a result, the game balls remaining on the stage ST are directed toward the first ball entering portion 331 and flow into the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331 .

After that, the round game progresses by repeating the actions of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 so that the first ball-entering part 331 and the second ball-entering part 341 alternately serve as the guide destinations. . Then, at the timing when the final round ends, both movable bodies 350 and 360 are placed at the retracted positions, and guidance to the first ball-entering portion 331 and the second ball-entering portion 341 is completed (see FIG. 38(g)). .

In this embodiment, the eighth round or the sixteenth round is set to be the final round, and the guide destination of the game ball in these final rounds is the second ball entry section 341 . That is, in the final round, the first movable body 350 is arranged at the retracted position and the second movable body 360 is arranged at the projecting position. At the end of the final round, the variable prize winning unit 83 is returned to the initial state by moving the second movable body 360 from the projecting position to the retracted position while the first movable body 350 remains at the retracted position.

According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The first movable body 350 that guides the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331 functions as a stopper that regulates the movement of the game ball toward the second ball entering portion 341, and guides the game ball to the second ball entering portion 341. The second movable body 360 functions as a stopper that restricts movement of the game ball toward the first ball entering portion 331 . By adopting such a configuration, the movement of the variable winning unit 83 is diversified, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game in the open/close execution mode.

In a configuration in which an interval period is set between rounds, a game ball fired during the interval period does not enter the ball entry portion and becomes a loose ball (that is, the investment is wasted). Actions such as refraining from launching the ball may be taken. In view of the fact that the entry of a ball into the ball-entering section is the trigger for the progress of the game, there is concern that such a delaying action will hinder the smooth progress of the game. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is avoided that the game ball that reaches the specific area SE during the interval period passes through the specific area SE as it is, and then the first ball entering section 331 or the second entering section 331 The game balls are stored until the guidance to the ball portion 341 is resumed. By suppressing the occurrence of useless balls in this way, it is possible to encourage the player to continue shooting game balls, thereby making it possible to facilitate the progress of the game.

When a plurality of game balls remain on the stage ST, the plurality of game balls flow into a ball entering section as a guide destination at once with the resumption of guidance. By diversifying the movements of the game balls (one by one or a plurality of them collectively) toward the entering ball part, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in attention to the movements of the game balls.

The stage ST is formed so as to straddle the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360, and the game ball can be stopped on both the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360. there is If both movable bodies 350 and 360 form a stationary surface in this way, it is possible to increase the number of game balls that can be stationary (stored) on the stage ST while suppressing an increase in the size of the variable winning unit 83. .

The stage ST is configured so as to slope downward toward the center, and the game balls that have reached the stage ST accumulate in order from the position near the center. When the left and right ball entering parts 331 and 341 are used together, the next guide destination is the first ball entering part 331 and the second ball entering part by setting the configuration in which the game balls are preferentially accumulated at the position closer to the center. In any case of the part 341, it is possible to suppress the flow of the game ball toward the entering ball parts 331, 341 from slowing down. By the way, making the stage ST recessed at the central portion is a device to increase the number of game balls that can be parked while suppressing the expansion of the width of the stage ST.

The stationary game ball can be moved between the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360, thereby suppressing the motion of the game ball that has reached the stage ST from becoming monotonous.

When the variable winning unit 83 is switched from the non-guiding state to the first guiding state, not only the game balls stationary on the first movable body 350 but also the game balls stationary on the second movable body 360 is also guided to the first ball-entering portion 331 . Specifically, when the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position, the game ball stopped on the second movable body 360 loses its support and falls. (Right half) is positioned, the dropped game balls are guided to the first ball entering portion 331 together with the game balls that have stopped on the first movable body 350 . Further, when the variable winning unit 83 is switched from the non-guiding state to the second guiding state, not only the game balls stationary on the second movable body 360 but also the game balls stationary on the first movable body 350 are displayed. The ball is also guided to the second ball entering section 341 . Specifically, when the first movable body 350 moves to the retracted position, the game ball stopped on the first movable body 350 loses its support and falls. (Left half) is positioned, the game balls that have fallen are guided to the second ball entering section 341 together with the game balls that have stopped on the second movable body 360 . In this way, by guiding the game ball regardless of which movable body 350 or 360 it is stationary, it is possible to suppress the game ball from falling out and preferably increase the above-mentioned chances of entering a ball. In addition, increasing the number of game balls to be guided leads to diversification of the manner of entering balls into each ball entry section 331, 341 (for example, a configuration in which a plurality of game balls can be collectively guided to the ball entry sections 331, 341). ) can be suitably realized.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of game balls staying on stage ST is substantially smaller than the upper limit number of incoming balls in each round. Therefore, even in the case of having the relief function described above, it is possible to suitably suppress excessive benefits given to the player by the stop function.

By forming the stage ST over the two guide routes GP1 and GP2, it is possible to prevent the presence of the stage ST from extending the player's attention to a wide area. This is a preferable configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the stationary game ball.

In the opening/closing execution mode of the present embodiment, the variable winning unit 83 alternately switches between the first guidance state and the second guidance state with the non-guiding state in between. As a result, game balls that have not entered one of the ball-entering sections are guided to the other ball-entering section through a dwell. This prevents the motion of the game ball from becoming monotonous and contributes to increasing the attention to the game.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in the present embodiment, two states are provided in which the variable winning unit 83 blocks the entry of game balls into both the ball entering portions 331 and 341. FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 38(a) and 39(g), both movable bodies 350 and 360 are arranged at the retracted positions, so that the state in which the game ball passes through the specific area SE and the As shown in 38(c) and FIG. 39(e), both movable bodies 350 and 360 are arranged at the protruding positions, thereby making it impossible to pass through the specific area SE. The latter of these two states is a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area SE can later flow into the ball entry sections 331 and 341, so it is slightly more advantageous to the player than the former. In this way, by providing a plurality of states in which the inflow is blocked, it is possible to suitably achieve diversification of games.

It should be noted that decelerating portions (reducing portions: for example, a plurality of irregularities arranged in the guiding direction) that reduce the flow speed of the game ball are provided on the upper surfaces of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 shown in the fifth embodiment. may be provided. More specifically, at least one of the upper surfaces of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 is provided with a deceleration section (reduction part) on the upstream side (upper side) of the intersection of the two movable bodies 350 and 360. force part) may be provided. In this case, for example, if a difference between advantages and disadvantages is set for the benefits given to the first ball-entering portion 331 and the second ball-entering portion 341, the ball-entering on the disadvantageous side of the two movable bodies 350 and 360 is set. By providing the deceleration section on one side that guides the game ball to the section, the game ball guided to the ball entering section on the disadvantageous side is likely to change the flow destination to the ball entering section on the advantageous side. It can contribute to the further improvement of the degree of attention to.

In particular, if one of the movable bodies 350 and 360 is provided with the deceleration section, even if the interval period between rounds is constant, the first guidance state may be switched to the second guidance state. It is possible to make a difference in the loss of game balls (in other words, the ball-entering rate) when switching from the second guide state to the first guide state, and further diversify the games with a simple configuration.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 that constitutes the guide means for the first ball-entering portion 331 and the second movable body 360 that constitutes the guide means for the second ball-entering portion 341 intersect each other. It was configured to This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the arrangement of the movable bodies 350I and 360I and the configuration related thereto. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 40, the configuration of the variable winning unit 83I according to the present embodiment will be described, focusing on differences from the variable winning unit 83 shown in the first embodiment. FIG. 40(a) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83I, FIGS. 40(b) and 40(c) are schematic diagrams showing the movement of the variable winning unit 83I, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing another variable winning unit 83Y. . In FIG. 40, for convenience of explanation, the movable bodies 350I and 360I arranged at the retracted positions are indicated by broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 40(a), in the specific area SE between the first ball-entering portion 331I and the second ball-entering portion 341I, there is a first guide means for guiding a game ball to the first ball-entering portion 331I. A movable body 350I and a second movable body 360I as guide means for guiding a game ball to the second ball entering portion 341 are provided. These movable bodies 350I and 360I are slidable in the front-rear direction, and move between a protruding position that protrudes into the specific area SE and a retracted position that prevents the protruding into the specific area SE, depending on the game situation.

Both the first movable body 350I and the second movable body 360I are substantially plate-shaped, and are arranged so that one plate surface faces upward. The upper surface 351I of the first movable body 350I is inclined downward toward the first ball entering portion 331 side, and the first movable body 350I is arranged at the protruding position, so that the game ball is placed in the specific area SE as the first entering ball. A first guide route GP1 is formed to guide to the portion 331I (see FIG. 40(b)). The upper surface 361I of the second movable body 360I is inclined downward toward the second ball entry portion 341I side, and the second movable body 360I is arranged at the protruding position, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the second ball into the specific area SE. A second guide route GP2 is formed to guide to the portion 341I (see FIG. 40(b)).

The first movable body 350I and the second movable body 360I are arranged vertically. Specifically, the height positions of the first ball-entering portion 331I and the second ball-entering portion 341I are shifted so that the former is slightly higher than the latter, and the first movable body 350I and the second movable body 360I are shifted. are arranged in parallel such that the first movable body 350I is on the upper side and the second movable body 360I is on the lower side.

The first movable body 350I is arranged at a position that overlaps the second guide path GP2 in the front-rear direction, so that the motion area of the first movable body 350I and the second guide path GP2 partially overlap. When arranging the two movable bodies so as to be arranged vertically, as illustrated in FIG. It is also possible to arrange them at a distance. However, in such a configuration, the vertical width dimension L4 of the variable winning unit 83Y tends to be large. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, if the operation area of the first movable body 350I is overlapped with the second guide path GP2 by the second movable body 360I, the vertical width of the variable winning unit 83I can be reduced. Therefore, miniaturization of the variable winning unit 83I can be promoted.

<Modification 1>
When the first ball entry portion 331J and the second ball entry portion 341J are arranged so that the entrance portions 332J and 342J face each other, the height position of the first ball entry portion 331J and the second ball entry portion By providing a difference in the height position of 341J, it is assumed that the possibility of the game ball rebounding to the lower ball entering portion toward the entrance portion of the upper ball entering portion increases. This is a factor that increases the probability of accidental ball entry as described above. Here, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 41(a), if a first shutter 370J that opens and closes the first ball-entering portion 331J and a second shutter 380J that opens and closes the second ball-entering portion 341J are used together, The occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed. Since these shutters 370J and 380J are the same as the shutters 370B and 380B described in Modification 2 of the first embodiment, description of specific structures and operations will be omitted.

<Modification 2>
As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 41(b), an upright portion 367K is provided at the end of the second movable body 360K on the side of the first ball entrance portion 331K, and the second movable body 360K is arranged at the projecting position. In this state, the standing portion 367K is configured to face the entrance portion 332K of the first ball entering portion 331K from the side of the specific area SE, thereby preventing the inflow of game balls into the entrance portion 332K of the first ball entering portion 331K. It is also possible to

<Modification 3>
In the sixth embodiment, the first movable body 350I for the first ball-entering section 331I is arranged above and the second movable body 360I for the second ball-entering section 341I is arranged below. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the vertical positional relationship may be changed arbitrarily. For example, when the height position is shifted so that the first ball-entering part is lower than the second ball-entering part, they are arranged so that the second movable body is on the upper side and the first movable body is on the upper side. It is preferable to arrange both movable bodies vertically in parallel.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the first embodiment and the like, the movable bodies 350 and 360 are slid back and forth to switch the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state (variable winning unit 83). is switched to the non-guiding state/first guiding state/second guiding state). This embodiment differs from the first embodiment and the like in a specific configuration for switching the variable winning device between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state. The variable winning unit 83L in this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 42(a) is a perspective view of the variable winning unit 83L, and FIG. 42(b) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83L. Note that description of the same configuration as in the first embodiment is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), the variable winning unit 83L includes a first guiding portion 400L that guides the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331 and a second guiding portion that guides the game ball to the second ball entering portion 341. 410L, the first guide route GP1 is formed in the specific area SE by the first guide part 400L, and the second guide route GP2 is formed in the specific area SE by the second guide part 410L. , the configuration is identical to that of the first embodiment.

The first guide portion 400L is composed of an upper left movable plate 401L forming an upstream portion of the first guide route GP1 and a lower right movable plate 402L forming a downstream portion of the first guide route GP1. The upper left movable plate 401L and the lower right movable plate 402L are flat plates, and both movable plates 401L. 402L are positioned on the same plane.

The upper left movable plate 401L is slidable in the front-rear direction, and its position is switched between a protruding position that protrudes into the specific area SE and a retracted position that prevents the protruding into the specific area SE. On the other hand, the lower right movable plate 402L can be slid in parallel (more specifically, diagonally) with the front surface of the game board 80a. 401L and a spaced position where a gap through which a game ball can pass is generated. The lower right movable plate 402L is maintained in a state of protruding toward the specific region SE over the entire range from the close position to the separated position.

The second guide portion 410L is composed of an upper right movable plate 411L forming an upstream portion of the second guide route GP2 and a lower left movable plate 412L forming a downstream portion of the second guide route GP2. The upper right movable plate 411L and the lower left movable plate 412L are flat plates, and both movable plates 411L. 412L are arranged on the same plane.

The upper right movable plate 411L is slidable in the front-rear direction, and its position is switched between a protruding position that protrudes into the specific area SE and a retracted position that prevents the protruding into the specific area SE. On the other hand, the lower left movable plate 412L is slidable in parallel with the front surface of the game board 80a (specifically, in an oblique direction), and its position is the close position where it approaches the upper right movable plate 411L and the upper right movable plate 411L. It switches to a spaced position where a gap through which a game ball can pass occurs between. The lower left movable plate 412L is maintained in a state of protruding toward the specific region SE over the entire range from the close position to the separated position.

The first variable winning device in the present embodiment is composed of the first ball entering portion 331, the upper left movable plate 401L, the lower right movable plate 402L, the upper right movable plate 411L, etc., and the second variable winning device is It is composed of the second ball entry portion 341, the upper right movable plate 411L, the lower left movable plate 412L, the upper left movable plate 401L, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), the lower right movable plate 402L forming the first guide portion 400L and the upper right movable plate 411L forming the second guide portion 410L are connected to the driving portion 321c via the link mechanism 325c. ing. The drive unit 321c is connected to the main controller 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main controller 162 . Regarding the link mechanism 325cL, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L from the separated position to the close position slightly precedes the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L from the projected position to the retracted position, and the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L from the retracted position to the projected position is slightly preceded. The movement of the movable plate 411L is configured to slightly precede the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L from the close position to the separated position to create a difference in operation timing. In other words, in the link mechanism 325cL, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L from the separated position to the close position is slightly slower than the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L from the projecting position to the retracted position, and the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L from the close position to the separated position is slightly slower. It has a delay mechanism that delays the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L so that the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L from the retracted position to the projecting position is delayed.

An upper left movable plate 401L forming the first guide portion 400L and a lower left movable plate 412L forming the second guide portion 410L are connected to the driving portion 321d via a link mechanism 325d. The drive unit 321d is connected to the main controller 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main controller 162 . Regarding the link mechanism 325dL, the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L from the distant position to the close position slightly precedes the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L from the projected position to the retracted position, and the upper left movable plate 401L moves from the retracted position to the projected position. The movement of the plate 401L is configured to slightly precede the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L from the close position to the separated position, thereby creating a difference in operation timing. In other words, the link mechanism 325dL makes the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L from the separated position to the close position slightly slower than the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L from the protruding position to the retracted position, and also makes the movement from the close position to the separated position slower. A delay mechanism is provided to delay the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L slightly slower than the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L from the retracted position to the projecting position.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 43, the state change of the variable winning unit 83L and the flow of game balls will be described. In FIG. 43, for convenience of explanation, the movable plates 401L and 411L arranged at the retracted positions are indicated by broken lines.

When the variable winning unit 83L is in the non-receiving state (the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device are both in the non-receiving state), the upper left movable plate 401L and the upper right movable plate 411L are in the projecting position. , and the lower right movable plate 402L and the lower left movable plate 412L are arranged at the separated position. In this state, the entrance portion 332 of the first ball-entering portion 331 is covered by the upper right movable plate 411L and the lower right movable plate 402L from the center side of the specific region SE, and the entrance portion 342 of the second ball-entering portion 341 is The central side of the specific region SE is covered by the upper left movable plate 401L and the lower left movable plate 412L. That is, both the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device are in a non-accepting state, and the game ball that has reached the specific area SE enters the first ball entering portion 331 and the second ball entering portion 341. is not allowed.

In this state, between the left movable plates 401L, 412L and the right movable plates 402L, 411L (central portion of the specific area SE), a passing portion 420L through which game balls can pass is formed. The game ball that has reached the specific area SE goes to the out port 86 by passing through the passing portion 420L.

An end portion (right end portion) of the upper left movable plate 401L forming a wall surface (left wall surface) of the passage portion 420L and an end portion (right end portion) forming a wall surface (left wall surface) of the passage portion 420L by the lower left movable plate 412L. right end), a gap (operating gap of the lower left movable plate 412L) is formed. Further, the upper right movable plate 411L constitutes the wall surface (right wall surface) of the passage portion 420L with the end portion (left end portion) constituting the wall surface (right wall surface) of the passage portion 420L and the lower right movable plate 402L constitutes the wall surface (right wall surface) of the passage portion 420L. A gap (operating gap of the lower right movable plate 402L) is formed between the end (left end). These gaps are smaller than the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball is prevented from going to the entrance portions 332 and 342 of the respective ball entry portions 331 and 341 through the gaps.

When the state is shifted to the opening and closing execution mode and the game ball should be guided to the first ball entering portion 331, the first variable winning device switches from the non-receiving state to the receiving state (the variable winning unit 83L is non-receiving). The guidance state is switched to the first guidance state). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(a)→FIG. 43(b), the lower right movable plate 402L slides (rises) from the separated position to the close position, and the upper left movable plate 401L and the lower right movable plate 401L move upward. 402L forms a series of first guide paths GP1 that slope downward to the first ball entry portion 331 . In accordance with this, the upper right movable plate 411L slides (retreats) from the projecting position to the retracted position, and the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331 is opened.

As described above, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L that forms the first guide path GP1 precedes the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L that functions as a shutter. Specifically, the inflow of the game ball into the passage portion 420L is restricted before the timing at which the movement of the game ball toward the first ball entering portion 331 is permitted. In this way, the game balls heading for the out port 86 through the passage portion 420L are placed on the lower right movable plate 402L, so that the game balls that should have been dropped are as if they were dropped by the lower right movable plate 402L. You can make it look like you are saved.

When the round end condition is met, the first variable winning device switches from the accepting state to the non-accepting state (the variable winning unit 83L switches from the first guiding state to the non-guiding state). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(b)→FIG. 43(a), the upper right movable plate 411L slides (returns) from the retracted position to the projecting position, and the first guide path GP1 is cut off. In accordance with this, the lower right movable plate 402L slides (falls) from the close position to the separated position, and the guide function by the first guide path GP1 is canceled.

As described above, the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L that functions as a shutter precedes the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L that forms the first guide path GP1. Specifically, the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331 is covered by the upper right movable plate 411L in the state where the first guide path GP1 is formed (the state where the flow into the passage portion 420L is restricted). . The lower right movable plate 402L that constitutes the first guide path GP1 can guide the game ball to the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331 even if it is not arranged at the close position. Therefore, by making the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L precedent, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball entry (excessive ball entry) after the round end condition is satisfied.

Also, unlike the case of switching from the receiving state to the non-receiving state, the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L precedes, so that it is possible to differentiate from the movement when switching from the non-receiving state to the receiving state. This is also advantageous in highlighting the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L when switching from the non-receiving state to the receiving state.

When the state is shifted to the opening and closing execution mode and the game ball should be guided to the second ball entering portion 341, the second variable winning device switches from the non-receiving state to the receiving state (the variable winning unit 83L is non-receiving). The guidance state is switched to the second guidance state). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c), the lower left movable plate 412L slides (rises) from the spaced position to the close position, and the upper right movable plate 411L and the lower left movable plate 412L move up. A series of second guide paths GP2 are formed that slope downward to the second ball entry portion 341 . In accordance with this, the upper left movable plate 401L slides (retreats) from the protruded position to the retracted position, and the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entering portion 341 is opened.

As described above, the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L that forms the second guide path GP2 precedes the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L that functions as a shutter. Specifically, the inflow of the game ball into the passing portion 420L is restricted before the timing at which the movement of the game ball toward the second ball entering portion 341 is permitted. In this way, the game balls heading for the out port 86 through the passing portion 420L are placed on the lower left movable plate 412L, so that the game balls that should have been dropped are rescued by the lower left movable plate 412L. You can make it look like

When the round end condition is established, the second variable winning device switches from the accepting state to the non-accepting state (the variable winning unit 83L switches from the second guiding state to the non-guiding state). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(c)→FIG. 43(a), the upper left movable plate 401L slides (returns) from the retracted position to the projecting position, and the second guide path GP2 is cut off. In accordance with this, the lower left movable plate 412L slides (falls) from the close position to the separated position, and the guide function by the second guide path GP2 is released.

As described above, the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L that functions as a shutter precedes the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L that forms the second guide path GP2. Specifically, the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entering portion 341 is covered by the upper left movable plate 401L in the state where the second guide path GP2 is formed (the state where the flow into the passage portion 420L is restricted). . The lower left movable plate 412L that constitutes the second guide path GP2 can guide the game ball to the inlet portion 342 of the second ball entering portion 341 even if it is not arranged at the close position. Therefore, by making the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L precedent, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball entry (excessive ball entry) after the round end condition is satisfied.

Also, unlike the case of switching from the receiving state to the non-receiving state, the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L precedes, so that the movement can be differentiated from the movement when switching from the non-receiving state to the receiving state. This is also advantageous in highlighting the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L when switching from the non-receiving state to the receiving state.

In the seventh embodiment described in detail above, the operating area of the lower right movable plate 402L and the operating area of the lower left movable plate 412L partially overlap. In this way, if the operation areas are overlapped, the total length of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 is increased, and the percentage of game balls guided to the respective ball entry portions 331 and 341 is increased. It is possible to suitably suppress the increase in size of 83L.

In a game machine of a type equipped with a variable winning device that changes the probability of a ball entering a ball-entering section by guiding means, the monotony of the game is suppressed by enhancing the contrast between the guided state and the non-guided state. can. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the winning device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) in the guided state is wide. However, simply enlarging the size of the guiding means tends to cause various problems such as a decrease in responsiveness and a decrease in durability (stability of operation) when performing state switching. Therefore, for example, as shown in the first guide portion 400L of the present embodiment, by using a plurality of movable plates 401L and 402L together and arranging these movable plates 401L and 402L at the passage forming positions, a series of first guide paths With the configuration in which GP1 is formed, it is possible to avoid an increase in the size of each movable plate. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player and suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by it.

Whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry portions 331 and 341 depends on the lower movable plates 402L and 412L forming the downstream portion. In other words, even if the game ball moves along the upper movable plates 401L and 411L arranged at the passage forming position (protruding position), the lower movable plates 402L and 412L are arranged at the passage forming position (close position). If not, guidance to the ball-entering portions 331 and 341 is not performed well. In such a configuration, the movement of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L to the passage forming position (close position) is delayed from the arrangement of the upper movable plates 401L and 411L to the passage forming position (protruding position). By doing so, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the movement of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L.

Regarding the upper movable plates 401L and 411L forming the upstream portions of the guide paths GP1 and GP2, it takes a certain amount of time for the game balls that have reached the upper movable plates 401L and 411L to pass the upper movable plates 401L and 411L. A period is required. Therefore, if the passage forming positions (protruding positions) of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L are configured to approach behind the upper movable plates 401L and 411L arranged at the passage forming positions (protruding positions), A branch can be generated as to whether or not the game ball that has passed through the movable plates 401L and 411L will successfully move to the lower movable plates 402L and 412L, and attention to the movement of the game ball can be favorably improved.

In the present embodiment, since the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed prior to the opening of the ball entry portions 331 and 341, it is as if the game balls reaching the guide paths GP1 and GP2 prior to the opening are prevented from falling out. It is possible to give a good impression to the player. By relieving the falling ball in this way, it is possible to suppress the interruption of the shooting operation of the game ball by waiting for the opening of the ball entering parts 331 and 341, and encourage the continuation of the shooting of the game ball. be able to. This is preferable for suppressing delays in game progress. In addition, by suppressing the occurrence of a difference in the benefits and the like obtained according to the skill of the player, the fairness of the game can be favorably improved.

The movement of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L (corresponding to the “passage forming portion”) from the separated position (passage non-forming position) to the adjacent position (passage forming position) changes from the regulating position (protruding position) to the allowable position (retracted position). ), the movement of the upper movable plates 402L and 412L (corresponding to the “restricting portion”) precedes the movement of the upper movable plates 402L and 412L to the movement of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L. However, the player may be given the impression that he or she has missed the opportunity to enter the ball because the game ball that should have entered the ball is dropped. It is assumed that this hinders the achievement of the various effects described above.

Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, while the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are being formed, the game balls that have fallen onto the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as regulating portions are guided toward the guide paths GP1 and GP2. With this configuration, it is possible to give the game ball a chance to enter. Therefore, the movement of the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the regulating portion is delayed with respect to the movement of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L as the flow path forming portion, giving the impression that the opportunity to enter the ball is missed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the player from becoming a factor of lowering the player's desire to play.

When it is assumed that the movement of the game ball is regulated at a position close to the entering ball part 331, 341, the upper movable plate 401L, 411L as the regulating part is being regulated as soon as it moves to the retracted position. It is feared that the game ball flowing into the entering ball parts 331 and 341 and visually confirming the movement of the game ball becomes difficult. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the upper movable plates 401L and 411L serving as restricting portions should be configured to keep the game balls guided to the guide paths GP1 and GP2 away from the ball entering portions 331 and 341 serving as guide destinations. If so, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

As described above, in the configuration in which the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed first, a plurality of game balls that have been blocked by the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the regulating portion are released, and the ball portion 331 moves at once as the regulation is released. , 341. Such movement of the game ball is preferable for enhancing visual impact. Here, as shown in the embodiment, assuming that the guide routes GP1 and GP2 are configured to extend downstream from the regulating portion as a configuration in which the restricting portion interrupts the guide routes GP1 and GP2 in the middle of the guide routes GP1 and GP2, the above-described When such movement of the game ball occurs, the movement distance of the game ball group can be increased, and the chance of overlooking the movement of the game ball can be reduced.

In the guide paths GP1 and GP2, the passage length of the portion located upstream of the regulated position by the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as a regulating portion is longer than the radial dimension of the game ball. A game ball whose movement to the entering ball sections 331 and 341 is blocked by 411L can wait in the upstream portions of the guide paths GP1 and GP2. Therefore, after the regulation is released, the game balls positioned on the guidance paths GP1 and GP2 will quickly move toward the ball entry portions 331 and 341, which contributes to the smooth progress of the game.

In particular, immediately after the release of the regulation, a difference in density is given to the entering game balls so that the density of the game balls heading for the entry parts 331 and 341 becomes lower than the timing after a certain period of time has passed since the release of the regulation. can be done. This is preferable in suppressing monotonous motion of the game ball toward the entering ball portions 331 and 341 .

When switching the variable winning unit 83L to the guiding state, releasing the movement restriction by the upper movable plates 401L and 411L after forming the guiding paths GP1 and GP2 has various technical significances as described above. However, if the movement of the variable prize winning unit 83L becomes complicated, there is a concern that the operation period will be lengthened and the responsiveness in switching between the guided state and the non-guided state will decrease. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the variable winning unit 83L is switched to the guiding state, the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the regulating portions are placed in the regulating positions in advance. The occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

In the configuration in which the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by the displacement of the movable plates 402L and 412L, the motion areas of the movable plates 402L and 412L become dead spaces where it is impossible or difficult to arrange other game components. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the operation area of the movable plate 402L when the first variable winning device is in the receiving state and the operation area of the movable plate 412L when the second variable winning device is in the receiving state are divided. With the partially overlapping configuration, even when a plurality of variable ball-entering devices are used in combination, it is possible to suitably suppress the dead space from increasing unnecessarily.

<Eighth Embodiment>
As shown in the seventh embodiment, in the configuration in which the game ball that reaches the specific area SE during non-guiding goes to the out port 86 through the passing portion 420L, the passing frequency of the game ball in the passing portion 420L is high. It is assumed that One of the features of this embodiment is that it is devised to smoothen the flow of game balls in the passing portion 420L. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 44, the variable winning unit 83M in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the variable winning unit 83L shown in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 44(a) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83M, and FIGS. 44(b) and 44(c) are schematic diagrams showing the relationship between the state of the variable winning unit 83M and the flow of game balls. In addition, in FIGS. 44(b) and 44(c), for convenience of explanation, the movable plate arranged at the retracted position is indicated by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), the upper left movable plate 401M that constitutes the first guide portion 400M and the upper right movable plate 411M that constitutes the second guide portion 410M are provided with an obliquely inclined downstream end portion of the body portion. Flange portions 405M and 415M are formed by bending in the vertical direction. The flange portions 405M and 415M face each other with a gap larger than twice the diameter of the game ball, and these flange portions 405M and 415M constitute the wall surface of the passing portion 420M.

Game balls flowing into the passage portion 420M include those that pass through the upper right movable plate 411M and those that pass through the upper left movable plate 401M. can be suppressed. In addition, the flange portions 405M and 415M constitute the passage wall surface to smooth the passage wall surface of the passing portion 420M. As a result, disturbance of the behavior of the game ball when passing through the passing portion 420M is alleviated, and the flow of the game ball is suppressed in the variable winning unit 83M.

In addition, when the lower movable plates 402M and 412M are arranged at the separated position, the protrusion of the end portions of the movable plates 402M and 412M beyond the flange portions 405M and 415M toward the passing portion 420M is avoided. It is

As shown in FIG. 44(b), when the first variable winning device is in the acceptance state, the first guide path GP1 is formed by the upper left movable plate 401M and the lower right movable plate 402M. A flange portion 405M (see FIG. 44(a)) is positioned on the extension of the motion area of the lower right movable plate 402M, and the upper surface of the lower right movable plate 402M is located on a virtual plane including the upper surface of the upper left movable plate 401M. Offset to the bottom. Therefore, there is a step along the way of the first guide route GP1 in the present embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44(c), when the second variable winning device is in the receiving state, the upper right movable plate 411M and the lower left movable plate 412M form the second guide path GP2. A flange portion 415M (see FIG. 44A) is positioned on the extension of the motion area of the lower left movable plate 412M, and the upper surface of the lower left movable plate 412M is below the virtual plane including the upper surface of the upper right movable plate 411M. is offset to Therefore, there is a step along the way of the second guide route GP2 in the present embodiment.

As described above, when the flanges 405M and 415M are used to smooth the flow of the game ball in the passing portion 420M, the operating areas of the lower movable plates 402M and 412M are restricted by the flanges 405M and 415M. . Therefore, by forming a step in the middle of the guide routes GP1 and GP2, such restrictions are overcome.

Here, if the width of the passing portion 420M is increased, it is advantageous in terms of smoothing the flow of game balls. However, in such a configuration, the slide stroke of the lower movable plates 402M and 412M increases. In the present embodiment, by providing the steps, the gap between the upper left movable plate 401M and the lower right movable plate 402M and the gap between the upper right movable plate 411M and the lower left movable plate 412M are increased to some extent. is possible. This prevents the slide stroke from becoming excessively large. More specifically, the operation area of the lower right movable plate 402M is secured using the area directly below the first ball-entering portion 331, and the operation area of the lower left movable plate 412M is the area directly below the second ball-entering portion 341. secured by using It is preferable to adopt a configuration that suppresses an increase in the slide stroke as described above in order to suppress lateral protrusion of the lower movable plates 402M and 412M and to reduce the size of the entire variable winning unit 83M.

In addition, a configuration in which a plurality of movable bodies are used together to switch between the guided state and the non-guided state is advantageous in terms of increasing attention to the variable winning unit. However, in such a configuration, if the motion of any of the movable bodies becomes imperfect, the guiding function will not work properly. This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in the reliability of the variable winning unit.

In this embodiment, the upper left movable plate 401M and the lower right movable plate 402M are combined to form the first guide path GP1, and a game ball passing through the first guide path GP1 moves along the upper right movable plate 411M. It evades and flows into the first ball entrance portion 331 . With such a configuration, when the first guide path GP1 is not well formed even though the upper right movable plate 411M is retracted to the retracted position and the first ball entering portion 331 is opened, the first It becomes difficult to enter the ball into the ball entering portion 331 .

For example, if a game ball is caught between the lower right movable plate 402M and the upper left movable plate 401M and the movement of the lower right movable plate 402M is impeded, the first guide path GP1 is not properly formed. This increases the possibility that the player will miss the privilege that should be obtained.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, by providing the guide routes GP1 and GP2 with steps, the occurrence of such inconveniences is suppressed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(d), a game ball is inserted between the lower right movable plate 402M and the flange portion 405M of the upper left movable plate 401M in the process of moving the lower right movable plate 402M to the close position. When B1 is caught, the game ball B1 is pushed upward or downward and leaves the motion area of the lower right movable plate 402M. Here, even if the game ball B1 gets caught and the lower right movable plate 402M is prevented from moving to the close position, the game ball B1 complements the lower surface of the first guide path GP1. becomes. Although the game ball protrudes upward, the protrusion amount is reduced by the step, so that the game ball B1 can be prevented from obstructing the flow of the subsequent game ball B2. In this way, even if the movement of the lower right movable plate 402M is hindered, as long as the upper right movable plate 411M is retracted, the flow into the first ball entrance portion 331 through the first guide path GP1 is prevented. By permitting, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the operation mode of the variable prize winning unit 83L shown in the seventh embodiment is changed, and, as in the fifth embodiment, a contrivance is made to encourage the continuation of the shooting operation of the game ball. One of the characteristics is that Hereinafter, the above device will be described with a focus on differences from the fifth embodiment with reference to FIG. 45(a). FIG. 45(a) is a schematic diagram showing the transmission path of the driving force.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), in the variable winning unit 83L shown in this embodiment, the power units in the variable winning unit 83L include a first drive unit 321eL for the first guide unit 400L and a second guide unit 321eL. A second drive portion 321fL for the portion 410L is provided. The first driving portion 321eL is connected to the upper left movable plate 401L and the lower right movable plate 402L, which constitute the first guiding portion 400L, via a link mechanism 325eL, and the second driving portion 321fL constitutes the second guiding portion 410L. It is connected to the upper right movable plate 411L and the lower left movable plate 412L via a link mechanism 325fL.

Drive units 321eL and 321fL are stepping motors, and output shafts rotate in a first specific direction (for example, clockwise direction) and a second specific direction (for example, counterclockwise direction) based on a drive signal from main controller 162. It works like that. As a result, the positions of the movable plates 401L, 402L, 411L, and 412L to be driven are individually changed.

Specifically, the upper left movable plate 401L constituting the first guide portion 400L moves from the projecting position to the retracted position by rotating the output shaft of the first driving portion 321eL in the first specific direction from the initial position. . When the upper left movable plate 401L is arranged at the retracted position, the output shaft of the first driving portion 321eL rotates in the second specific direction to return to the initial position, thereby projecting the upper left movable plate 401L from the retracted position. Return to position. When the upper left movable plate 401L is operated in this manner, the lower right movable plate 402L remains on standby at the separated position.

The lower right movable plate 402L that constitutes the first guide portion 400L moves from the separated position to the close position as the output shaft of the first driving portion 321eL rotates in the second specific direction from the initial position. Then, when the lower right movable plate 402L is arranged at the close position, the first driving portion 321eL rotates in the first specific direction to return to the initial position, thereby moving the lower right movable plate 402L from the close position. Return to the separated position. When the lower right movable plate 402L is operated in this way, the upper left movable plate 401L remains on standby at the projecting position.

411 L of upper right movable plates which comprise 410 L of 2nd guide parts move to a retracted position from a protruding position by rotating the output shaft of 2nd drive part 321fL from an initial position in a 2nd specific direction. When the upper left movable plate 401L is arranged at the retracted position, the output shaft of the second driving portion 321fL rotates in the first specific direction to return to the initial position, thereby projecting the upper right movable plate 411L from the retracted position. Return to position. When the upper right movable plate 411L is operated in this way, the lower left movable plate 412L remains on standby at the separated position.

The lower left movable plate 412L that constitutes the second guide portion 410L moves from the separated position to the close position as the output shaft of the second driving portion 321fL rotates in the first specific direction from the initial position. When the lower left movable plate 412L is arranged at the close position, the second driving portion 321fL rotates in the second specific direction to return to the initial position, thereby moving the lower left movable plate 412L from the close position to the separated position. back to When the lower left movable plate 412L is operated in this manner, the upper right movable plate 411L remains on standby at the projecting position.

Regarding the state switching processing of the variable winning unit 83L in the present embodiment, the main flow is the same as the state switching processing (see FIG. 35) shown in the fifth embodiment. The details of the end processing are different from the state switching processing shown in the fifth embodiment. The guidance start processing and guidance end processing will be described below with reference to FIGS. 45(b) and (c).

As shown in FIG. 45(b), in the guidance start process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the round to be started this time is the first round (first round). If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, the process proceeds to step S802, in which the lower right movable plate 402L is moved from the spaced position to the close position in order to form a flow path (first guide route GP1) to the first ball entering portion 331. Perform processing to move (raise) to. Specifically, it outputs a drive signal for moving to the close position to the first drive section 321eL.

After executing the process of step S802, the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, a process of moving (retreating) the upper right movable plate 411L from the projecting position to the retreating position is performed in order to open the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331. FIG. Specifically, a drive signal for moving to the retracted position is output to the second drive section 321fL.

It should be noted that the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L to the retracted position is delayed with respect to the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L to the close position. A route GP1 is formed.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S804, it is determined whether or not the round to be started is an even-numbered round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S804, the process proceeds to step S805. In step S805, a process of moving (retreating) the upper left movable plate 401L from the projecting position to the retracted position is performed in order to open the second ball-entering portion 341. FIG. Specifically, a drive signal for moving to the retracted position is output to the first drive section 321eL.

Returning to the description of step S804, when a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, when the round to be started is an odd-numbered round, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, a process of moving (retreating) the upper right movable plate 411L from the projecting position to the retreating position is performed in order to open the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331. FIG. Specifically, a drive signal for moving to the retracted position is output to the second drive section 321fL.

Next, referring to FIG. 45(c), the guidance end processing will be described. In the guidance end processing, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the round to end this time is the final round. Specifically, if the opening and closing execution mode of this time corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, it is determined whether the 16th round is over, and the opening and closing execution mode of this time is the 8R probability variation jackpot result or the 8R normal jackpot If it corresponds to the result, it is determined whether or not the eighth round is over.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S902. In step S902, processing is performed to move (advance) the upper left movable plate 401L from the retracted position to the projecting position in order to close the second ball-entering portion 341. FIG. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the projecting position is output to the first drive section 321eL. After executing the process of step S902, the process proceeds to step S903.

In step S903, a process of moving (lowering) the lower left movable plate 412L from the close position to the separated position is performed in order to cancel the guidance of the game ball along the second guide path GP2. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the separated position is output to the second drive section 321fL.

When the upper left movable plate 401L returns to the projecting position and the left lower movable plate 412L returns to the spaced position, the variable winning unit 83L returns to the initial state.

Returning to the description of step S901, if a negative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the round to end this time is an even-numbered round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, the process proceeds to step S905.

In step S905, processing is performed to move (advance) the upper left movable plate 401L from the retracted position to the projecting position in order to close the second ball-entering portion 341. FIG. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the projecting position is output to the first drive section 321eL. After performing the process of step S905, it progresses to step S906.

In step S906, the flow path in the specific area SE is switched from the second guide route GP2 that guides the game ball to the second ball-entering portion 341 to the first guide route GP1 that guides the game ball to the first ball-entering portion 331. Perform road switching processing. In the flow path switching process, a drive signal for moving the lower left movable plate 412L from the close position to the separated position is output to the second drive unit 321fL to move the lower right movable plate 402L from the separated position to the close position. A driving signal for moving to the close position is output to the first driving section 321eL.

Returning to the description of step S904, if a negative determination is made in step S904, that is, if the round to end this time is an odd-numbered round, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S907, a process of moving (advancing) the upper right movable plate 411L from the retracted position to the projecting position is performed in order to close the first ball-entering portion 331. FIG. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the projecting position is output to the second drive section 321fL. After performing the process of step S907, it progresses to step S908.

In step S908, the flow path in the specific area SE is switched from the first guide route GP1 that guides the game ball to the first ball-entering portion 331 to the second guide route GP2 that guides the game ball to the second ball-entering portion 341. Perform road switching processing. In the flow path switching process, a drive signal for moving the lower right movable plate 402L from the close position to the separated position is output to the first drive unit 321eL to move the lower left movable plate 412L from the separated position to the close position. A driving signal for moving to the close position is output to the second driving section 321fL.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48, the relationship with the game flow in the opening/closing execution mode will be described. FIG. 46 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game, and FIGS. 47 and 48 are schematic diagrams showing the relationship between the movement of the variable winning unit 83L and the flow of game balls. 47 and 48, for convenience of explanation, the movable plates 402L and 412L arranged at the retracted positions are indicated by broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 46, at timing tb0 when the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the upper left movable plate 401L and the upper right movable plate 411L are arranged at the projecting positions, and the lower right movable plate 402L and the lower left movable plate 412L are arranged at the separated positions. A vertically long passage portion 420L through which game balls can pass is formed in the center of the specific area SE. The upper left movable plate 401L and the upper right movable plate 411L are inclined downward toward the entrance side of the passage portion 420L. and is guided to the passing portion 420L by the upper right movable plate 411L. The game ball guided to the passage portion 420L traverses the specific area SE through the passage portion 420L and heads for the out port 86 (see FIG. 47(a)).

At the timing tb1 when the opening/closing execution mode is entered and a predetermined opening period has elapsed, the lower right movable plate 402L slides (rises) from the separated position to the close position. As a result, a series of first guide paths GP1 toward the first ball entering portion 331 are formed in the specific area SE by the upper left movable plate 401L and the lower right movable plate 402L. Since the lower right movable plate 402L is arranged at the close position, the entrance of the passage portion 420L is covered from above, thereby preventing game balls from flowing into the passage portion 420L.

Immediately after that, at timing tb2, the upper right movable plate 411L slides (retreats) from the protruded position to the retracted position, and the first ball-entering portion 331 is opened. As a result, the first variable winning device switches from the non-accepting state to the accepting state. After that, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is guided to the first ball entering section 331 through the first guide route GP1 (see FIG. 47(a)→FIG. 47(b)).

When the first variable winning device is placed in the receiving state, the first guide path GP1 is formed so as to slightly precede the opening of the first ball entering portion 331, preventing the inflow of game balls into the passing portion 420L. will be Therefore, the game ball headed for the passing portion 420L is prevented from flowing into the passing portion 420L, and the avoided game ball stays on the first guide path GP1. In other words, the game ball that reaches the specific area SE before the upper right movable plate 411L that functions as a shutter moves to the retracted position temporarily stays on the first guide path GP1, and the upper right movable plate 411L moves to the retracted position. , it goes to the first ball entrance section 331. In other words, the distance between the preceding game ball and the subsequent game ball is reduced, so that the chances of a plurality of game balls going to the first ball entering part 331 together increase immediately after the first ball entering part 331 is opened. Therefore, at the timing immediately after switching the first variable winning device to the receiving state, the frequency of winning balls is higher than at the timing after a certain period of time has passed since switching the first variable winning device to the receiving state.

At timing tb3 when the number of balls entering the first ball entering portion 331 reaches the upper limit number, the upper right movable plate 411L slides (returns) from the retracted position to the protruded position due to the establishment of the round end condition. As a result, the first variable prize winning device is switched from the acceptance state to the non-acceptance state, and entry into the first ball entry section 331 is disabled (see FIG. 47(c)).

In this state, although the first guide path GP1 is maintained because the lower right movable plate 402L is still arranged at the close position, the first guide path GP1 is cut off by the upper right movable plate 411L. Movement of the game ball to the downstream side of the upper right movable plate 411L is prohibited. More specifically, the upper left movable plate 401L, the lower right movable plate 402L, and the upper right movable plate 411L form a horizontally long stage ST on which the game ball can roll in the specific region SE, and the game ball reaches the specific region SE. can stay on this stage ST. In other words, the game ball that reaches the specific area SE during the interval between rounds is prevented from passing through the variable winning unit 83L, and is given another opportunity to enter the ball at the start of the next round.

At the subsequent timing tb4, the first guide route GP1 is switched to the second guide route GP2 while maintaining the state where the stage ST is formed. Specifically, the lower right movable plate 402L slides (falls) from the close position to the separated position, and the left lower movable plate 412L slides (rises) from the separated position to the close position. As a result, the object forming the lowest part of the stage ST is switched from the lower right movable plate 402L to the lower left movable plate 412L (see FIG. 47(c)→FIG. 47(d)).

At the time of this exchange, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L and the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L are interlocked (synchronized). As a result, the game ball accumulated on the stage ST is transferred from the lower right movable plate 402L to the lower left movable plate 412L, and the game ball is passed between the upper left movable plate 401L and the upper right movable plate 411L during the flow path switching. Avoid passing through.

The motion path of the lower left movable plate 412L and the motion path of the lower right movable plate 402L intersect in the middle. Therefore, the interference between the movable plates 401L and 402L is suppressed by configuring the lower left movable plate 412L to pass through the intersection immediately after the lower right movable plate 402L passes through the intersection.

When the lower right movable plate 402L is arranged at the close position, the lower right movable plate 402L straddles the intersection. If the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L is delayed, the upper end of the lower left movable plate 412L will remain in contact with the lower surface of the lower right movable plate 402L, and the lower left movable plate 412L will interrupt the movement destination of the lower right movable plate 402L. is avoided. That is, the lower right movable plate 402L itself prevents the movement path of the lower right movable plate 402L from being cut off by the lower left movable plate 412L. Since the lower surface of the lower right movable plate 402L is planar, the upper end of the lower left movable plate 412L slides on the lower surface of the lower right movable plate 402L, and the lower right movable plate 402L is slid to the spaced position. (descent) is guaranteed.

At timing tb5 after the flow path switching is completed, the upper left movable plate 401L slides (retracts) from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the second ball entering portion 341 is opened. As a result, the second variable winning device switches from the non-accepting state to the accepting state. After that, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is guided to the second ball entering section 341 through the second guide route GP2 (see FIG. 48(e)).

When the second variable winning device is set to the receiving state, the second guide path GP2 is formed so as to slightly precede the opening of the second ball entering portion 341, preventing the inflow of game balls into the passage portion 420L. will be Therefore, the inflow of the game ball toward the passage portion 420L into the passage portion 420L is avoided, and the avoided game ball stays on the second guide path GP2. That is, the game ball that reaches the specific area SE before the upper left movable plate 401L that functions as a shutter moves to the retracted position temporarily stays on the second guide path GP2, and the upper left movable plate 401L moves to the retracted position. , the second ball entering portion 341 is reached. At this time, the distance between the preceding game ball and the following game ball is shortened, so that the chances of a plurality of game balls going to the second ball entering part 341 together increase immediately after the second ball entering part 341 is opened. . Therefore, at the timing immediately after switching the second variable winning device to the receiving state, the frequency of winning balls is higher than at the timing after a certain period of time has passed since switching the second variable winning device to the receiving state.

It should be noted that game balls whose guidance to the first ball entry section 331 was terminated in the previous round are given an opportunity to enter the second ball entry section 341 although they are guided to different destinations. The spillage of game balls is suitably suppressed.

At timing tb6 when the number of balls entering the second ball entering portion 341 reaches the upper limit number, the upper left movable plate 401L slides (returns) from the retracted position to the protruded position due to the establishment of the round end condition. As a result, the second variable prize winning device is switched from the acceptance state to the non-acceptance state, and the ball cannot be entered into the second ball entering section 341 (see FIG. 48(f)).

In this state, although the second guide path GP2 is maintained because the lower left movable plate 412L is still arranged at the close position, the second guide path GP2 is cut off by the upper left movable plate 401L, A game ball cannot be moved to the downstream side of the movable plate 401L. More specifically, the stage ST is formed by the upper left movable plate 401L, the lower left movable plate 412L, and the upper right movable plate 411L in the specific region SE, and the game ball that reaches the specific region SE stays on this stage ST. In other words, the game ball that reaches the specific area SE during the interval between rounds is prevented from passing through the variable prize winning unit 83L, and is given another ball entry opportunity at the start of the next round.

At the subsequent timing tb7, the second guide route GP2 is switched to the first guide route GP1 while maintaining the state where the stage ST is formed. Specifically, the lower left movable plate 412L slides (falls) from the close position to the separated position, and the lower right movable plate 402L slides (rises) from the separated position to the close position. As a result, the object forming the lowest part of the stage ST is switched from the lower left movable plate 412L to the lower right movable plate 402L (see FIG. 48(f)→FIG. 48(g)).

At the time of this exchange, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L and the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L are interlocked (synchronized). As a result, the game balls accumulated on the stage ST are transferred from the lower left movable plate 412L to the lower right movable plate 402L, and the game balls move between the upper left movable plate 401L and the upper right movable plate 411L during the flow path switching. Avoid passing through.

The motion path of the lower left movable plate 412L and the motion path of the lower right movable plate 402L intersect in the middle. Therefore, the interference between the movable plates 401L and 402L is suppressed by configuring the lower right movable plate 402L to pass through the intersection immediately after the lower left movable plate 412L passes through the intersection.

When the lower left movable plate 412L is arranged at the close position, the lower left movable plate 412L straddles the intersection. If the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L is delayed, the upper end of the lower right movable plate 402L will remain in contact with the lower surface of the lower left movable plate 412L, and the lower right movable plate 402L will interrupt the movement destination of the lower left movable plate 412L. is avoided. In other words, the lower left movable plate 412L itself prevents the movement path of the lower left movable plate 412L from being cut off by the lower right movable plate 402L. Since the lower surface of the lower left movable plate 412L is planar, the upper end of the lower right movable plate 402L slides on the lower surface of the lower left movable plate 412L, causing the lower left movable plate 412L to slide (fall) to the spaced position. ) is guaranteed.

At the timing tb8 after the switching of the flow path is completed, the upper right movable plate 411L moves from the projecting position to the retracted position, and the first ball entering portion 331 is opened. As a result, the first variable winning device switches from the non-accepting state to the accepting state. After that, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE flows into the first ball entering section 331 through the first guide route GP1 (see FIG. 48(h)).

When the first variable prize winning device is set to the acceptance state, the first guide path GP1 is formed so as to precede the opening of the first ball entering portion 331, and the stage ST is changed along with the switching to the acceptance state. The game ball staying above flows into the first ball entering section 331. - 特許庁As a result, immediately after the first variable prize winning device is switched to the receiving state, the ball hitting frequency increases.

After that, game balls are alternately guided to the first ball entering section 331 and the second ball entering section 341 until the final round.

According to the ninth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a configuration in which an interval period is set between rounds, a game ball fired during the interval period does not enter the ball entry portion and becomes a loose ball (that is, the investment is wasted). Actions such as refraining from launching the ball may be taken. In view of the fact that the entry of a ball into the ball-entering section is the trigger for the progress of the game, there is concern that such a delaying action will hinder the smooth progress of the game. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is avoided that the game ball that reaches the specific area SE during the interval period passes through the specific area SE as it is, and then the first ball entering section 331 or the second entering section 331 The game balls are stored until the guidance to the ball portion 341 is resumed. By suppressing the occurrence of useless balls in this way, it is possible to encourage the player to continue shooting game balls, thereby making it possible to facilitate the progress of the game.

When a plurality of game balls remain on the stage ST, the plurality of game balls flow into a ball entering section as a guide destination at once with the resumption of guidance. By diversifying the movements of the game balls (one by one or a plurality of them collectively) toward the entering ball part, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in attention to the movements of the game balls.

The stage ST is formed so as to straddle the first guide portion 400L and the second guide portion 410L, and game balls can be parked on both the first guide portion 400L and the second guide portion 410L. there is With such a configuration in which both the guide portions 400L and 410L form a stationary surface, it is possible to increase the number of game balls that can be stationary (stored) on the stage ST while suppressing an increase in the size of the variable winning unit 83L. .

The stage ST is configured so as to slope downward toward the center, and the game balls that have reached the stage ST accumulate in order from the position near the center. When the left and right ball entering parts 331 and 341 are used together, the next guide destination is the first ball entering part 331 and the second ball entering part by setting the configuration in which the game balls are preferentially accumulated at the position closer to the center. In any case of the part 341, it is possible to suppress the flow of the game ball toward the entering ball parts 331, 341 from slowing down. By the way, making the stage ST recessed at the central portion is a device to increase the number of game balls that can be parked while suppressing the expansion of the width of the stage ST.

The stationary game ball can be moved between the first guide portion 400L and the second guide portion 410L, thereby suppressing the motion of the game ball reaching the stage ST from becoming monotonous.

When the variable winning unit 83L is switched from the non-guiding state to the first guiding state, not only the game balls stopping on the first guiding portion 400L but also the game balls stopping on the second guiding portion 410L is also guided to the first ball-entering portion 331 . Specifically, when the upper right movable plate 411L of the second guide portion 410L moves to the retracted position, the game ball stopped on the upper right movable plate 411L loses its support and falls. Since the lower right movable plate 402L of the first guide portion 400L is positioned, the game balls that have fallen are guided to the first ball entering portion 331 together with the game balls that have stopped on the upper left movable plate 401L of the first guide portion 400L. be done. Further, when the variable winning unit 83L is switched from the non-guiding state to the second guiding state, not only the game balls stopping on the second guiding portion 410L but also the game balls stopping on the first guiding portion 400L are displayed. The ball is also guided to the second ball entering section 341 . Specifically, when the upper left movable plate 401L moves to the retracted position, the game ball stopped on the upper left movable plate 401L loses its support and falls. Since the movable plate 412L is positioned, the dropped game balls are guided to the second ball entering portion 341 together with the game balls stopped on the upper right movable plate 411L of the second guide portion 410L. In this way, by guiding the game ball regardless of which guide portion 400L or 410L it is parked on, it is possible to suppress the game ball from falling out and preferably increase the above-described chances of entering a ball. In addition, increasing the number of game balls to be guided leads to diversification of the manner of entering balls into each ball entry section 331, 341 (for example, a configuration in which a plurality of game balls can be collectively guided to the ball entry sections 331, 341). ) can be suitably realized.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of game balls staying on stage ST is substantially smaller than the upper limit number of incoming balls in each round. Therefore, even in the case of having the relief function described above, it is possible to suitably suppress excessive benefits given to the player by the stop function.

By forming the stage ST over the two guide routes GP1 and GP2, it is possible to prevent the presence of the stage ST from extending the player's attention to a wide area. This is a preferable configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the stationary game ball.

In the open/close execution mode of the present embodiment, the variable winning unit 83L alternately switches between the first guidance state and the second guidance state with the non-guiding state in between. As a result, game balls that have not entered one of the ball-entering sections are guided to the other ball-entering section through a dwell. This prevents the motion of the game ball from becoming monotonous and contributes to increasing the attention to the game.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described ninth embodiment, when the lower right movable plate 402L is replaced with the lower left movable plate 412L, the object for forming the bottom of the stage ST is configured to avoid interference between the two movable plates 402L and 412L. is not limited to For example, in a state where the right lower movable plate 402L is arranged at the close position, the lower left movable plate 412L is configured to move first, and the upper end portion of the lower left movable plate 412L advances to the midsection (lower surface) of the lower right movable plate 402L. It is good also as the structure (the structure which stops temporarily in front of an intersection part). After that, when the lower right movable plate 402L leaves the intersection position, the lower left movable plate 412L resumes its movement to the close position (passes through the intersection), so that the game balls can be replaced when the replacement is performed. can be more suitably suppressed.

Similarly, when the object for forming the bottom of the stage ST is switched from the lower left movable plate 412L to the lower right movable plate 402L, the configuration is such that interference between the two movable plates 402L and 412L is avoided, but it is not limited to this. . For example, in a state where the lower left movable plate 412L is arranged at the close position, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L is configured to precede the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L, and the upper end portion of the lower right movable plate 402L advances to the midsection (lower surface) of the lower left movable plate 412L. It is good also as the structure (the structure which stops temporarily in front of an intersection part). After that, when the lower left movable plate 412L leaves the intersection position, the lower right movable plate 402L resumes its movement to the close position (passes through the intersection), so that the game balls can be replaced when the replacement is performed. can be more suitably suppressed.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331 is formed by arranging the first movable body 350 at the projecting position, and the second movable body 360 is projected. A second guide path GP2 that guides the game ball to the second ball entering portion 341 is formed by arranging it at the position. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the specific configuration for forming the guide routes GP1 and GP2. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 49, the variable prize winning unit 83N in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. FIG. 49(a) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83N, FIG. 49(b) is a schematic diagram showing the biasing means for the movable bodies 430N and 440N, and FIGS. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship with the flow of game balls.

As shown in FIG. 49(a), the variable winning unit 83L includes a first movable body 430N disposed at a position closer to the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331 in the specific region SE, and a and a second movable body 440N disposed at a position closer to the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entering portion 341.

The first movable body 430N has a flat plate shape, and one plate surface faces the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331 from the center side (second ball entering portion 341 side) of the specific region SE (hereinafter referred to as , standby position). The vertical width dimension of the first movable body 430N is larger than the vertical width dimension of the inlet portion 332, and the entire inlet portion 332 is covered with the first movable body 430N.

The first movable body 430N is centered on either one of an upper shaft portion 431N provided at the upper end portion of the first movable body 430N and a lower shaft portion 432N provided at the lower end portion of the first movable body 430N. It is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable. Springs 435N and 436N are attached to the upper end and lower end of the first movable body 430N, and the first movable body 430N stays at the standby position due to the urging forces of the springs 435N and 436N (Fig. 49(b)). )reference). In the following description, the positions of the shaft portions 431N and 432N when the first movable body 430N is arranged at the standby position are referred to as "initial positions".

The first movable body 430N is connected to the drive motor 321 via a link mechanism 325N. When the output shaft portion of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction), the first movable body 430N moves around the lower shaft portion 432N against the biasing force of the spring 435N. It rotates in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction). As a result, the upper shaft portion 431N is displaced toward the second ball entering portion 341, and the posture of the first movable body 430N is changed. When rotating about the lower shaft portion 432N, the displacement of the lower shaft portion 432N from the initial position is prevented by the biasing force of the spring 436N, and the lower shaft portion 432N stays at the initial position. becomes.

A guide groove 433N through which the upper shaft portion 431N of the first movable body 430N is inserted is formed in the front surface portion 312N of the housing 310N. A rotation range of the first movable body 430N is defined when the first movable body 430N rotates about . In the following description, the position at which the first movable body 430N is rotated to the maximum rotation angle defined by the guide groove 433N, that is, the position at which the first movable body 430N is tilted downward toward the first ball entering portion 331 is referred to as the first rotation position of the first movable body 430N. .

When the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction (clockwise direction) while the first movable body 430N is placed at the standby position, the first movable body 430N is pushed by the biasing force of the spring 436N. against the upper shaft portion 431N in the second predetermined direction (clockwise direction). As a result, the lower shaft portion 432N is displaced toward the second ball entering portion 341, and the posture of the first movable body 430N is changed. When rotating about the upper shaft portion 431N, displacement from the initial position of the upper shaft portion 431N is prevented by the biasing force of the spring 435N, and the upper shaft portion 431N remains at the initial position.

A guide groove 434N through which the lower shaft portion 432N of the first movable body 430N is inserted is formed in the front surface portion 312N of the housing 310N. A rotation range of the first movable body 430N is defined when the first movable body 430N rotates about 431N. In the following description, the position at which the first movable body 430N is rotated to the maximum rotation angle defined by the guide groove 434N, that is, the position at which the first movable body 430N is inclined downward toward the first ball entering portion 331 is referred to as the second rotation position of the first movable body 430N. .

The second movable body 440N has a flat plate shape, and one plate surface faces the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entering portion 341 from the center side (first ball entering portion 331 side) of the specific region SE (hereinafter referred to as , standby position). The vertical width dimension of the second movable body 440N is larger than the vertical width dimension of the inlet portion 342, and the entire inlet portion 342 is covered with the second movable body 440N.

The second movable body 440N is centered on either one of the upper shaft portion 441N provided at the upper end portion of the second movable body 440N and the lower shaft portion 442N provided at the lower end portion of the second movable body 440N. It is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable. Springs 445N and 446N are attached to the upper end and lower end of the second movable body 440N, and the second movable body 440N stays at the standby position due to the urging forces of the springs 445N and 446N (Fig. 49(b)). )reference). In the following description, the positions of the shaft portions 441N and 442N when the second movable body 440N is arranged at the standby position are referred to as "initial positions".

The second movable body 440N is connected to the drive motor 321 via a link mechanism 325N. By rotating the output shaft of the drive motor 321 in the second specific direction (clockwise direction), the second movable body 440N moves in the second predetermined direction around the lower shaft portion 442N against the biasing force of the spring 445N. (clockwise direction). As a result, the upper shaft portion 441N is displaced toward the first ball entering portion 331, and the posture of the second movable body 440N is changed. When rotating about the lower shaft portion 442N, displacement from the initial position of the lower shaft portion 442N is prevented by the biasing force of the spring 446N, and the lower shaft portion 442N stays at the initial position. becomes.

A guide groove 443N through which the upper shaft portion 441N of the second movable body 440N is inserted is formed in the front surface portion 312N of the housing 310N. A rotation range of the second movable body 440N is defined when the second movable body 440N rotates about . In the following description, the position at which the second movable body 440N is rotated to the maximum rotation angle defined by the guide groove 443N, that is, the position inclined downward toward the second ball entering portion 341 is referred to as the second rotation position of the second movable body 440N. .

When the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction) while the second movable body 440N is arranged at the standby position, the second movable body 440N is attached to the spring 446N. It rotates in the first predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction) about the upper shaft portion 441N against the force. As a result, the lower shaft portion 442N is displaced toward the first ball entering portion 331, and the posture of the second movable body 440N is changed. When rotating about the upper shaft portion 441N, displacement from the initial position of the upper shaft portion 441N is prevented by the biasing force of the spring 445N, and the upper shaft portion 441N remains at the initial position.

A guide groove 444N through which the lower shaft portion 442N is inserted is formed in the front surface portion 312N of the housing 310N. A rotation range of the second movable body 440N is defined when the movable body 440N rotates. In the following description, the position at which the second movable body 440N is rotated to the maximum rotation angle defined by the guide groove 444N, that is, the position at which the second movable body 440N is tilted downward toward the first ball entering portion 331 is referred to as the second rotation position of the second movable body 440N. .

When the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are arranged at the standby position, the driving motor 321 (output shaft) rotates in the first specific direction, thereby causing the first ball entering portion to enter the specific region SE. A first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to 331 is formed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 49(a) to 49(c), the first movable body 430N rotates in the first predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction) about the lower shaft portion 432N. The second movable body 440N rotates about the upper shaft portion 441N in the first predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction) and is placed at the first rotation position. As a result, both the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are inclined downward toward the first ball-entering portion 331, and the movable bodies 430N and 440N move toward the first ball-entering portion 331. A series of first guide paths GP1 for guiding game balls are formed. At this time, by synchronizing the operation of the first movable body 430N and the operation of the second movable body 440N, the length of time required for forming the flow path is suppressed.

In the state where the first guide path GP1 is formed in this manner, the regulation of the inflow into the first ball entering portion 331 by the first movable body 430N is released, and the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is guided along the first guide path GP1. It will flow into the first ball entrance portion 331 via.

A slight gap is formed between the tip portions of the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N, but this gap is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from passing through the gap, that is, passing through the specific area SE without flowing into the first ball entering portion 331 .

When the round end condition is satisfied such that the number of balls entering the first ball entering portion 331 reaches the upper limit number, the drive motor 321 (output shaft) rotates in the second specific direction, and the output shaft rotates in the initial state. return to position. Accordingly, the first movable body 430N returns to the standby position by the biasing force of the spring 435N, and the second movable body 440N returns to the standby position by the biasing force of the spring 446N. As a result, the first movable body 430N restricts the inflow into the first ball-entering portion 331, and the guidance to the first ball-entering portion 331 through the first guide path GP1 is cancelled. In this case as well, the synchronization of the operation of the first movable body 430N and the operation of the second movable body 440N suppresses the lengthening of the period required for channel cancellation.

On the other hand, when the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are arranged at the standby position, when the drive motor 321 (output shaft) rotates in the second specific direction, the second movable body 430N moves to the specific region SE. A second guide path GP2 that guides the game ball to the ball entry portion 341 is formed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 49(a) to 49(d), the first movable body 430N rotates about the upper shaft portion 431N in the second predetermined direction (clockwise direction) to move the second movable body 430N. The second movable body 440N rotates about the lower shaft portion 442N in the second predetermined direction (clockwise direction) and is placed at the second rotation position. As a result, both the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are inclined downward toward the second ball-entering portion 341, and the movable bodies 430N and 440N move toward the second ball-entering portion 341. A series of second guide paths GP2 are formed to guide the game balls. At this time, by synchronizing the operation of the first movable body 430N and the operation of the second movable body 440N, the length of time required for forming the flow path is suppressed.

In the state in which the second guide path GP2 is formed in this manner, the regulation of the inflow into the second ball entry portion 341 by the second movable body 440N is released, and the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is guided along the second guide path GP2. It will flow into the second ball entrance portion 341 via.

A slight gap is formed between the tip portions of the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N, but this gap is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from passing through the gap, that is, passing through the specific area SE without flowing into the second ball entering portion 341 .

When the round end condition is met, such as when the number of balls entering the second ball entering portion 341 reaches the upper limit, the drive motor 321 (output shaft) rotates in the first specific direction, and the output shaft rotates in the initial state. return to position. Accordingly, the first movable body 430N returns to the standby position by the biasing force of the spring 436N, and the second movable body 440N returns to the standby position by the biasing force of the spring 445N. As a result, the second movable body 440N restricts the inflow into the second ball-entering portion 341, and the guidance to the second ball-entering portion 341 through the second guide path GP2 is canceled. In this case as well, the synchronization of the operation of the first movable body 430N and the operation of the second movable body 440N suppresses the lengthening of the period required for channel cancellation.

According to the tenth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a game machine of a type equipped with a variable winning device that changes the probability of a ball entering a ball-entering section by guiding means, the monotony of the game is suppressed by enhancing the contrast between the guided state and the non-guided state. can. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the winning device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) in the guided state is wide. However, simply enlarging the size of the guide means to increase the receiving width tends to cause various problems such as a decrease in responsiveness and a decrease in durability (stability of operation) at the time of state switching. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by using both the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N and arranging these movable bodies 430N and 440N at the respective passage forming positions, the series of guide paths GP1, With the configuration in which GP2 is formed, it is possible to avoid increasing the size of the individual movable bodies 430N and 440N while widening the target range (receiving width of the game ball). As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player and suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by it.

When the first movable body 430N is arranged at the standby position, the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331 is covered by the first movable body 430N. Thereby, the entry of a ball into the first ball entry portion 331 can be restricted. Further, when the second movable body 440N is arranged at the standby position, the inlet portion 342 of the second ball entering portion 341 is covered by the second movable body 440N. As a result, entry of a ball into the second ball entry portion 341 can be restricted. In this way, by causing the movable bodies 430N and 440N forming the guide paths GP1 and GP2 to function as shutters for the respective ball-entering portions 331 and 341, ball-entering can be performed under conditions where the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are not formed. In order to prevent the ball from entering the portions 331 and 341, it is possible to prevent the structure from becoming excessively complicated.

As described above, the configuration in which the movable bodies 430N and 440N serve both as shutters and passage forming portions increases the overall length of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 (the width of the game ball reception) and complicates the configuration resulting therefrom. This is advantageous in suppressing erosion. However, for example, when forming the first guide path GP1, if the second movable body is arranged at the passage forming position, the second ball entering portion 341 is opened and the ball entering the second ball entering portion 341 regulations are relaxed. Further, when the second guide path GP2 is formed, if the first movable body 430N is arranged at the passage forming position, the first ball entering portion 331 is opened, and the ball entering the first ball entering portion 331 does not enter the ball. regulations are relaxed. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the first guide path GP1 is formed, the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N restrict the entry of the ball into the second ball entry portion 341, and the second guide path GP1 is formed. When the path GP2 is formed, the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are configured to restrict the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance portion 331, that is, the movable bodies 430N and 440N are configured to compensate for the deterioration of the restriction function. By doing so, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

If the movable bodies 430N and 440N rotate toward each other to form the guide routes GP1 and GP2, the impact when the guide routes GP1 and GP2 are formed can be increased. As a result, not only the ball entering the ball entering portions 331 and 341 but also the visual change (movement of the movable bodies 430N and 440N) just before the ball entering can be produced favorably.

In particular, when a movable body is arranged in the game area PE, the presence of the movable body can be a factor limiting the flow path. Here, if the movable bodies 430N and 440N rotate toward each other to form the guide routes GP1 and GP2 as shown in the present embodiment, the situation where the guide routes GP1 and GP2 are not formed. Below, the area between the movable bodies 430N and 440N can be suitably used as a flow path for game balls.

When the movable bodies 430N and 440N are arranged at the standby position, the passage walls of the flow path are formed by the movable bodies 430N and 440N. If the movable bodies 430N and 440N constitute the passage wall surface in this way, even when a plurality of movable bodies are provided side by side in the game area PE, coexistence with other game parts can be realized favorably.

When a series of guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by a plurality of movable bodies 430N and 440N, the responsiveness depends on the slower moving body. Here, as shown in the present embodiment, in each guide path GP1, GP2, the path length of the portion formed by the first movable body 430N and the path length of the portion formed by the second movable body 440N If the length is equally divided, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience caused by the difference in size.

When a series of guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by a plurality of movable bodies, it is assumed that the behavior of the game ball is disturbed when the game ball is caught in the joint portion. When the movable bodies 430N and 440N function as ball receiving portions for receiving game balls, the positional accuracy may be lowered due to the influence of distortion or the like. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the movable bodies constituting the upstream portions of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 so as to be shifted upward (offset) from the extension of the movable bodies constituting the downstream portions, , the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

When the movable bodies 430N and 440N are of a rotating type, the collision of the game ball applies a force to rotate the movable bodies 430N and 440N. As for the movable bodies forming the downstream portions of the guide paths GP1 and GP2, further downward rotation is prevented by the guide grooves 433N and 443N, so even if they are pushed by the game ball, they will not be in the posture. change can be avoided. On the other hand, the movable bodies forming the upstream portions of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are prevented from further upward rotation by the guide grooves 434N and 444N, but are rotated by the collision of the game ball. The direction in which is induced is opposite to the regulation direction. In other words, it cannot be expected that the movable body forming the upstream portion will not be prevented from rotating due to the collision of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by placing the movable body that is less affected by the collision of the game ball on the downstream side and the movable body that is more susceptible to the impact on the upstream side, the entrance portions 332 and 342 of the ball entering portions 331 and 341 are arranged. It suppresses that the flow of the game is greatly disturbed in the vicinity.

<Modification 1>
In the tenth embodiment, the motion area (displacement area) of the first movable body 430N when the first guide path GP1 is formed by the first movable body 430N and the movement area (displacement area) of the first movable body 430N when the second guide path GP2 is formed. Although the operation area (displacement area) of the first movable body 430N overlaps with the movement area (displacement area) to suppress the spread of the dead space, the configuration is not limited to this. An operation area (displacement area) of the first movable body 430N when forming the first guide path GP1 by the first movable body 430N and an operation area (displacement area) of the first movable body 430N when forming the second guide path GP2 ( It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the displacement region) does not overlap. It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a configuration that avoids duplication in the same way for the motion region of the second movable body 440N.

<Modification 2>
In the tenth embodiment, one drive motor 321 is used to drive both the movable bodies 430N and 440N, but the driving section for the first movable body 430N and the driving section for the second movable body 440N and may be provided separately. In addition, a driving section for driving both movable bodies 430N and 440N when forming the first guide path GP1 and a driving section for driving both movable bodies 430N and 440N when forming the second guiding path GP2 are separately provided. may be provided.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
In the tenth embodiment, the movement of the movable bodies 430N and 440N is synchronized in forming the guide routes (guide routes GP1 and GP2) to the ball entry portion by combining the plurality of movable bodies 430N and 440N. did. This embodiment is similar in that the guide path to the ball-entering portion is formed by combining a plurality of movable bodies, but the length (receiving width) of the guide path changes depending on the situation. One of the characteristics is that there is The variable winning unit 83P in this embodiment will be described below with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

The housing 310P of the variable winning unit 83P is provided with a ball entry portion 331 into which game balls can enter. The entrance portion 332 of the ball entrance portion 331 faces laterally, and the first movable body 350P is arranged so as to cover the entrance portion 332 of the ball entrance portion 331 . Specifically, the first movable body 350</b>P has a substantially flat plate shape, and is arranged so that one plate surface faces the inlet portion 332 .

A shaft portion 432P is provided at the lower end portion of the first movable body 350P. The posture of the first movable body 350P is changed by being rotatable around the shaft portion 432P. By being placed at a predetermined rotational position, the entrance portion 332 of the ball-entering portion 331 is opened and a guide path GP1 inclined downward toward the entrance portion 332 of the first ball-entering portion 331 is formed.

On the side of the ball entrance portion 331 (the side facing the entrance portion 332), a passage area ME for the game ball is provided. A substantially flat plate-shaped second movable body 440P is provided at a position opposite to the first movable body 350P across the passage area ME. The second movable body 440P is arranged so that one plate surface faces the first ball entering portion 331 side. The posture of the second movable body 440P is changed by being rotatable around a shaft portion 441P provided at the upper end. Then, the second movable body 440P is inclined downward toward the first ball-entering portion 331 by being arranged at the predetermined rotation position.

In the variable prize winning unit 83P of the present embodiment, a drive section 321P for the first movable body 350P and a drive section 448P for the second movable body 440P are separately provided. Although these driving units 321P and 448P are similar in that they are driven and controlled by the main controller 162, their operating conditions are different. Specifically, the drive unit 321P is configured to move the first movable body 430P to a predetermined rotation position on the condition that the round start condition is satisfied during the opening/closing execution mode. 321P is configured to periodically (regularly) switch the position (predetermined rotational position/standby position) of the second movable body 440P.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the state of the variable winning unit 83P is a state in which only the first movable body 430P is arranged at a predetermined rotational position (see FIG. 50(b)), a state in which the first movable body 430P and A state in which both of the second movable bodies 440P are arranged at predetermined rotation positions (see FIG. 50(c)), a state in which only the second movable body 440P is arranged at a predetermined rotation position, and a first movable body 430P and the second movable body 440P are placed at the standby position (see FIG. 50(a)). The frequency of ball entry into the ball entry portion 331 (entrance portion 332) differs depending on each of these states. A supplementary description of the relationship between each state and the frequency of ball entry will be given below with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 50(b), when the first movable body 430P is arranged at the predetermined rotation position and the second movable body 440P is arranged at the waiting position, the ball is entered by the first movable body 430P. A guide path GP is formed to guide the game ball to the entrance portion 332 of the portion 331 . Here, the passage area ME is roughly divided into a first area GE1 on the side of the first movable body 430P and a second area GE2 on the side of the second movable body 440P. In each of the regions GE1 and GE2, the width of the channel is larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The guide target by the first movable body 430P is the game ball flowing down the first area GE1 among the game balls flowing down the two areas GE1 and GE2. Specifically, the first area GE1 is cut off by the first movable body 430P arranged at a predetermined rotation position, and the game ball flowing down the first area GE1 reaches the first movable body 430P and turns. change. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first area GE1 is guided to the entrance portion 332 of the ball entry portion 331. As shown in FIG. Since the first movable body 430P is prevented from protruding into the second region GE2, the game ball flowing down the second region GE2 passes between the movable bodies 430P and 440P as it is (passing region ME It passes through) and heads for the out port 86.

On the other hand, when both the first movable body 430P and the second movable body 440P are arranged at predetermined rotational positions as shown in FIG. Under the condition that the second movable body 440P is arranged at the rotational position, the second movable body 440P is arranged at the predetermined rotational position, and under the condition that the second movable body 440P is arranged at the predetermined rotational position, the first When the movable body 430P is arranged at a predetermined rotational position, a series of guide paths GP are formed by the first movable body 430P and the second movable body 440P. As a result, the guide route GP is formed so as to straddle the first area GE1 and the second area GE2, and game balls flowing down either of the two areas GE1 and GE2 are to be guided. In other words, the receiving width of the guide route GP is expanded compared to the case where the guide route GP is formed solely by the first movable body 430P.

Specifically, the first area GE1 is cut off by the first movable body 430P arranged at a predetermined rotation position, and the game ball flowing down the first area GE1 reaches the first movable body 430P and turns. , and the second region GE2 is cut off by the second movable body 440P arranged at a predetermined rotation position, and the game ball flowing down the second region GE2 reaches the second movable body 440P and changes direction change. As a result, each game ball flowing down the first area GE1 and the second area GE2 is guided to the entrance portion 332 of the ball entry portion 331, passes between the two movable bodies 430P and 440P (passes through the passing area ME and) avoid going to the out port 86.

In addition, when the second movable body 440P is arranged alone at a predetermined rotational position, a blank occurs between the guide path GP formed by the second movable body 440P and the first ball entering portion 331. Therefore, the guiding function is not well exhibited, and since the entrance portion 332 is covered with the first movable body 430P, the inflow of game balls into the entrance portion 332 is avoided.

When the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode and the ball entering the first ball entering portion 331 is allowed to enter, the guiding path GP is formed solely by the first movable body 430P, or both movable bodies 430P are formed. A guide route GP may be formed by bodies 430P and 440P. When these two states are compared, the latter has a higher ball-entering probability (ball-entering frequency) into the ball-entering section 331 than the former, and the game can proceed advantageously. By realizing the diversification of the ball-entering modes in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the eleventh embodiment described above, a plurality of movable bodies 430P and 440P are used in combination to change the total length of the guide route GP (receiving width of the game ball in the passing area ME), so that the ball entering the ball entering portion 331 is changed. It was configured to change the ball frequency. In this embodiment, a branch is provided in the ball-entering portion 331, and the destination of the game ball flowing into the ball-entering portion 331 changes according to the change in the total length of the guide path (receiving width in the passage area ME). One of the characteristics is that Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 51(a) to (c), the variable winning unit 83Q shown in the present embodiment and the configuration related thereto will be described, focusing on the differences from the eleventh embodiment. .

The ball entering portion 331Q shown in the present embodiment has a ball passage 333Q through which the game ball that has flowed into the entrance portion 332Q passes. The ball passage 333Q is roughly divided into an upstream passage portion 336Q extending from the inlet portion 332Q in the same direction as the guide path GP, and a first downstream passage portion 337Q and a second downstream passage portion 338Q branching into two. .

The first downstream passage portion 337Q and the second downstream passage portion 338Q extend in the vertical direction, and are arranged side by side so that the inlet opening upward is located on the extension of the upstream passage portion 336Q. More specifically, the inlet of the first downstream passage portion 337Q is arranged closer to the upstream passage portion 336Q than the inlet of the second downstream passage portion 338Q. When the moving speed of the game balls passing through the most downstream portion of the upstream passage portion 336Q is less than a predetermined speed, those game balls flow into the first downstream passage portion 337Q, and the speed of the game balls passing through the most downstream portion When the movement speed exceeds the predetermined speed, the game ball jumps over the entrance of the first downstream side passage portion 337Q and flows into the second downstream side passage portion 338Q. In other words, the configuration is such that the inflow destination changes depending on the moving speed of the game ball.

Main controller 162 in the present embodiment is configured to determine during the opening/closing execution mode whether or not to shift the lottery mode to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Specifically, the lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set to the high-probability mode based on the occurrence of a ball entering the second downstream side passage portion 338Q within a predetermined valid period during the opening/closing execution mode, The lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set to the low probability mode based on the fact that the ball has not entered the second downstream side passage portion 338Q within the predetermined effective period. That is, whether or not the game can be advanced advantageously by shifting to the high-probability mode depends on the movement speed of the game ball that has flowed into the ball entry section.

Here, a second movable body 440Q is arranged at a position opposite to the first movable body 430Q across the passage area ME of the game ball, and the operation mode of this second movable body 440Q is a hit. The configuration is determined according to the type. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 51(d), the length of the period in which the ball is placed at the predetermined rotation position varies depending on the type of win. In this embodiment, 16R jackpot result A and 16R jackpot result B are set as jackpot types.

In the 16R jackpot result A, the second movable body 440Q is arranged at a predetermined rotation position only in a specific round (seventh round). More specifically, the second movable body 440Q returns to its original position when the first action period elapses from the start timing of the specific round. The first operation period is the length (4.8 sec) obtained by multiplying the game ball launch interval period (0.6 sec) by the upper limit of the number of balls entered (8), that is, it is about the same as the shortest execution period of the round. is set. Therefore, the second movable body 440Q returns to its original position before the end of the specific round.

On the other hand, in the 16R jackpot result B, the second movable body 440Q is maintained at a predetermined rotational position in a plurality of rounds including a specific round (seventh round). More specifically, the second movable body 440Q returns to its original position when the second action period elapses from the start timing of the specific round. The second operation period is set longer than the shortest period of the round (specifically, it is set to a period obtained by multiplying the shortest period by the number of remaining rounds (10)). This period is longer than the longest round execution period (30 sec), and the second movable body 440Q is maintained at the predetermined rotational position over a plurality of rounds.

The longer the period in which the ball is placed at the predetermined rotation position, the higher the expectation of the ball entering the second downstream passage portion 338Q compared to the short period. Here, a supplementary description will be given of the relationship between the destination of the game ball and the movable bodies 430Q and 440Q.

As shown in FIG. 51(b), when the guide path GP is formed by the first movable body 430Q alone, the game ball flowing down the first region GE1 hits the first movable body 430Q, changes direction, and enters. It is guided to the entrance portion 332Q of the ball portion 331Q. This game ball is accelerated when moving along the first movable body 430Q and the upstream passage portion 336Q, and although the movement speed along the guide route GP increases, it passes through the most downstream portion of the upstream passage portion 336Q. The moving speed at the time of moving is lower than the predetermined speed. Therefore, most of the game balls that have entered the ball entering portion 331Q flow into the first downstream passage portion 337Q.

Note that the game ball flowing down the second region GE2 passes through between the two movable bodies 430Q and 440Q as it is, and is out of the guidance target toward the ball entry portion 331. FIG. The proportion of game balls flowing down the first area GE1 and the proportion of game balls flowing down the second area GE2 are the same, and about half of the game balls flowing down the passing area ME enter the ball entry section 331. be guided.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 51(b), when the guide path GP is formed by the combination of the two movable bodies 430Q and 440Q, the game ball flowing down the first region GE1 is the first movable body 430Q changes its direction and is not only guided to the entrance portion 332Q of the ball-entering portion 331Q, but also the game ball flowing down the second region GE2 hits the second movable body 440Q and changes its direction to enter the entrance portion 332Q of the ball-entering portion 331Q. be guided to These game balls accelerate when moving along the movable bodies 430Q and 440Q and the upstream passage portion 336Q, but when passing through the most downstream portion of the upstream passage portion 336Q according to the landing position on the guide route GP. There is a difference in the movement speed of Specifically, for the game ball that lands on the first movable body 430Q, the moving speed when passing through the most downstream portion of the upstream passage portion 336Q is lower than the predetermined speed, while the game that lands on the second movable body 440Q As for the ball, the acceleration section is extended, and the movement speed of the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 336Q exceeds the predetermined speed.

That is, when the guide path GP is formed by both the movable bodies 430Q and 440Q, the frequency of ball entry into the ball entry portion 331Q is higher than when the guide path GP is formed by the first movable body 430Q alone. Not only does the progress of the game temporarily speed up due to the increase in about double, but also the transition to the high probability mode based on the inflow of the game ball into the second downstream passage portion 338Q that constitutes the “advantageous ball entry portion” becomes more likely to occur.

In this way, if the movable bodies 430Q and 440Q are used together to change the total length of the guide route, the monotony of the game can be favorably suppressed.

Further, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 51(e), while the guide path GP is extended by the second movable body 440Q, the progress of the game is accelerated and the increase rate of the number of held balls increases. This benefit may be limited to the specific round or may be continued in rounds other than the specific round. By diversifying the games in the opening/closing execution mode in this way, it is possible to contribute to an increase in the degree of attention paid to the games.

<Modification 1>
It is not always necessary to set the drive condition of the second movable body 440Q by the period. For example, in the 16R jackpot result A, the second movable body 440Q is arranged at a predetermined rotation position with the start of a specific round, and the second movable body 440Q is returned to its original position with the end of the specific round. In the 16R jackpot result B, the second movable body 440Q is arranged at a predetermined rotation position at the start of the specific round, and the second movable body 440Q is returned to the original position at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which

<Modification 2>
In the twelfth embodiment, the total length (receiving width) of the guide path is changed by combining a plurality of movable bodies, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is sufficient to change the area through which the game ball to be guided passes. is also possible.

<Modification 3>
In the twelfth embodiment, the movable bodies 430Q and 440Q are rotatable. ), it is not always necessary to make the movable body rotatable. For example, both movable bodies 430Q and 440Q may be configured to slide back and forth, or one of both movable bodies 430Q and 440Q may be rotatable and the other slidable.

<Modification 4>
In the twelfth embodiment, the lower end of the first movable body 430Q is the pivot base end, and the upper end of the second movable body 440Q is the pivot base end. In addition, the direction of rotation of the first movable body 430Q and the direction of rotation of the second movable body 440Q when forming the guide path are opposite to each other. A first guide path GP1 capable of guiding the game ball to the ball entering portion 331Q by the first movable body 430Q alone, and guiding the game ball to the ball entering portion 331Q by both the first movable body 430Q and the second movable body 440Q. As long as each of the series of second guide paths GP2 can be formed, which portion is to be the rotation base end and further the rotation direction is arbitrary.

<Modification 5>
In the twelfth embodiment, the guide path formed by the first movable body 430Q is included in the guide path formed by the first movable body 430Q and the second movable body 440Q. not to be It is sufficient if the area to be guided (receiving width of the game ball) can be changed to cause a difference in the frequency of entering the ball into the ball entering portion 331Q, and the guide route with a relatively small receiving width is relatively It is not necessarily required to be included in the guide route having a relatively wide receiving width.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331 is formed by arranging the first movable body 350 at the projecting position, and the second movable body 360 is projected. By arranging it at the position, the second guide path GP2 for guiding the game ball to the second ball entering portion 341 is formed. This embodiment is similar to the first embodiment in that guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed to guide the game ball to the two ball entry portions 331 and 341 arranged in parallel. , the specific configuration for forming the guide routes GP1 and GP2 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 52, the variable prize winning unit 83R in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. FIG. 52(a) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83R, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the variable winning unit 83R.

A movable body 450R as a “guide means” is arranged in the specific area SE sandwiched between the first ball-entering portion 331 and the second ball-entering portion 341 in the variable winning unit 83R. The movable body 450R has a laterally long shape extending in the direction in which both ball-entering portions 331 and 341 are arranged side by side, and is assembled to the housing 310 in a state of protruding from the front surface portion 312R of the housing 310R.

The movable body 450R is pivotally supported at an intermediate position in the side-by-side arrangement direction, and is rotatable around this pivotal support location 451R. Specifically, when the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction), the movable body 450R rotates in the first predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction), causing the drive motor 321 to rotate. As the output shaft rotates in the second specific direction (clockwise direction), the movable body 450R rotates in the second predetermined direction (clockwise direction).

The vertical position of the movable body 450R is arranged near the upper boundary of the specific area SE, and the upper surface 452R projects above the specific area SE. The upper surface 452R of the movable body 450R has a first inclined portion 453R that slopes downward from above the pivot point 451R to the first ball entering portion 331 side, and a second ball entering portion 341 from above the pivot point 451R. A second inclined portion 454R that slopes downward is formed on the side. When the movable body 450R is in a substantially horizontal standby state, the game ball dropped to the movable body 450R is guided to the first ball entering part 331 side or the second ball entering part 341 side by the inclined parts 453R, 454R. be done. In the present embodiment, the non-guiding state of the variable winning unit 83R is when the movable body 450R is in the standby state.

The gap between the first inclined portion 453R and the first ball-entering portion 331 and the gap between the second inclined portion 454R and the second ball-entering portion 341 are smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Game balls cannot pass through. That is, when the movable body 450R is in the standby state, the movable body 450R restricts the entry of the game ball into the specific area SE, thereby avoiding entry into the respective ball entry sections 331 and 341. The gap dimension is set to be sufficiently smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the game balls distributed to the left and right by the inclined portions 453R and 454R are caught in the gap and stay on the movable body 430. is avoided.

The upper surface of each ball entering portion 331, 341 gently descends to the side of the variable winning unit 83R, and the game ball moves from the inclined portions 453R, 454 of the movable body 450R to the upper surface of each ball entering portion 331, 341. will fall on the side of the variable winning unit 83R.

As shown in FIGS. 53(a) to 53(b), when the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction while the movable body 450R is in the standby state, the movable body 450R rotates in the first predetermined direction. As a result, the posture of the movable body 450R is changed so as to descend to the right, and is switched to the first guidance state. In the first guiding state, both the first inclined portion 453 and the second inclined portion 454R are inclined downward to the right. A first guide path GP1 for guiding the ball is formed.

A game ball dropped from above the variable winning unit 83R toward the variable winning unit 83R hits the variable winning unit 83R, changes direction, and moves along the first guide path GP1. As a result, the ball enters the first ball entering portion 331 .

The housing 310 is provided with a stopper that regulates the rotation range of the movable body 450R so that further rotation is prohibited. Therefore, even if the game ball collides with the portion of the movable body 450R that is closer to the first ball entering portion 331 than the pivot point 451R, the attitude of the movable body 450R is prevented from changing. ing.

In the first guiding state, the gap between the movable body 450R and the second ball entering portion 341 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can pass through the gap. However, the main flow path for the game ball toward the variable winning unit 83R is downward, and the distance W1 between the movable body 450R and the second ball entering portion 341 in the direction intersecting the main flow path (horizontal direction) is It is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. This makes it difficult for the game ball that has fallen toward the variable winning unit 83R to flow into the specific area SE through the gap between the movable body 450R and the second ball entry part 341, and passes through the specific area SE. Entry into the 2-ball entering portion 341 is preferably suppressed.

When the number of balls entering the first ball entering portion 331 reaches a predetermined number and the round end condition is established, the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction. As a result, the movable body 450R rotates in the second predetermined direction and returns from the first guide state to the standby state (see FIG. 53(b)→FIG. 53(a)).

As shown in FIGS. 53(a) to 53(c), when the output shaft of the driving motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction while the movable body 450R is in the standby state, the movable body 450R rotates in the second predetermined direction. As a result, the posture of the movable body 450R is changed so as to descend to the left and is switched to the second guidance state. In the second guiding state, both the first inclined portion 453 and the second inclined portion 454R are inclined downward to the left. A second guide path GP2 for guiding the ball is formed.

A game ball falling from above the variable winning unit 83R toward the variable winning unit 83R changes direction by hitting the variable winning unit 83R and moves along the second guide path GP2. As a result, the ball enters the second ball entering portion 341 .

The housing 310 is provided with a stopper that regulates the rotation range of the movable body 450R so that further rotation is prohibited. Therefore, even if the game ball collides with the portion of the movable body 450R that is closer to the second ball entering portion 341 than the pivot point 451R, the attitude of the movable body 450R is prevented from changing. ing.

In the second guide state, the gap between the movable body 450R and the first ball entering portion 331 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can pass through the gap. However, when the game ball travels toward the variable winning unit 83R, the main flow path is downward, and the separation distance W1 between the movable body 450R and the first ball entering portion 331 in the direction intersecting the main flow path (horizontal direction) is It is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. This makes it difficult for the game ball dropped toward the variable winning unit 83R to flow into the specific area SE through the gap between the movable body 450R and the first ball entering portion 331, and passes through the specific area SE. Entry into the 1-ball entering portion 331 is suitably suppressed.

When the number of balls entering the second ball entering portion 341 reaches a predetermined number and the round end condition is established, the output shaft of the driving motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction. As a result, the movable body 450R rotates in the first predetermined direction and returns from the second guide state to the standby state (see FIG. 53(c)→FIG. 53(a)).

According to the thirteenth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

It is preferable to use a plurality of variable prize winning devices in order to diversify the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. For example, diversification of games can be promoted by providing a difference in the superiority (privileges given) of the ball-entering section. In such a configuration, if the first variable winning device including the first ball winning portion and the second variable winning device including the second ball winning portion are separately provided, the area occupied by each of these winning devices increases. This is not preferable in coexistence with other game parts in the game area PE. In this regard, in the variable winning unit 83R shown in the present embodiment, the movable body forming the guide path GP1 to the first ball-entering portion 331 and the movable body forming the guide path GP2 to the second ball-entering portion 341 By sharing , the expansion of the area occupied by the variable winning unit 83R is suppressed.

Further, for example, if a movable body for guidance is provided for each winning device, each ball entry portion becomes independent, and only the effect (diversification) of having a plurality of ball entry portions can be expected. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, since the guide destination changes according to the change in the posture of the movable body 450R, the player can move to the movable body 450R while imagining which direction the guide destination will be. expected to pay attention. As a result, an effect that exceeds the effect of simply using a plurality of ball-entering parts (effect of improving the degree of attention) can be expected.

The first ball entrance portion 331 and the second ball entrance portion 341 are arranged so that the entrance portions 332, 342 face each other, and the specific area SE sandwiched between the ball entrance portions 331, 341 is the ball entrance portion 331, the second ball entrance portion 341. It is an introduction part when a game ball enters 341 . Here, when the game state is not the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) (for example, when it is the normal game state), the movable body 450R is maintained in the non-guiding state, and the movable body 450R is maintained in the non-guiding state. The specific area SE is covered from above by 450R. As a result, the inflow of game balls that have reached the variable winning unit 83R into the specific area SE is regulated. Therefore, when the variable winning unit 83R is in the non-guiding state, the ball entering the ball entering portions 331, 341 is preferably avoided.

When the movable body 450R is in the standby state, the game ball reaching the variable winning unit 83R is first entered by the first inclined portion 453R and the second inclined portion 454R formed on the upper surface 452R of the movable body 450R. The water is divided into the part 331 side and the second ball entry part 341 side and flows down. With such a configuration, the variable winning unit 83R can function as a branching section (dividing section) for branching the flow path of the game ball.

When the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by the presence of these inclined portions 453R and 454R, the inclination angle of the rolling contact surface becomes steeper on the downstream side than on the upstream side. That is, the acceleration of the game ball is higher on the downstream side. Thereby, when a plurality of game balls are guided to each of the ball entering portions 331 and 341, the interval between the game balls can be increased. This is advantageous in suppressing the number of winning balls exceeding the upper limit (so-called over-winning).

The first ball-entering portion 331 and the second ball-entering portion 341 are arranged side by side, and the movable body 450R is positioned between the ball-entering portions 331 and 341 in the direction in which the ball-entering portions 331 and 341 are arranged side by side. are placed in Such arrangement is intended to reduce the size of the movable body 450R and reduce the amount of change in posture of the movable body (operation range).

The rotating direction of the movable body 450R when forming the first guide path GP1 is opposite to the rotating direction of the movable body 450R when forming the second guide path GP2. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the operating area compared to the case where the movable body is limited to one rotating direction. Also, the rolling surface of the first guide path GP1 and the rolling surface of the second guide path GP2 can be configured by the same plate surface. This is preferable for thinning the movable body 450R.

<Modification 1>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the movable body 450R forming the guide paths GP1 and GP2 is configured to function as restricting means for restricting the entry of the ball into the respective ball entering portions 331 and 341, but it corresponds to the restricting means. You may use the structure which carries out together. For example, the variable winning unit 83S shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 54(a) includes a first shutter 370S for the first ball-entering section 331 and a second shutter 380S for the second ball-entering section 341. As shown in FIG. The shutters 370S and 380S are movable between a protruding position that protrudes into the specific area SE and a retracted position that prevents the shutter from protruding into the specific area SE. When the first shutter 370S is arranged at the projecting position, the first shutter 370S restricts the inflow of the game ball into the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331, and the first shutter 370S is arranged at the retracted position. In this state, game balls are permitted to enter the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 . In addition, when the second shutter 380S is arranged at the projecting position, the second shutter 380S restricts the inflow of the game ball into the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entering portion 341, and the second shutter 380S is arranged at the retracted position. In this state, game balls are permitted to enter the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341 .

The shutters 370S and 380S are connected to a drive motor for the movable body 450S via a link mechanism, and are moved to the standby position/projection position by the power of the drive motor. Specifically, when the movable body 450S is in the standby state, both the shutters 370S and 380S are positioned at the protruding positions, and when the movable body 450S is in the first guide state, the movable body 450S is followed (interlocked) with it. When the first shutter 370S moves to the retracted position (see FIG. 54(a1)→FIG. 54(a2)) and the movable body 450S enters the second guide state, the first The second shutter 380S moves to the retracted position (see FIG. 54(a1)→FIG. 54(a3)).

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of accidental ball entry in a situation in which the ball entry into the ball entry portions 331 and 341 should be avoided under normal circumstances.

<Modification 2>
In order to suppress the ball entering the second ball entering portion 341 in the first guided state and the ball entering the first ball entering portion 331 in the second guided state, as shown in FIG. is in the first guiding state, the size of the gap (gap dimension L5) formed between the movable body 450T and the top of the second ball-entering portion 341 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 54(c), when the movable body 450T is in the second guiding state, a It is preferable to form the size of the gap (gap dimension L6) smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

For example, facing portions 456T and 457T facing the entrance portions 332 and 342 of the ball entering portions 331 and 341 in the standby state are formed at the left and right ends of the movable body 450T. When the gap is made small by these facing parts 456T and 457T, the game balls heading for those gaps can collide with the facing parts 456T and 457T. Therefore, if these opposed portions 456T and 457T are formed in a curved shape centering on the pivot point 451T (rotation center axis line), the attitude of the movable body 450T changes due to the impact generated when the game ball collides with it. can be suitably suppressed.

<Modification 3>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the lock device is used to maintain the movable body 450R in the standby state. Optional. For example, the configuration may be such that the posture change from the standby state is suppressed by the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring, or the posture change from the standby state may be suppressed by the magnetic force of a magnet or the like.

<Modification 4>
In the thirteenth embodiment, when the movable body 450R is in the guided state, it is configured to maintain the guided state by the holding force (torque) generated in the drive motor 321 (stepping motor). A configuration (for example, a locking device such as a stopper) that suppresses a change in the posture of the movable body 450R in the state may be separately provided.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2 are formed by the rotary movable body 450T. If the movable body 450T is of a rotating type, it is assumed that the impact of the game ball on the movable body 450T will increase the load on the pivotal support. Deformation such as distortion caused by such a load can be a factor that hinders improvement in the operational stability of the movable body 450T. In particular, in a configuration in which the attitude of the movable body 450T is substantially horizontal in the standby state, the load is greater than in the case of the first guide state or the second guide state. Furthermore, if the period during which the standby state is maintained becomes longer than the period during which the first guidance state or the second guidance state is maintained, the above concern will increase.

One of the features of the variable winning unit 83U shown in the present embodiment is that it is devised to suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences. 55 and 56, the variable winning unit 83U in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 55(a) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83U, FIG. 55(b) is a vertical sectional view of the variable winning unit 83U, and FIG. A schematic diagram showing the relationship, FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between various states of the variable winning unit 83U and the flow of game balls. In addition, in FIG. 56, for convenience of explanation, the movable body 450U in the accommodated state is indicated by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), a housing portion 461U capable of housing the movable body 450U is formed in the body portion 311U of the housing 310U. The accommodation portion 461U is open to the specific area SE side through an opening 462U formed in the front portion 312U of the housing 310U, and the movable body 450U can appear and disappear through the opening 462U.

A transmission block 325U that connects the movable body 450U and the drive motor 321 includes a slide mechanism that slides the movable body 450U back and forth according to the rotation angle of the drive motor 321 (output shaft), and a mechanism that rotates the drive motor 321 (output shaft). It is combined with a rotation mechanism that rotates the movable body 450U in a first predetermined direction (clockwise direction) and a second predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction) according to the movement angle.

As shown in FIG. 55(c), when the output shaft of the drive motor 321 is arranged at the initial rotation position (rotation angle of 0°), the movable body 450U is in the accommodated state. When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the first prize mode, the movable body 450U slides forward when the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (clockwise direction) from the initial rotation position. As a result, the movable body 450U is in a standby state protruding into the specific area SE (see FIG. 56(a)→FIG. 56(b)). Even after entering the standby state, the rotation in the first specific direction continues, whereby the movable body 450U rotates in the first predetermined direction (clockwise direction) and the attitude of the movable body 450U changes. Thereby, the first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331 is formed (see FIG. 56(b)→FIG. 56(c)).

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, guidance of the game ball to the first ball entering section 331 through the first guidance path GP1 is repeatedly executed in a plurality of rounds. During the interval period between rounds, the movable body 450U returns to the standby state. Specifically, when the round end condition is established in the first guidance state, the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction (counterclockwise direction). As a result, the movable body 450U switches from the first guide state to the standby state (see FIG. 56(c)→FIG. 56(b)). After returning to the standby state, the output shaft is stopped to maintain the movable body 450U in the standby state. During the opening/closing execution mode, the movable body 450U is not set to the accommodated state at each interval, but only returned to the standby state, thereby suppressing a decrease in responsiveness.

When the opening/closing execution mode ends, the drive motor 321 operates so that the output shaft of the drive motor 321 returns to the initial rotation position. As a result, the movable body 450U is switched from the first guide state to the accommodated state via the standby state. In the accommodated state, the movable body 450U is prevented from projecting toward the specific region SE, and the movable body 450U is protected by the housing 310U.

Next, a case where the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the second prize winning mode is entered will be described. When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode, the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction (counterclockwise direction) from the initial rotation position. As a result, the movable body 450U slides forward and enters a standby state protruding into the specific area SE (see FIG. 56(a)→FIG. 56(b)). The movement up to this point is the same as when the output shaft rotates in the first specific direction from the initial rotation position. Even after entering the standby state, the rotation in the second specific direction continues, whereby the movable body 450U rotates in the second predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction) and the attitude of the movable body 450U changes. Thereby, the second guide path GP2 for guiding the game ball to the second ball entering portion 341 is formed (see FIG. 56(b)→FIG. 56(d)).

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, guidance of the game ball to the second ball entering section 341 through the second guidance path GP2 is repeatedly executed in a plurality of rounds. During the interval period between rounds, the movable body 450U returns to the standby state. Specifically, when the round end condition is met in the second guidance state, the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction). As a result, the movable body 450U switches from the second guide state to the standby state (see FIG. 56(d)→FIG. 56(b)). After returning to the standby state, the output shaft is stopped to maintain the movable body 450U in the standby state. During the opening/closing execution mode, the movable body 450U is not set to the accommodated state at each interval, but only returned to the standby state, thereby suppressing a decrease in responsiveness.

When the opening/closing execution mode ends, the drive motor 321 operates so that the output shaft of the drive motor 321 returns to the initial rotation position. As a result, the movable body 450U is switched from the second guide state to the accommodated state via the standby state. In the accommodated state, the movable body 450U is prevented from projecting toward the specific region SE, and the movable body 450U is protected by the housing 310U.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launched aiming at the upper operation port 91 in the normal game state can flow down toward the variable winning unit 83U. However, in the normal game state, the movable body 450U is maintained in the accommodated state, and is prevented from protruding toward the specific area SE. This prevents the game ball from colliding with the movable body 450U.

In a configuration that switches between a housed state, a standby state, and a guidance state, the addition of the housed state may reduce responsiveness. In this regard, in the variable winning unit 83U shown in the present embodiment, by not going through the accommodation state when switching between the standby state and the guidance state, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suppressed and the game progressed smoothly. We are trying to realize it.

In addition, in the variable winning unit 83U shown in the present embodiment, the game ball that reaches the variable winning unit 83U is allowed to pass through the specific area SE under the condition that the movable body 450U is in the accommodated state. . In this specific area SE, similarly to the first modification in the first embodiment, a lower working opening 92U is provided, and a game ball passing through the specific area SE can enter the lower working opening 92. It has a configuration (see FIG. 55(a)). This allows the coexistence of the variable winning unit 83U and other game parts.

In a configuration in which the movable body 450U functions as a ball receiving portion for receiving a game ball, the stress generated when the game ball hits is transmitted to the pivot point. This hinders stabilization of the posture of movable body 450U. Therefore, if the movable body 450U is retracted to the accommodation portion 461U as shown in the present embodiment, unnecessary contact with the game ball can be suppressed, and the support portion can be protected.

In addition, by retracting the movable body 450U to the housing portion 461U, the area in front of the movable body 450U can be utilized as a passage area for game balls. As a result, it is possible to relax the restrictions on the flow path of the game ball.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the rotation center of the rotary movable body 450R is set at the central portion of the movable body 450R. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize simplification of the configuration related to rotation. When the game ball collides with the movable body 450R, a stress is generated to prompt the movable body 450R to return to the standby state. This may induce variation in the attitude of the movable body 450R and become a factor that hinders stabilization of the guiding function. One of the features of the present embodiment is that it is devised to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. The variable winning unit 83V in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 57, focusing on the differences from the variable winning unit 83R shown in the thirteenth embodiment.

The movable body 470V extends in the direction in which the first ball-entering portion 331 and the second ball-entering portion 341 are arranged side by side. A vertically elongated first guide groove 483V through which the first shaft portion 481V on the side of the first inserted ball portion 331 is inserted, and a second shaft portion 482V on the side of the second inserted ball portion 341 are inserted through the front portion 312V of the housing 310V. A vertically long second guide groove 484V is formed.

The housing 310V is provided with a first biasing member 485V (spring) that connects the housing 310V and the first shaft portion 481V, and a second biasing member 486V that connects the housing 310V and the second shaft portion 482V. It is The biasing force of the first biasing member 485V presses the first shaft portion 481V against the upper end of the first guide groove 483V, and the biasing force of the second biasing member 486V pushes the second shaft portion 482V out of the second guide groove 484V. The movable body 470V is held in a standby state (horizontal state) by being pressed against the upper end. That is, the posture of the movable body 450V is kept horizontal by the biasing forces of the two biasing members 485V and 486V.

The first guide groove 483V has an arc shape centered on the upper end of the second guide groove 484V, and the second guide groove 484V has an arc shape centered on the upper end of the first guide groove 483V. . These guide grooves 483V and 484V define the movement ranges of the shaft portions 481V and 482V.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), a horizontally long link member 325V is fixed to the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321, and the link member 325V straddles the first shaft portion 481V and the second shaft portion 482V. A first action portion 325aV is formed at one end thereof and engageable with the tip portion of the first shaft portion 481V, and the other end thereof is engaged with the tip portion of the second shaft portion 482V. A possible second working portion 325bV is formed. Specifically, the first shaft portion 481V and the second shaft portion 482V are configured to be symmetrical with the fixed portion of the output shaft 322 interposed therebetween.

The first action portion 325aV and the second action portion 325bV are concave and open downward, and when the action portions 325aV and 325b are lowered, the engagement with the shaft portions 481V and 482V is maintained. , a power transmission path from the drive motor 321 is ensured, and power is not transmitted when the vehicle is ascending.

When the drive motor 321 operates such that the output shaft 322 rotates in the first predetermined direction (clockwise direction), the first acting portion 325aV pushes down the first shaft portion 481V, causing the first shaft portion 481V to move downward. 481V moves from the upper end to the lower end of the first guide groove 483V. At this time, the second acting portion 325bV rises away from the second shaft portion 482V. Therefore, the second shaft portion 482V stays at the initial position due to the biasing force of the second biasing member 486V. In this way, the first shaft portion 481V descends along the first guide groove 483V, so that the movable body 470V rotates around the second shaft portion 482V, and the posture of the movable body 470V changes to the first input position. It changes so as to be inclined downward toward the spherical portion 331 (see FIG. 57(a)→FIG. 57(c)). Thereby, the first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331 is formed.

When the drive motor 321 operates such that the output shaft 322 rotates in the second predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction), the second operating portion 325bV pushes down the second shaft portion 482V, and the second shaft portion 482V is pushed down. The portion 482V moves from the upper end to the lower end of the second guide groove 484V. At this time, the first action portion 325aV rises away from the first shaft portion 481V. Therefore, the first shaft portion 481V stays at the initial position due to the biasing force of the first biasing member 485V. As the second shaft portion 482V descends along the second guide groove 484V in this way, the movable body 470V rotates about the first shaft portion 481V, and the posture of the movable body 470V changes to the second input position. 57(a) → FIG. 57(d). Thereby, the second guide path GP2 for guiding the game ball to the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entering portion 341 is formed.

According to the fifteenth embodiment detailed above, the movable body 470V is held by the two biasing members 485V and 486V. Therefore, even if the movable body 470V has a function as a ball receiving portion for receiving a game ball, the impact caused by the collision of the game ball can be relieved by the urging members 485V and 486V. Since it is possible to prevent a large load from being applied to the center of rotation, the stability of the attitude of the movable body 470V can be preferably improved.

Further, when guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331, the movable body 470V rotates around the end portion on the second ball entering portion 341 side to guide the game ball to the second ball entering portion 341. In this case, the movable body 470V rotates around the end on the first ball entering portion 331 side. Therefore, in the state where the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed, the portion of the ball receiving portion (upper surface 472V of the movable body 470V) on the side opposite to the guide destination of the game ball with respect to the center of rotation becomes extremely small. , the stress caused by the collision of the game ball or the like acting to return the movable body 470V to the standby state can be preferably avoided.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the rotary movable body 450R shown in the thirteenth embodiment is used to increase the probability of entering a ball (reduce the number of loose balls) shown in the fifth embodiment. One of the characteristics is that Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 58, the configuration related to the contrivance will be described, focusing on the differences from the variable winning unit 83R in the thirteenth embodiment. The housing 310W of the variable winning unit 83R shown in the present embodiment is provided with a cover portion that covers the specific area SE from the front of the gaming machine. there is

As shown in FIG. 58(a), when the movable body 450W is in the standby state, the upper surface 452W (the first inclined portion 453W and the second inclined portion 454W) of the movable body 450W and the ball entering portion 331, A first bypass passage TE1 that bypasses the specific area SE from the first ball entrance portion 331 side and a second bypass passage TE2 that bypasses the specific area SE from the second ball entrance portion 341 side are formed by the upper surface portion of 341 . The housing 310W (more specifically, the cover portion and the front surface portion 312W) has a pair of front and rear wall portions that are opposed to each other across the passage area of the game balls in the detour passages TE1 and TE2, and constitute passage wall surfaces of the detour passages TE1 and TE2. 491W is formed.

A plurality of projections 492W and 493W are formed on each wall portion 491W so as to protrude toward the other side. These projections 492W and 493W form vertically extending ridges and are arranged alternately in the passage direction on the front wall portion 491W side and the rear wall portion 491W side. The detours TE1 and TE2 meander back and forth by these protrusions 492W and 493W, and the game balls passing through the detours TE1 and TE2 move sideways while meandering. As a result, the acceleration of the game ball when passing through the detours TE1 and TE2 is alleviated. That is, the projections 492W and 493W in this embodiment function as deceleration means for decelerating the game balls passing through the detours TE1 and TE2.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 58(b) and 58(c), additional explanation will be given on the arrangement of the first projection 492W and the second projection 493W.

As shown in FIG. 58(b), when the movable body 450W is in the first guiding state and the first guiding path GP1 to the first ball entering portion 331 is formed, the first protrusion 492W and the second protrusion 492W 493W is positioned outside the first guide route GP1 (that is, outside the passage area of the game ball on the first guide route GP1). Therefore, in the first guidance state, the protrusions 492W and 493W are prevented from coming into contact with the game ball heading toward the first ball entering portion 331 via the first guide path GP1, and the game ball moves toward the protrusion 492W. , 493W.

In addition, in the first guiding state, the second projection 493W is positioned below the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W that slopes downward to the right. Therefore, the contact between the game ball falling toward the movable body 450W from above the variable winning unit 83W and the second projection 493W is avoided. On the other hand, the first protrusion 492W is located above the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W that slopes downward to the right, and contacts the game ball falling from above the variable winning unit 83W toward the movable body 450W. sometimes. The first projection 492W forms a ridge extending vertically, and when the game ball passes between the first projections 492W, the falling direction of the game ball becomes the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the first projection 492W. stipulated in Here, the first protrusions 492W are arranged in a direction (horizontal direction) crossing the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the game ball whose moving direction is specified does not repeatedly collide with the first projection 492W. Therefore, the degree of deceleration is smaller than when the game ball goes in the direction in which the first protrusions 492W are arranged (when it moves along the first detour TE1).

As shown in FIG. 58(c), when the movable body 450W is in the second guiding state and the second guiding path GP2 to the second ball entering portion 341 is formed, the first protrusion 492W and the second protrusion 492W 493W is located outside the second guide route GP2 (that is, outside the passage area of the game ball on the second guide route GP2). Therefore, in the second guidance state, the protrusions 492W and 493W are prevented from coming into contact with the game ball heading toward the second ball entering portion 341 via the second guide path GP2, and the game balls move toward the protrusion 492W. , 493W.

Further, in the second guiding state, the first protrusion 492W is positioned below the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W that slopes downward to the left. Therefore, contact between the game ball falling toward the movable body 450W from above the variable winning unit 83W and the first projection 492W is avoided. On the other hand, the second projection 493W is located above the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W, which slopes down to the right, and contacts a game ball falling from above the variable winning unit 83W toward the movable body 450W. sometimes. The second projection 493W forms a ridge extending vertically, and when the game ball passes between the second projections 493W, the falling direction of the game ball becomes the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the second projection 493W. stipulated in Here, the second protrusions 493W are arranged in a direction (horizontal direction) crossing the longitudinal direction thereof. Therefore, the game ball whose moving direction is specified does not repeatedly collide with the second projection 493W. Therefore, the degree of deceleration is smaller than when the game ball goes in the direction in which the second protrusions 493W are arranged (when it moves along the second roundabout path TE2).

For example, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode, the movable body 450W is repeatedly switched from the standby state to the first guidance state to the standby state. Here, in the standby state, the game ball that has reached the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W is decelerated by colliding with the movable body 450W, and further accelerated by the protrusions 492W and 493W when passing through the bypass passages TE1 and TE2. Move while restrained. As a result, the time required to pass through the detours TE1 and TE2 is lengthened.

Here, as shown in FIG. 58(a)→FIG. 58(b), when the posture of the movable body 450W changes in a state where a game ball is placed on the upper surface of the movable body 450W. The game ball whose acceleration has been suppressed by the protrusions 492W and 493W is removed from the influence of the protrusions 492W and 493W and moves quickly toward the first ball entering section 331.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to prevent the preceding game ball from hindering the movement of the following game ball toward the first ball entering portion 331, and facilitate the entry of the ball into the first ball entering portion 331.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the second prize winning mode, the movable body 450W is repeatedly switched from the standby state to the second guidance state to the standby state. Here, in the standby state, the game ball that has reached the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W is decelerated by colliding with the movable body 450W, and further accelerated by the protrusions 492W and 493W when passing through the bypass passages TE1 and TE2. Move while restrained. As a result, the time required to pass through the detours TE1 and TE2 is lengthened.

Here, as shown in FIG. 58(a)→FIG. 58(c), when the attitude of the movable body 450W changes in the state where the game ball is on the upper surface of the movable body 450W. The game ball whose acceleration has been suppressed by the protrusions 492W and 493W is removed from the influence of the protrusions 492W and 493W and moves quickly toward the second ball entering section 341.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to prevent the preceding game ball from hindering the subsequent game ball from moving toward the second ball entering portion 341, and to facilitate the entry of the ball into the second ball entering portion 341.

According to the 16th embodiment described in detail above, it is possible to give the game ball that reaches the movable body 450W during the interval period between rounds an opportunity to enter the first ball entering portion 331 . As a result, it is possible to suppress irregular hitting such as refraining from shooting the game ball for the purpose of suppressing the occurrence of useless balls during the interval period, etc., and contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

In addition, since the game ball placed on the movable body 450W moves toward the ball-entering portions 331 and 341 as the attitude of the movable body 450W changes, the ball-entering frequency at the start of the round increases. It is preferable to prevent the game from becoming monotonous by creating a difference in the frequency of entering balls during the round game.

The maximum number of game balls placed on the movable body 450W is 5, which is less than the upper limit number (8) which is the round end condition. Therefore, the inconvenience that the round game ends prematurely due to the establishment of the round end condition immediately after the start of the round does not occur.

When the movable body 450W is in a standby state, the detour passages TE1 and TE2 are formed on both left and right sides of the pivot point 451W. This delays the release of the game ball from the movable body 450W as described above to lengthen the time on which the game ball rests on the movable body 450W. It is a device to suppress the action on For example, when a game ball is placed on the side of the first roundabout path TE1, the weight of the game ball may act to make the posture of the movable body 450W downwardly inclined to the right. In such a case, the weight of the game ball placed on the second detour TE2 may act to hinder the above action. Forming the bypass passages TE1 and TE2 on both sides of the pivot point 451W and disposing the protrusions 492W and 493W as deceleration means in the bypass passages TE1 and TE2 in this way has technical significance.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out, for example, as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) The location of the variable winning unit 83 in the game area PE is arbitrary. For example, when a left route bypassing the variable display unit 85 arranged in the center of the game board 80a and a right route bypassing the right side are provided as the flow-down path of the game ball in the game area PE. Alternatively, the variable prize winning unit 83 may be arranged on one route, and the game ball launched to the other route may be restricted so as not to reach the variable prize winning unit 83 .

(2) In the variable winning unit 83, when arranging another ball-entering part in a specific area SE (corresponding to a "predetermined area") sandwiched between the two ball-entering parts 331 and 341, the other ball-entering part The type is arbitrary. For example, a general winning opening 81 and a through gate 84 may be provided.

(3) In a configuration in which a plurality of movable bodies 350 and 360 are provided side by side in the variable winning unit 83, it is not always necessary for the plurality of movable bodies 350 and 360 to share a power section (driving motor 321). A plurality of driving units may be provided individually corresponding to the movable bodies 350 and 360 . That is, a first drive section for the first movable body 350 and a second drive section for the second movable body 360 may be provided separately. However, in order to promote the miniaturization of the variable winning unit 83 and improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the variable winning unit 83, it is technically significant to share the power section of the plurality of movable bodies.

(4) Although the detection sensor 334 for the first ball-entering section 331 and the detection sensor 344 for the second ball-entering section 341 are separately provided, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball passage 333 for the first ball entry portion 331 and the ball passage 343 for the second ball entry portion 341 are configured to merge, and a detection sensor is provided at the confluence location or a portion downstream of the confluence location. It is also possible to arrange and share the detection sensor.

(5) The variable winning unit 83 is provided with the first ball entering section 331 and the second ball entering section 341, which are the destinations of game balls in the open/close execution mode. One of the ball entry sections 341 is used as a ball entry section (large winning opening) to which game balls enter in the opening and closing execution mode, and the other is used as a ball entry section (to which game balls enter) in the high frequency support mode. It is also possible to use an operating port with an electric accessory).

(6) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, etc., the rotary movable body 450R is configured to face sideways in the standby state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 59, the movable body 450AA may be vertically oriented in the standby state.

For example, as shown in the thirteenth embodiment and the like, in a configuration in which the movable body 450R is always maintained in a state of protruding toward the specific region SE, by applying the technical idea shown in this modified example, , the chance of the game ball colliding with the movable body 450AA in the standby state can be reduced, and the movable body 450AA can be preferably protected. This is preferable for improving the operational stability of the movable body 450AA.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the entrance portions 331 and 341 are arranged so that the entrance portions 332 and 342 face each other, but this is not the only option. It is also possible to arrange the inlet portions 332, 342 of the ball-entering portions 331, 341 so as to face a direction different from the direction in which the ball-entering portions 331, 341 are arranged side by side. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 60, when the ball entry portions 331AB and 341AB are arranged side by side, the entrance portions 332AB and 342AB are made to face the direction (upward) intersecting with the arrangement direction. can be placed

However, in such a configuration, even if the game ball is not guided to the entering ball sections 331AB and 341AB such as the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball falling toward the variable winning unit 83AB enters. There is concern that the ball may accidentally enter the entrance portions 332AB and 342AB of the ball portions 331AB and 341AB. Therefore, in such a configuration, for example, it is preferable to arrange obstacles such as game nails above the entrance portions 332AB and 342AB to prevent game balls from falling toward the entrance portions 332AB and 342AB.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the ball entry portions 331 and 341 are arranged side by side, but the positional relationship between the ball entry portions 331 and 341 is arbitrary. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 61(a), when arranging the variable winning unit 83AC on the side of the portion of the inner rail 101 that curves upward to the right, the right first input The variable winning unit 83AC can be brought closer to the inner rail 101 by shifting the height position so that the ball portion 331AC is higher than the second ball entering portion 341AC on the left side. This is advantageous, for example, in reducing dead space that can occur between the inner rail 101 and the variable winning unit 83AC.

(9) In each of the first to ninth and thirteenth to sixteenth embodiments, the total length of the first guidance route GP1 and the total length of the second guidance route GP2 are made equal to form the first guidance route GP1. In the state where the game ball reaches any position in the width direction in the specific region SE, it becomes a guide target to the first ball entering portion 331, and in the state in which the second guide path GP2 is formed, the game ball reaches the width direction in the specific region SE. Although the game ball reaching any position in the direction is configured to be guided to the second ball entering section 341, the present invention is not limited to this. A difference may be provided between the game balls to be guided on the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2. For example, the game ball that has reached any position in the width direction of the specific area SE along the first guide path GP1 is to be guided to the first ball-entering section 331, while the second guide path GP2 guides the width of the specific area SE. Only game balls that have reached a part of the direction (for example, a portion closer to the second ball entering part 341) may be differentiated so as to be guided to the second ball entering part 341.

(10) In the first, fourth, and fifth embodiments, the second movable body 360 is formed with the recessed portion 363, and the first movable body 350 is inserted into the recessed portion 363, thereby Although the configuration is such that interference between the motion paths of the movable bodies 350 and 360 is avoided, a specific configuration for avoiding interference between the motion paths of the movable bodies 350 and 360 is arbitrary.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61(b), a first notch 353AD that is open to the rear end side of the first movable body 350AD and extends to the front end side is provided in the central portion of the first movable body 350AD. A constriction is formed in the central portion, and a second notch portion 363AD that is open to the front end side of the second movable body 360AD and extends to the rear end side is provided in the central portion of the second movable body 360AD. to form Then, the constriction of the second movable body 360AD is inserted into the first notch portion 353AD, and the constriction of the first movable body 350AD is inserted into the second notch portion 363AD. and the second movable body 360AD are combined. When the first movable body 350AD moves from the retracted position to the projecting position, the constriction of the first movable body 350AD is displaced to the opening of the second cutout portion 363AD of the second movable body 360AD, and the second movable body When the 360AD moves from the retracted position to the projecting position, the constriction of the second movable body 360AD is configured to be displaced within the first notch 353AD of the first movable body 350AD. This can prevent one of the movable bodies 350AD and 360AD from hindering the movement of the other.

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration in which the variable winning unit 83 has the drive motor 321 as a drive section for driving the movable bodies 350 and 360 has been exemplified, but the drive section does not necessarily have to be a motor. A configuration including other driving means such as a solenoid may be used.

Here, in order to individually operate the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 using one solenoid, it is preferable to use another actuator to switch the power transmission path of the solenoid. Also, the plunger of the solenoid waits at the initial position in the non-excited state, moves to the first operating position in the first excited state, and moves to the second operating position opposite to the first operating position in the second excited state. , the first movable body 350 moves from the retracted position to the projecting position as it moves to the first operating position, and the second movable body 360 moves as it moves to the second operating position. It may be configured to move from the retracted position to the projecting position.

Further, as shown in the fifth embodiment, in the opening/closing execution mode, the first ball entering portion 331 and the second ball entering portion 341 are alternately set as the guide destination of the game ball (however, the setting (assuming an even number of rounds), the power transmission path may be switched between the first movable body 350 side and the second movable body 360 side each time the solenoid is driven.

(12) In the first to fifth embodiments, etc., the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are arranged so as to cross each other. to regulate the movement of the game ball toward the second ball entering portion 341, and to regulate the movement of the game ball toward the first ball entering portion 331 by the second movable body 360 forming the second guide path GP2. , the above arrangement is not essential. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 62(a), it is also possible to arrange the first movable body 350AE and the second movable body 360AE so as to form a y-shape.

(13) In the tenth embodiment, the motion range of the movable bodies 430N and 440N when forming the first guide path GP1 and the motion range of the movable bodies 430N and 440N when forming the second guide path GP2 overlaps, and in the fifteenth embodiment, the motion range of the movable body 470V when forming the first guide path GP1 and the motion range of the movable body 470V when forming the second guide path GP2 are It has a duplicate configuration. In view of the fact that the operating area is shared when switching to each guidance state, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the operation region of the second movable body 360AF for the ball entering portion 341 overlaps. It should be noted that it is sufficient that at least the motion regions overlap, and it is not always necessary to configure the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2 to overlap.

(14) In the tenth embodiment, when the guide routes GP1 and GP2 are formed using a plurality of movable bodies 430N and 440N, the movable bodies 430N and 430N forming the upstream portions of the guide routes GP1 and GP2 440N and the movement of the movable bodies 430N and 440N forming the downstream portion are synchronized. Further, in the seventh embodiment, when the first guide path GP1 is formed using a plurality of movable plates 401L and 402L, the upper left movable plate 401L, which constitutes the upstream portion of the first guide path GP1, protrudes. position (corresponding to the "passage forming position"), the lower right movable plate 402L constituting the downstream portion of the first guide path GP1 is moved to the close position (corresponding to the "passage forming position"). It was configured to When a guide path is formed using a plurality of movable bodies, the operation timing of each movable body is arbitrary. It is also possible to place it in position.

(15) In the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the total length of the first movable body 450P (the length from the rotation base end to the rotation tip) is the same as the total length of the second movable body 460P. However, it is not limited to this. When the movable bodies 450P and 460P are of a rotating type, the collision of the game ball applies a force to rotate the movable bodies 450P and 460P. As for the first movable body 450P, when it is arranged at the passage forming position, further rotation is prevented by the guide groove, so even if it is pushed by the game ball, the change in posture can be avoided. On the other hand, when the second movable body 460P is arranged at the passage forming position, the guide groove prevents further rotation, but the direction in which the rotation is induced by the collision of the game ball is It is opposite to the rotation regulation direction. In other words, the guide groove for the second movable body 360P cannot be expected to restrict rotation due to the collision of the game ball. Therefore, the second movable body 360P, which is likely to be affected by the collision of the game ball, is configured to have a shorter overall length than the first movable body 350P, thereby suppressing the occurrence of such inconvenience.

(16) In the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 intersect at the central portion of the movable bodies 350 and 360, but the intersection point is arbitrary. For example, it may be biased toward the first ball-entering portion 331 side, or may be biased toward the second ball-entering portion 341 side.

It is not always necessary to match the height difference between the upstream end and the downstream end of both movable bodies 350 and 360 with the vertical width of the entrance portions 332 and 342 of the entrance portions 331 and 341, and at least at the projecting position. It is only necessary to have a configuration that can avoid the inflow of game balls into the entrance portion on the side that is not the guide destination in the arranged state. Furthermore, the horizontal width of the movable bodies 350 and 360 in the side-by-side direction of the ball entry portions 331 and 341 is formed to be equal to the separation distance between the entrance portions 332 and 342 of the ball entry portions 331 and 341. It is good also as a structure which makes length match.

When the upstream ends of the movable bodies 350 and 360 are extended above the specific region SE, the lateral width of the movable bodies 350 and 360 is configured to be longer than the separation distance between the inlet portions 332 and 342. You may However, it is technically significant to fit the movable bodies 350 and 360 in the specific area SE in terms of enlarging the receiving width of the game ball (making the inlet OE appear larger) while reducing the size of the variable winning unit 83. be.

(17) In the above-described first embodiment and the like, the inclination angle of the first guide route GP1 with respect to the horizontal plane and the inclination angle of the second guide route GP2 with respect to the horizontal plane are made to match. Although it is configured so that the required period of time is the same, it is not limited to this. One guide route may be configured to have a larger inclination angle than the other guide route, and a difference may be provided in the required time. When a difference in tilt angle is provided in this way, a difference also occurs in the moving speed of the game ball. Therefore, the movable body on the side with the larger inclination angle is provided with the recessed portion 363, and the movable body on the side with the smaller inclination angle does not have the recessed portion 363, thereby preferably reducing the function of guiding the game ball. can be suppressed to

In addition, in the fifth embodiment and the like, considering that the first guide path GP1 is formed by the first movable body 350 and the second guide path GP2 is formed by the second movable body 360, Although the inclination angle of the first movable body 350 (upper surface 351) with respect to the horizontal plane and the inclination angle of the second movable body 360 (upper surface 361) with respect to the horizontal plane are made to match, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the second movable body does not have the function of forming a guide path, the inclination angle of the second movable body can be made larger than the inclination angle of the first movable body. As a result, the function of restricting the movement of the game ball along the first guide path GP1 by the second movable body can be favorably enhanced.

(19) A difference is provided between the privilege granted to the player based on the ball entering the first ball-entering section 331 and the privilege granted to the player based on the ball entering the second ball-entering section 341. It is assumed that the player plays the game with the expectation that the game will progress even slightly, that is, that the player will expect the ball to enter the ball-entering section on the side with the greater number of benefits to be awarded. Therefore, in such a configuration, after the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are arranged at the projecting position and the game ball is temporarily stopped in the specific area SE, the movable body that moves to the retracted position is specified. is difficult, it can contribute to the improvement of attention to the game. That is, when the first movable body 350 is placed at the protruded position while the second movable body 360 is placed at the protruded position, the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position after that. It is preferable to use an operation pattern in which the first movable body 350 moves to the retracted position. Alternatively or in addition to this, when the second movable body 360 is arranged at the protruded position in a state where the first movable body 350 is arranged at the protruded position, the first movable body It is preferable to use both an operation pattern in which the 350 moves to the retracted position and an operation pattern in which the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position.

(20) As shown in the above embodiment, it is not always necessary to provide a difference in the number of winning balls in order to provide a difference in advantage between the first ball-entering section 331 and the second ball-entering section 341 . For example, if the number of prize balls is the same, the game state of one of the ball-entering units is changed to a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the current game state (for example, a game state corresponding to the low-probability mode) based on the ball-entering portion. ) or by performing a drop lottery, a difference in advantage may be provided.

(21) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right when a ball enters the machine and results in a big win, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that provides a player with a privilege such as payout of medals when a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window after the reels are stopped. can be applied.

Furthermore, the gaming machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
The following feature group A is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls being paid out is given to the player. The ball-entering part is variable, and the game can be diversified by switching between a guided state in which the game ball is guided to the ball-entered part and a non-guided state in which the guidance is not performed according to the game situation ( For example, see Patent Literature 1).” With regard to the background art, “In the above-described type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the ball-entering portion in order to increase the level of attention paid to the game.” This was done in view of the background and issues.

Feature A1. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A first ball-entering section (for example, first ball-entering section 331) and a second ball-entering section (for example, second ball-entering section 341) provided in the game area and into which game balls enter;
Guide means capable of guiding game balls to the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion 360AD, first guide portions 400L to 400M, second guide portions 410L to 410M, movable bodies 450R to 450U, 450W, 470V, 450AA),
A first guide path (for example, a first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion is formed by the guide means being in the first state,
A second guide path (for example, a second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second ball entering portion is formed by the guide means being in the second state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first guiding route and the second guiding route intersect when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

It is preferable to use a plurality of variable ball-entering devices each having a guide means and a ball-entering portion in order to diversify the game and improve the attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the area occupied by the ball-entering device will increase, and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball-entering device will become stronger. There is a concern that such restrictions on the placement may hinder the above-described effect of improving the degree of attention.

In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the first guide route and the second guide route formed by the guide means intersect, and part of the guide route is shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the area occupied by the ball-entering device from increasing, and the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game can be favorably exhibited. Further, since the movement destination of the game ball is reversed while part of the guide path is overlapped, it is possible to suppress the difficulty of understanding the guide destination of the game ball due to the compression of the occupied area.

Feature A2. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A first ball-entering section (for example, first ball-entering section 331) and a second ball-entering section (for example, second ball-entering section 341) provided in the game area and into which game balls enter;
a first movable body (eg, first movable bodies 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, first guides 400L to 400M) operable in a predetermined range including a first position (eg, protruded position);
A second movable body (for example, second movable bodies 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, and second guide parts 410L to 410M) that can operate in a predetermined range including a second position (for example, a protruding position),
A first guide path (for example, a first guide path GP1) for guiding a game ball to the first ball entering portion is formed by arranging the first movable body at the first position,
A second guide path (for example, a second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second ball entry portion is formed by arranging the second movable body at the second position,
A game machine, wherein the first position and the second position are set so that the first guide route and the second guide route intersect when viewed from the front of the game machine.

It is preferable to use a plurality of variable ball-entering devices each having a movable body and a ball-entering portion in order to diversify the game and increase the attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the area occupied by the ball-entering device will increase, and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball-entering device will become stronger. There is a concern that such restrictions on the placement may hinder the above-described effect of improving the degree of attention.

In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the first guide route and the second guide route formed by the guide means intersect, and part of the guide route is shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the area occupied by the ball-entering device from increasing, and the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game can be favorably exhibited. Further, since the movement destination of the game ball is reversed while part of the guide path is overlapped, it is possible to suppress the difficulty of understanding the guide destination of the game ball due to the compression of the occupied area.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a gaming machine provided with a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, provided in the game area, and a game ball enters the game machine. a first ball entering portion (eg, first movable bodies 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, first guide portions 400L to 400M) and a second ball entering portion (eg, second ball entering portion 341); A first guiding means (for example, first movable bodies 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, first guiding portions 400L to 400M, which can be switched between a guiding state in which the game ball is guided to the ball portion and a non-guiding state in which the guidance is not performed). ), and second guiding means (for example, second movable bodies 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, second guide portions 410L to 410M), and a first inclined surface (for example, first guide A path GP1) is formed, and a second inclined surface (for example, a second guide path GP2) that guides a game ball to the second ball entering portion is formed in the game area by the second guiding means being in the guiding state. and the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface are configured to cross each other when viewed from the front of the game machine.”.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a game machine provided with a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, which is provided in the game area and a game ball enters. A first ball-entering section (for example, the first ball-entering section 331) and a second ball-entering section (for example, the second ball-entering section 341), and a guidance state for guiding the game ball to the first ball-entering section, and performing the guidance. A first guide means (for example, first movable bodies 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, and first guide portions 400L to 400M) that can be switched to a non-guided state, and guides the game ball to the second ball entering portion A second guide means (for example, second movable bodies 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, and second guide portions 410L to 410M) that can be switched between a guided state and a non-guided state in which the guidance is not performed, and the guided state A first projection area when the first guide means in the state is projected backward from the front side of the game machine, and a second projection area when the second guide means in the guided state is projected backward from the front side of the game machine. A game machine characterized by being configured so that two projection areas intersect when viewed from the front of the game machine.".

Furthermore, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a gaming machine provided with a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, provided in the game area, and a game ball is entered. A first ball-entering portion (e.g., first ball-entering portion 331), a second ball-entering portion (e.g., second ball-entering portion 341), and a first position (e.g., protruding position) that is operable within a predetermined range. 1 movable body (eg, first movable bodies 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, first guide parts 400L to 400M) and a second movable body capable of operating in a predetermined range including a second position (eg, protruding position) (for example, second movable bodies 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, and second guide parts 410L to 410M), and the first ball entering part is arranged by arranging the first movable body at the first position. A first guide path (e.g., first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to is formed, and the second movable body is arranged at the second position to guide the game ball to the second ball entering portion. A second guide path (for example, a second guide path GP2) is formed, and the first position and the second position are such that the first movable body and the second movable body are arranged at the first position and the second position. A game machine characterized in that the first guide route and the second guide route are set so as to intersect with each other when it is assumed that the first guide route and the second guide route are crossed.".

Feature A3. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A first ball-entering portion (for example, first movable bodies 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB-350AD, first guide portions 400L to 400M) and a second ball-entering portion (for example, a second ball entry portion 341);
a first movable body (first movable body 350) operable within a predetermined range including the first position (projection position);
a second movable body (for example, second movable bodies 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, and second guides 410L to 410M) operable in a predetermined range including the second position (projection position);
When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when a jackpot result corresponding to the first winning mode is obtained), the first movable body is positioned at the first position, and when the second condition is satisfied (for example, the second winning mode a switching means (MPU of the main controller 162) for switching the arrangement of the first movable body and the second movable body so that the second movable body is positioned at the second position when the corresponding jackpot result is obtained); with
A first guide path (for example, a first guide path GP1) for guiding a game ball to the first ball entering portion is formed by arranging the first movable body at the first position,
A second guide path (for example, a second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second ball entry portion is formed by arranging the second movable body at the second position,
A game machine, wherein the first position and the second position are set so that the first guide route and the second guide route intersect when viewed from the front of the game machine.

It is preferable to use a plurality of variable ball-entering devices each having a movable body and a ball-entering portion in order to diversify the game and increase the attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the area occupied by the ball-entering device will increase, and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball-entering device will become stronger. There is a concern that such restrictions on the placement may hinder the above-described effect of improving the degree of attention.

In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the first guide route and the second guide route formed by the guide means intersect, and part of the guide route is shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the area occupied by the ball-entering device from increasing, and the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game can be favorably exhibited. Further, since the movement destination of the game ball is reversed while part of the guide path is overlapped, it is possible to suppress the difficulty of understanding the guide destination of the game ball due to the compression of the occupied area.

Feature A4. The first movable body and the second movable body are ball receiving portions that receive the game ball flowing down the game area and guide the game ball by changing the flowing direction of the game ball,
The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, wherein the first guide route and the second guide route intersect at an intermediate portion of the first guide route and an intermediate portion of the second guide route.

If both guide paths are configured to intersect at an intermediate portion of the guide paths, the total length of the guide paths (the width of receiving the game ball) can be increased while appropriately suppressing the increase in size of the ball-entering device resulting therefrom. .

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "the first guide route and the second guide route are arranged such that the length of the upstream side of the intersection is equal to the length of the downstream side of the intersection. The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, characterized in that it is formed in

Incidentally, it is also possible to apply the technical idea shown in this feature to the feature A1. In this case, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "the guide means performs the guidance by receiving a game ball flowing down the game area and changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the first guide". The game machine according to feature A1, wherein the first guide route and the second guide route intersect at an intermediate portion of the route and an intermediate portion of the second guide route.

Feature A5. The first movable body and the second movable body are formed so that the total length of the first guide path and the total length of the second guide path are the same or substantially the same. The game machine described.

As shown in feature A5, if both guide paths are configured to have the same total length, the effect shown in feature A4 can be exhibited more favorably.

Feature A6. The first movable body and the second movable body are ball receiving portions that receive the game ball flowing down the game area and guide the game ball by changing the flowing direction of the game ball,
The first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are arranged side by side in a predetermined direction,
Features A2 to A2, characterized in that the intersection of the first guide route and the second guide route is located between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5.

As shown in feature A6, if the crossing point of both guide paths is positioned between the ball-entering parts in the direction in which the ball-entering parts are arranged side by side, then the total length of the guide path (the width of receiving the game ball) is It is possible to suitably suppress the increase in size of the ball-entering device caused by the increase in size.

Feature A7. The first movable body and the second movable body are ball receiving portions that receive the game ball flowing down the game area and guide the game ball by changing the flowing direction of the game ball,
The first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are arranged side by side, and the inlet portions (for example, inlet portions 332 and 342) of the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion face each other across a predetermined area. are arranged in such a way that
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A6, wherein the intersection of the first guide route and the second guide route is located in the predetermined area.

As shown in feature A7, when both ball-entering portions are arranged so that the entrance portions face each other, by setting the intersection point of the first guide route and the second guide route to a predetermined area, guidance can be provided. While increasing the total length of the path (width of receiving the game ball), it is possible to suitably suppress the increase in the size of the ball-entering device resulting therefrom.

Feature A8. The first guide path is inclined downward toward the first ball entrance portion,
The second guide path is inclined downward toward the second ball entrance portion,
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the first guide route and the second guide route are formed in the predetermined area.

As shown in this feature, in the configuration in which the game ball is guided by inclining the guide path downward toward each ball entry portion, the moving speed of the game ball depends on the angle of inclination. By applying the technical idea shown in feature A2 and the like to such a configuration, the inclination angle can be increased to some extent while increasing the total length of the guide path (the width of the receiving game ball). Therefore, by forming the guide path in the predetermined area, it is possible to promote miniaturization of the ball-entering device, and to suitably prevent the guide function and the like from failing due to the downsizing.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the inclination angle of the first guide path with respect to the horizontal plane and the inclination angle of the second guide path with respect to the horizontal plane are the same or substantially the same.

As shown in feature A8, if both guide paths are formed in a predetermined area, the size of the ball-entering device can be suitably reduced.

Feature A10. In the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion, the longitudinal widths of the inlet portions of the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are equal to the entrance portions of the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion. is configured to be smaller than the separation distance between
The gaming machine according to feature A8 or feature A9, wherein the first guide path and the second guide path form an obtuse angle on the upper side and the lower side.

When the predetermined area is configured to be horizontally long as shown in feature A10, it is preferable to configure the angle formed by both guide routes to be an obtuse angle. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the enlargement of the ball-entering device due to the increase in the total length of the guide path (the receiving width of the game ball).

Feature A11. The first guide path and the second guide path are configured to move the game ball along the front surface of the game board,
The game machine according to any one of features A2 to A10, wherein the first movable body and the second movable body are slidable in the thickness direction of the game board.

As shown in feature A2 and the like, in the configuration in which the first guide path formed by the first movable body and the second guide path formed by the second movable body intersect, the existence of the guide path on one side is This can be a factor that hinders the movement of the movable body on the other side. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the first movable body is placed at the first position, at least a portion of the first movable body protrudes from the front surface of the game board, thereby forming the first guide path. When the second movable body is arranged at the second position, at least a portion of the second movable body protrudes from the front surface of the game board, thereby forming the second guide path. With such a configuration, the presence of the first guide path may prevent the movement of the second movable body, or the presence of the second guide path may hinder the movement of the first movable body. It can be suitably suppressed. As a result, it is possible to preferably alleviate the decrease in the degree of freedom in setting the operation timings of the first movable body and the second movable body.

When each guide route is formed in a predetermined area as shown in feature A8, by applying the configuration shown in this feature (movable body forward/backward slide), the movement area of the movable body from the predetermined area can be changed. Protrusion can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A12. One of the first movable body and the second movable body is formed with an insertion portion (for example, a recessed portion 363) through which the other of the first movable body and the second movable body is inserted. The game machine according to feature A11, characterized in that the first movable body and the second movable body are configured to intersect with each other.

As shown in feature A10, in the structure in which both movable bodies are slid in the thickness direction of the game board, as shown in this feature, an insertion portion is formed in one movable body, and the other movable body is inserted in this insertion portion. It is preferable to cross both movable bodies by inserting the . In such a configuration, the insertion portion functions as an operation area for the other movable body. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent one movable body from interfering with the movement of the other movable body in realizing the configuration in which the guide paths intersect as described above.

Feature A13. The first movable body and the second movable body are flat plate-shaped, one plate surface of the first movable body forms a rolling surface of the game ball on the first guide path, and the second movable body One plate surface of the movable body forms a rolling surface for the game ball on the second guide path,
Of the thickness dimensions of the first movable body and the second movable body, at least the thickness dimension of the movable body in which the insertion portion is not formed is formed so as to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. The gaming machine according to feature A12, characterized by:

In a configuration in which the movable body has a flat plate shape and the plate surface forms the rolling surface of the game ball on the guide path, the insertion portion creates a blank on the rolling surface (crossing point). If this blank becomes excessively large, the game ball will drop through the blank, and the guiding function may deteriorate. Therefore, as shown in this feature, among the thickness dimensions of the first movable body and the second movable body, at least the thickness of the movable body in which the insertion portion is not formed (the movable body on the side where the insertion portion is inserted) By forming the height dimension to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A14. a first privilege awarding means for awarding a first privilege to a player based on the ball entering the first ball entering section;
a second privilege awarding means for awarding a second privilege to the player based on the ball entering the second ball entering section;
The first privilege is set to be more advantageous to the player than the second privilege,
The game machine according to feature A12 or feature A13, wherein the insertion portion is provided on the two movable bodies.

As shown in feature A14, when there is a difference in the superiority of each ball-entering part, it is difficult for the player to smoothly guide the game ball to the ball-entering part on the side that is advantageous to the player. It is assumed that it will be a factor that lowers motivation, and that it becomes a factor that makes it difficult to differentiate games, such as by lowering the superiority of the first ball entry club. Therefore, if it is configured that the blank occurs in the second guide route toward the second ball-entering portion where the privilege is small rather than the first guide route toward the first ball-entering portion where the privilege is large, such blanks can be created. The occurrence of inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A15. A first rolling surface of the first guide path inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion is formed by the first movable body,
A second rolling surface of the second guide path that slopes downward toward the second ball entry portion is formed by the second movable body,
The inclination angle of the second rolling surface is larger than the inclination angle of the first rolling surface,
The gaming machine according to feature A12 or feature A13, wherein the insertion portion is provided in the second movable body.

When the inclination angle is small, the moving speed of the game ball passing through the guide path tends to be small. For this reason, whether or not it is possible to jump over the insertion portion is likely to be influenced by the size of the insertion portion. In order for the movable body to exhibit its guiding function well, it is technically significant to dispose the insertion portion on the side of the movable body having a large inclination angle, as shown in this feature.

Feature A16. Of the first movable body and the second movable body, a portion of the movable body not formed with the insertion portion, which is inserted into the insertion portion, is a thin portion having a thickness smaller than that of other portions of the movable body. The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A15, characterized in that:

As shown in feature A12, in a configuration in which a blank occurs on the rolling surface, there is a possibility that the behavior of the game ball will be disturbed when passing through this blank. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if at least the portion to be inserted is made thinner, the insertion portion itself can be made smaller, and as a result, the blank can be reduced. As a result, the disturbance of the behavior of the game ball can be favorably reduced.

Feature A17. The gaming machine according to feature A16, wherein the thin portion is formed by recessing a lower surface of the movable body on which the thin portion is formed, of the first movable body and the second movable body. .

If the thin portion is formed by recessing the lower surface as shown in feature A17, the rolling surface of the movable body on which the thin portion is arranged can be made smooth, thereby disturbing the behavior of the game ball. can be preferably avoided.

Feature A18. Provided at a location where the first guide path and the second guide path intersect, and forms the first guide path together with the first movable body when the first movable body is arranged at the first position. and path forming portions (cores 390F, 390G) that form the second guide path together with the second movable body when the second movable body is arranged at the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11.

According to feature A18, gaps occurring at intersections can be reduced. As a result, smooth guidance of the game balls can be realized in realizing the crossing arrangement shown in the characteristic A1 and the like.

Feature A19. The first movable body and the second movable body are flat plate-shaped,
When the first movable body is placed at the first position, the upper plate surface (for example, the upper surface 351F) of the first movable body slopes downward toward the first ball entry portion,
When the second movable body is placed at the second position, the upper plate surface (for example, the upper surface 361F) of the second movable body slopes downward toward the second ball entry portion,
The path forming unit is
A first inclined portion (for example, a first inclined portion 391F) that constitutes a rolling surface of the game ball in the first guide path together with the upper plate surface of the first movable body;
It is characterized by having a second inclined portion (for example, a second inclined portion 392F) that constitutes the rolling surface of the game ball in the second guide path together with the upper plate surface of the second movable body. A gaming machine described in A18.

According to feature A19, each rolling surface (inclined surface) is smoothed by providing the first inclined portion in accordance with the first movable body and providing the second inclined portion in accordance with the second movable body. In addition, restrictions on the direction of the guide passage can be relaxed.

Feature A20. The first movable body has a first accommodation portion (for example, a notch 353F) that accommodates the second inclined portion in a state in which the first movable body is arranged at the first position,
The second movable body has a second accommodation portion (for example, recessed portion 363F) that accommodates the first inclined portion when the second movable body is arranged at the second position. The gaming machine of feature A19.

According to the feature A20, the unnecessary portion (inclined portion) of the path forming portion is accommodated in the accommodating portion of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the behavior of the game ball from being disturbed, such as when the game ball is caught in an unnecessary part.

Feature A21. The route forming unit is movable to a protruding position that protrudes into the game area and a retracted position where the protrusion is suppressed, and when neither the first guide route nor the second guide route is formed , the gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A20, wherein the game machine is configured to wait at the retracted position.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the guide path is not formed, the path forming portion is prevented from projecting into the game area. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of the game ball flowing down the game area colliding with the path forming part. By protecting the path forming part in this way, when the guide path is formed by the path forming part and the movable body, it is possible to prevent smooth guidance of the game balls due to variations in the relative positions of the two. can be suppressed.

Feature A22. When the first movable body moves to the first position, the path forming part follows the first movable body and moves to the projecting position, and the second movable body moves to the second position. The game machine according to feature A21, wherein the game machine is configured to follow the second movable body and move to the projecting position when the second movable body is to be played.

When the path forming part is a retractable type as shown in feature A21, the path forming part moves to the projecting position following the movement of each movable body to the guide position (first position or second position). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress, for example, the deviation of the formation timing of the guide passage.

Feature A23. the moving direction of the first movable body and the second movable body is the same as the moving direction of the path forming part,
The first movable body is provided with a first acting portion (for example, an arm portion 355G) that moves the path forming portion to the projecting position when the first movable body moves to the first position,
The second movable body is provided with a second acting portion (for example, an arm portion 365G) that moves the path forming portion to the projecting position when the second movable body moves to the second position. The gaming machine according to feature A21 or feature A22, characterized by:

As described above, if the path forming part is of the retractable type, various effects such as protection of the path forming part can be expected. However, the need for a separate driving section for driving the path forming section hinders the simplification and miniaturization of the configuration of the ball-entering device. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by unifying the movement direction of each movable body and the path forming part and by adopting a configuration in which the path forming part is pushed to the projecting position by the action part provided in each movable body, No need for additional drives. As a result, excessive complication of the configuration of the ball-entering device can be suppressed, and the size of the ball-entering device can be reduced.

Feature A24. When the state in which the first movable body is arranged at the first position and the state in which the second movable body is arranged at the second position are shifted from one to the other, the state in which the first movable body is arranged at the protruding position The game machine according to any one of features A21 to A23, wherein the path forming part is transferred from one of the first movable body and the second movable body to the other at the projecting position.

In view of the fact that the path forming part moves so as to block the flow path of the game ball, there is a possibility that the game ball is caught when it is arranged at the projecting position. Therefore, when switching from a state in which one of the first movable body and the second movable body forms the guide path to a state in which the other forms the guide route, the return of the route forming portion to the retracted position is avoided. Such a problem can be suitably suppressed by adopting a configuration in which it is held (for example, held at the projecting position).

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "when one of the state in which the first movable body is arranged at the first position and the state in which the second movable body is arranged at the second position is shifted to the other, , the gaming machine according to any one of features A21 to A23, characterized in that the movement of the path forming section arranged at the projecting position to the retracted position is avoided." is.

Feature A25. The first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are arranged side by side, and the inlet portions (entrance portions 332, 342) are arranged to face each other,
Features A21 through A21, characterized in that the first guide path and the second guide path are formed in a region (specific region SE) sandwiched between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features A24.

As shown in this feature, by arranging the ball-entering portions so as to face each other and forming a guide path in the region sandwiched by the ball-entering portions, it is possible to promote the miniaturization of the ball-entering device. In the case where the route forming portion is used for both guide routes in such a configuration, if the route forming portion remains in the region when the guide route is not formed, the following problems will occur. That is, there is a possibility that the game ball passing through the area may bounce off the path forming portion and head toward the ball entering portion. In this regard, if the path forming portion is of the haunting type as shown in feature A21, etc., such movement of the game ball can be favorably avoided. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a ball entering the ball-entering portion.

Feature A26. The first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are arranged such that the inlet portions (entrance portions 332, 342) face each other,
By arranging the first movable body at the first position, the upper surface of the first movable body constitutes the bottom portion of the first guide path and forms an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the first ball entry portion. formed,
By arranging the second movable body at the second position, the upper surface of the second movable body constitutes the bottom portion of the second guide path and forms an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the second ball entry portion. formed,
An inflow part ( For example, the game machine according to any one of features A1 to A25, which is an arrangement area for an out port 86, a lower operation port 92, and the like.

According to feature A26, when the upper surface of the first movable body and the upper surface of the second movable body constitute the bottom of the guide path, the area above the first movable body and the area above the second movable body The area of is a passing area when guiding the game ball to the first/second ball entering section. On the other hand, in the area below both movable bodies, passage of the game ball is basically avoided when the game ball is guided.

Therefore, by arranging the inflow part in this region, the first/second ball entrance part and the inflow part can preferably coexist. In addition, the movement of the movable body determines whether or not the ball can enter the inflow section, which contributes to the diversification of games.

It should be noted that the "inflow part" shown in this feature can be replaced with the "third ball entry part".

Feature A27. The predetermined range in which the first movable body moves includes a standby position between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion in which projection into the passage area of the game ball is suppressed,
The predetermined range in which the second movable body moves includes a standby position where projection into the passage area is suppressed, and
a game state transition means for shifting a game state from a first game state to a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied;
means for moving at least one of the first movable body and the second movable body to the first position and the second position when the game state becomes the second game state;
The game machine according to feature A26, further comprising means for causing the first movable body and the second movable body to wait at the standby position when the first game state is established.

By using both the ball-entering section and the inflow section, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball around the ball-entering device. However, with such a configuration, if the ball entering the inflow portion cannot be substantially expected, the combined use of the ball entering portion and the inflow portion becomes meaningless. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, both the first movable body and the second movable body remain in the standby position in the first game state, and movement of the game ball is restricted by the first movable body and the second movable body. be released. Thus, at least in the first game state, by allowing game balls passing between the two ball entering portions to flow into the inflow portion, it is possible to preferably avoid lowering the meaning of the existence of the inflow portion.

Feature A28. Any one of characteristics A1 to A27, characterized in that means for arranging the second movable body at the second position under the condition that the first movable body is arranged at the first position is provided. or the game machine according to one.

According to feature A28, after the first guide path is formed and the game ball is guided to the first ball entry portion, the first guide path is cut off by placing the second movable body at the second position. . This makes it impossible to enter the ball into the first ball-entering portion. A second guide path is also formed by arranging the second movable body to the second position. In other words, the second movable body has both the function of determining whether or not the ball can enter the first ball-entering portion and the function of forming a guide path to the second ball-entering portion. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player by realizing an unprecedented novel guidance mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress the delay in the progress of the game caused by the diversification of movements. .

Feature A29. means for arranging the second movable body at the second position under the condition that the first movable body is arranged at the first position;
and means for arranging the first movable body at the first position under the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature A29, after the first guide path is formed and the game ball is guided to the first ball entry portion, the second guide path is cut off by arranging the second movable body at the second position. . This makes it impossible to enter the ball into the first ball-entering portion. A second guide path is also formed by arranging the second movable body to the second position. In other words, the second movable body has both the function of determining whether or not the ball can enter the first ball-entering portion and the function of forming a guide path to the second ball-entering portion. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player by realizing an unprecedented novel guidance mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress the delay in the progress of the game caused by the diversification of movements. .

Feature A30. a drive unit (driving motor 321) that drives the first movable body and the second movable body;
A drive control unit (MPU of the main controller 162) that controls the drive unit,
The first movable body is moved to the first position by setting the drive section to the first drive state by the drive control section, and the second movable body is set to the second drive state by the drive section. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A29, characterized in that it is configured to move to the second position.

If the movable body to be driven is switched according to the driving state of the driving section, there is no need to provide a separate driving section for each movable body, which can favorably contribute to miniaturization of the ball entering device.

Feature A31. The drive unit is a motor,
The drive control unit is configured to rotate the driving unit forward in the first driving state and to rotate the driving unit in the reverse direction in the second driving state. The game machine described.

In order to embody the technical idea shown in feature A30, a motor may be adopted as the driving unit as shown in this feature, and the rotation direction of the motor may be switched between normal and reverse directions.

Feature A32. The predetermined range in which the first movable body and the second movable body move includes a standby position where projection to the front side of the game board is suppressed,
The first movable body and the second movable body constitute a part of the front surface of the game board by being arranged at the standby position,
When moving the first movable body between the standby position and the first position, transmission of power to the second movable body is avoided, and the second movable body moves from the standby position to the first position. The gaming machine according to feature A30 or feature A31, characterized in that, when moving between the two positions, transmission of power to the first movable body is avoided.

When a part of the front surface of the game board is configured (complemented) by the first movable body (eg end face) and the second movable body (eg end face) arranged at the standby position, pass in front of those movable bodies It is possible to suppress the catching of the game ball that is played and suppress the disturbance of the behavior of the game ball. In the case of sharing the drive unit with such a configuration, if one movable body is moved and the other movable body moves, for example, the complementary function is performed by retreating from the standby position. is concerned that it will not work well. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when one movable body is moved, a configuration is adopted in which power transmission to the other movable body is avoided, thereby suitably suppressing the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

<Characteristic group B>
The following characteristic group B is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a game board on which a game area is formed and game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. By making the ball-entering means variable and switching the ball-entering means between a receiving state and a non-receiving state according to the game situation, diversification of games is achieved (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, it was made in view of the background and problems that "the above-mentioned type of gaming machine still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to realize the diversification of games by means of variable ball entry means." It is a thing.

Feature B1. A gaming machine provided with a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and provided with ball entry means (for example, a variable winning unit 83) that allows game balls to enter the game area. There is
The ball entry means is
A first ball entrance portion (for example, the first a ball-entering portion 331) and a second ball-entering portion (for example, a second ball-entering portion 341);
A first guide state that guides the game ball that has reached the predetermined area to the first ball entering portion, a second guide state that guides the second ball entering portion, the first ball entering portion and the second entering portion A gaming machine characterized by having guide means (for example, movable bodies 350 and 360) capable of switching to a non-guiding state in which a game ball is not guided to any of the ball portions.

When the size of the ball entering portion is large compared to when the size is small, it is easier to give the player an impression that the ball is easy to enter. Although it is possible to diversify the game by using a plurality of ball-entering parts, if a large-sized ball-entering part is arranged as each ball-entering part for the above reason, the ball-entering part will occupy the game area. Inconveniences, such as an increased area, arise. Therefore, in this feature, a predetermined area sandwiched between the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section is used as an introduction area for introducing game balls to each ball entering section (that is, the introduction area is shared). By adopting a configuration in which the game ball that has reached the predetermined area is guided to each ball entry part by the guide means, the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part are miniaturized while the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part themselves are miniaturized. It is possible to make the gaps between the spheres (points of inflow into the predetermined area (inflow ports OE)) look as if they were entrances to the entrance spheres. This makes it possible to make the ball-entering portion, which is actually small, appear larger than it actually is. Enlarging the appearance of the entrance by using two ball-entering sections in this way gives the player the impression that it is easy to enter the ball, which is advantageous in increasing the player's willingness to play.

Feature B2. A first privilege (for example, 15 prize balls) is given to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entering part, and the game ball enters the second ball entering part. The gaming machine according to feature B1, further comprising a privilege granting means (payout device 224) for awarding a second privilege (for example, 10 prize balls) to the player based on the above.

As shown in this feature, it is preferable to use a plurality of ball-entering sections with different privileges to be given in order to diversify the game. However, by arranging a plurality of types of ball-entering parts in the game area, there is a concern that the arrangement area for other game parts will be squeezed, and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball-entering parts will be strengthened. In this regard, by applying the technical idea shown in feature B1, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences.

Feature B3. The first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion have a separation distance between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion in a front view of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that the opening width of the entrance portions (entrance portions 332, 342) is larger than that of the entrance portions.

As shown in feature B1, in order to make the gap between the ball entry parts (the inflow point to the predetermined area (inflow port OE)) look like the entrance part, the gap is the opening of the entrance part of each ball entry part. It may be configured to be larger than the width. As a result, it is possible to increase the apparent size of the entrance while promoting the size reduction of the actual ball-entering portion, so that the effect shown in feature B1 can be favorably exhibited.

In addition, regarding the "separation distance" between the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion, the length of the boundary portion that is upstream in the inflow direction in which the game ball flows into the predetermined area, for example, the game ball In the inflow configuration, the size of the gap between the upper portion of the first ball entry portion and the upper portion of the second ball entry portion is shown.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the guide means is disposed in the predetermined area or in a position that overlaps the predetermined area in the front-rear direction.

By suppressing the exposure of the guide means to the outside of the predetermined area, it is possible to preferably exhibit the visual effect of giving the impression that the gap between the two ball-entering portions is the entrance portion, as shown in feature B1.

Feature B5. The guide means is held so as to be slidable in the thickness direction of the game board, and in the first guide state, the first guide protrudes into the predetermined area and slopes downward toward the first ball-entering portion. A route (first guide route GP1) is formed, and in the second guidance state, a second guide route (second guide route GP2) is formed that protrudes into the predetermined area and slopes down toward the second ball entry portion side. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein in the non-guiding state, the game machine is arranged in a retracted position where projection into the predetermined area is avoided.

As shown in this feature, if the guide means is slid in the thickness direction of the game board to form the guide path, it is possible to suitably suppress the movement area of the guide means from expanding outside the predetermined area. As a result, as shown in feature B1, the visual effect of impressing that the gap between the two ball-entering portions is the entrance portion can be favorably exhibited.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the first guide path and the second guide path extend over the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section.

It is assumed that the game ball that has reached the predetermined area in the first and second guiding states will pass through the predetermined area as it is, which hinders the impression that the gap between the ball entering parts is an entrance. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if each guide path is formed so as to straddle both ball entry parts to avoid passing the game ball that has reached the gap, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. .

Feature B7. The first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction,
The first guide path slopes downward from the second ball entry portion side to the first ball entry portion side, and the second guide path is inclined from the first ball entry portion side to the second ball entry portion side. It is configured to be a downward slope,
The height difference between the upstream end and the downstream end of the first guide path is formed to be the same or substantially the same as the vertical width of the entrance portion of the first ball entrance portion,
The height difference between the upstream end and the downstream end of the second guide path is formed to be the same or substantially the same as the vertical width of the entrance portion of the second ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to Characterizing Feature B6.

In a structure in which a game ball is guided to a ball-entering portion by an inclination of a guide path, if the inclination is gentle, the period required for guidance becomes longer, and if the inclination is increased, the vertical width increases. Therefore, by aligning the height difference with the vertical width of the ball entry part while matching the horizontal width with the separation distance of both ball entry parts, the guide route is maximized and guided so that it fits in a predetermined area sandwiched by both ball entry parts. can be realized.

Feature B8. The first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction,
In the first guiding state, the first guide path is formed in the predetermined region between a portion forming an inlet (inflow port OE) to the predetermined region and an inlet portion of the second ball entrance portion. and the second guide path is formed between the inflow port and the inlet portion of the first ball entrance portion in the second guiding state. The game machine described.

When the two ball-entering sections are arranged side by side and the entrance portions are opposed to each other, there is a high possibility that a ball will enter the ball-entering section that is not the guide destination. Therefore, as shown in this feature, each guide path is formed so as to block the inflow port (inflow portion) of the predetermined area and the entrance portion of the ball entrance portion that is not the guide destination. It is possible to suitably avoid entering the ball into the part.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "when the first guide path is formed, the movement of the game ball to the entrance portion of the second ball entrance portion is regulated by the first guide path, and the Any of features B1 to B7 characterized in that, when two guide paths are formed, movement of the game ball to the entrance portion of the first ball entry section is restricted by the second guide path. The game machine described in 1." is also possible.

Feature B9. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the ball entry means has a cover portion that covers the predetermined area from the front of the game machine.

As shown in feature B1, when the gap between both ball-entering parts (the point of inflow into the predetermined area) is made to look like an entrance part, the above-mentioned inflow parts such as the predetermined area and the entrance part of each ball-entering part It is not preferable that other parts stand out. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if these components are covered with a cover portion, visibility can be reduced, and the effect shown in feature B1 can be exhibited more preferably.

Feature B10. Any one of features B1 to B9, wherein a region in which the first guide route is formed and a region in which the second guide route is formed partially overlap in the predetermined region. The game machine described.

In the configuration in which the first guide route and the second guide route are formed in a predetermined area, by allowing a part of the two guide routes to overlap, the gap between the ball entering portions (the point of flow into the predetermined area) can be reduced. The passed game ball can be used as a guide target, and both guide routes can be favorably coexisted within a limited range.

Feature B11. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A first ball-entering portion (first ball-entering portion 331) and a second ball-entering portion (second ball-entering portion 341) provided in the game area and into which a game ball enters;
Guide means (for example, movable bodies 350, 360, 450R) that can be switched between a first guide state for guiding a game ball to the first ball entering portion and a second guide state for guiding a game ball to the second ball entering portion; with
The first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are arranged such that the entrance portions (entrance portions 332, 342) face each other with a predetermined area (specific area SE) interposed therebetween. The ball is configured to enter the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion via the predetermined area,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined area is an operation area in which the guiding means operates when the guiding means is switched between the first guiding state and the second guiding state.

It is preferable to use a plurality of variable ball-entering units (ball-entering devices) in combination in order to diversify the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the area occupied by the ball-entering device will increase, and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball-entering device will become stronger. This is not preferable in terms of coexistence with other game components in the game area.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball flowing down the game area flows into the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section through the predetermined area. It is difficult or impossible to arrange other game parts in this predetermined area. Therefore, by using a predetermined area sandwiched between the two ball-entering parts as an operating area of the guide means, a dead space in which other game parts cannot be arranged around the ball-entering device in order to secure the operating area is eliminated. You can prevent it from becoming As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the ball-entering device can be favorably improved.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a gaming machine provided with a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, provided in the game area, and a game ball enters the game machine. A first ball-entering section (first ball-entering section 331), a second ball-entering section (second ball-entering section 341), and a first ball-entering section (first A first guide state in which a ball entering portion 331) and a second ball entering portion (second ball entering portion 341) form a first guide path (first guide path GP1) that guides a game ball to the first ball entering portion and a guide means (for example, movable bodies 350, 360, 450R) that can be switched to a second guide state that forms a second guide path (second guide path GP2) that guides the game ball to the second ball entering portion, A region sandwiched by the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion is an operating region of the guide means when switching between the first guiding state and the second guiding state. Game machine." is also possible.

Feature B12. In the first guiding state, the guiding means guides the first guiding path that slopes down from a position close to the second ball-entering portion to a position close to the first ball-entering portion in the predetermined area. By entering the second guide state, a second guide path is formed that slopes down from a position close to the first ball entry portion to a position close to the second ball entry portion in the predetermined area. The gaming machine according to feature B11, characterized in that it is configured as follows.

In each guidance state, a guidance route is formed so as to traverse a predetermined area. Since the guide path extends from the ball-entering section that is the guide destination to the vicinity of the ball-entering section that is not the guide destination, most of the game balls that have reached the predetermined area are guided to the ball-entering section. In this way, if it is attempted to increase the receiving width of the game ball, it is assumed that the operating area of the guide means will increase. Therefore, by applying the technical idea shown in feature B11 to such a configuration and making the region (predetermined region) between the ball-entering portions the operation region of the guiding means, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature B13. The guide means has a plurality of rotatably provided movable bodies, and the movable bodies are arranged at predetermined passage forming positions to form the first guide path and the second guide path. The gaming machine according to feature B12, characterized in that

When the first guide path and the second guide path are formed using a rotating movable body, the size of the movable body tends to increase, and the operation area tends to be bulky. It becomes difficult to fit the operating area. Therefore, if the guide means is composed of a plurality of movable bodies and each guide path is formed by a combination of these movable bodies, useless expansion of the operation area can be suppressed, and the operation area of the guide means outside the predetermined area can be suppressed. spread can be suppressed. Therefore, the space saving of the ball-entering device can be favorably promoted.

Feature B14. The guide means has a first rotation center and a second rotation center, forms the first guide path by rotating about the first rotation center, and rotates around the first rotation center. The gaming machine according to feature B12 or feature B13, wherein the second guide path is formed by rotating around a moving center.

When the first guide path and the second guide path are formed using a rotating movable body, the size of the movable body tends to increase, and the operation area tends to be bulky. It becomes difficult to fit the operating area. Therefore, if the center of rotation for forming the first guide path and the center of rotation for forming the second guide path are configured to be different, the useless expansion of the operation area of the guide means can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress the expansion of the operation area of the guide means outside the predetermined area. Therefore, the space saving of the ball-entering device can be favorably promoted.

Feature B15. The guide means has a first movable body (first movable body 350) and a second movable body (second movable body 360) which are slidably provided in the thickness direction of the game board. Arranging the movable body at a protruding position where it protrudes into the predetermined region results in the first guide state, and placing the second movable body at the protruding position where it protrudes into the predetermined region causes the second guide state. The gaming machine according to feature B12, characterized in that it is configured to:

According to feature B15, the first movable body and the second movable body are slidable in the thickness direction of the game board, and the movable bodies protrude into a predetermined area to form a guide path. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the expansion of the motion area of the movable body to the part outside the predetermined area in the game area. Therefore, the space saving of the ball-entering device can be favorably promoted.

It should be noted that each technical idea shown in the feature group A may be applied to features B1 to B15.

<Characteristic group C>
The following characteristic group C is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed and a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. By making the ball-entering means variable and switching the ball-entering means between a receiving state and a non-receiving state according to the game situation, diversification of games is achieved (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology has been developed in view of the background and problems that ``the above-described type of gaming machine still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to realize diversification of games.''

Feature C1. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A first ball-entering portion (first ball-entering portion 331) and a second ball-entering portion (second ball-entering portion 341) provided in the game area and into which a game ball enters;
A first guide state that guides a game ball to the first ball entering portion, a second guide state that guides the game ball to the second ball entering portion, and the first Guide portions (for example, guide portions 400L, 410L, guide portions 400M, 410M, movable bodies 430N, 440N, movable bodies 430N, 440N, movable body 470 V etc.),
a first displacement region in which the guide portion is displaced in the game region when the guide portion is switched from the non-guide state to the first guide state; A gaming machine characterized in that a second displacement area in which the guide portion is displaced in the game area when switching is partially overlapped with the second displacement area.

It is preferable to use a plurality of variable ball-entering units (ball-entering devices) in combination in order to diversify the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the area occupied by the ball-entering device will increase, and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball-entering device will become stronger. This is not preferable in terms of coexistence with other game components in the game area.

Here, in the configuration in which the guide portion is displaced to achieve the first guide state/second guide state, the displacement region of the guide portion in each guide state is a dead zone where other game parts cannot or are difficult to arrange. become a space. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the first displacement region in the first guidance state and the second displacement region in the second guidance state partially overlap each other, a variable type ball entry can be achieved. Even when a plurality of apparatuses are used together, it is possible to suitably suppress the wasteful increase of dead space.

Feature C2. The first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are arranged such that the inlet portions (entrance portions 332, 342) face each other,
The guide portion is disposed in a predetermined region (specific region SE) between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion. A game ball is guided to the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion through the area,
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the overlapping portion of the first displacement area and the second displacement area is located in the predetermined area.

In a configuration in which game balls entering the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion both pass through a predetermined area, the predetermined area becomes a dead space in which it is difficult to arrange other game parts. Therefore, by using this area as a displacement area of the guide portion, it is possible to promote miniaturization of the ball-entering device. In particular, if the overlapping portions of the respective displacement regions are arranged in the predetermined region, the first displacement region when the predetermined region is in the first guidance state, the second displacement region when the predetermined region is in the second guidance state, and both ball entering portions. It functions as an introduction region for the ball entry portion, and it is possible to more preferably suppress the expansion of the occupied region due to the combined use of a plurality of ball entry portions.

Feature C3. The guide portion forms a first guide path (first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion by being in the first guide state, and guides the game ball flowing down the game area. receiving and changing the flowing direction so as to face the first ball entrance portion,
The game according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein an overlapping portion of the first displacement area and the second displacement area is located in an area where the first guide path is formed in the game area. machine.

It becomes difficult or impossible to dispose other game parts on the guide path of the game ball. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the overlapping portion is positioned in this area, that is, a configuration in which both the first displacement area and the second displacement area use the formation area of the first guide path, the displacement area can be preferably secured. can be done. By constructing such a coexistence relationship, even when the total length of the first guide path is lengthened and the receiving width of the game ball is widened, it is possible to appropriately suppress the enlargement of the ball-entering device due to the lengthening of the length of the first guide path. can.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "the guide section guides the game ball to the first ball entering section by entering the first guide state, thereby setting the first guide route (first guide route GP1) to the predetermined area. The game according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein at least a part of the area where the first guide path is formed in the game area overlaps with the second area Machine." is also possible.

Feature C4. The guide portion forms a first guide route (first guide route GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion by entering the first guide state, and enters the second guide state. A second guide path (second guide path GP2) that guides the game ball to the second ball entering portion is formed, and is configured to receive the game ball flowing down the game area and change the flowing direction. and
At least part of the area where the first guide path is formed in the game area is the second displacement area in which the guide means is displaced when the second guide path is formed,
At least part of an area where the second guide path is formed in the game area is the first displacement area in which the guide means is displaced when the first guide path is formed. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

It becomes difficult or impossible to dispose other game parts on the guide path of the game ball. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the overlapping portion is located in this area, that is, a configuration in which both the first displacement area and the second displacement area use the formation area of the first guide path and the formation area of the second guide path, A displacement region can be suitably secured. If such a coexistence relationship is established, even if the total length of the first guide route and the second guide route is increased to increase the receiving width of the game ball, the ball-entering device becomes enlarged due to this. can be suitably suppressed.

Feature C5. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A first ball-entering portion (first ball-entering portion 331) and a second ball-entering portion (second ball-entering portion 341) provided in the game area and into which a game ball enters;
A first guide portion (for example, a first guide portion 400L) that can be displaced to a first guide position that guides the game ball to the first ball entering portion in the game area and a first non-guide position that does not perform the guide;
A second guide portion (for example, a second guide portion 410L) that can be displaced to a second guide position that guides the game ball to the second ball entry portion in the game area and a second non-guide position that does not perform the guide. ,
the first guide portion and the second guide portion each include a first motion area through which the first guide portion passes when the first guide portion is displaced from the first non-guiding position to the first guiding position; A second motion area through which the second guide portion passes when the second guide portion is displaced from the second non-guide position to the second guide position is configured to partially overlap. game machine.

It is preferable to use a plurality of variable ball-entering devices together in order to diversify the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the area occupied by the ball-entering device will increase, and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball-entering device will become stronger. This is not preferable in terms of coexistence with other game components in the game area.

Here, in a configuration in which the guide portion is displaced between the guide position and the non-guide position, the motion area of the guide portion becomes a dead space where it is impossible or difficult to arrange other game components. It is not preferable to increase such dead space in the game area. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the guide portions are arranged so as to partially overlap the first motion region of the first guide portion and the second motion region of the second guide portion, the variable Even when a plurality of ball-entering devices of the type are used in combination, it is possible to suitably suppress the dead space from increasing wastefully.

Feature C6. The first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are arranged such that the inlet portions (entrance portions 332, 342) face each other,
The feature C5, wherein the first guide portion and the second guide portion are arranged in a predetermined region (specific region SE) between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion The game machine described.

In a configuration in which both ball entry portions are arranged so that the entrance portions face each other, by disposing each guide portion between the ball entry portions, the first operation region and the second operation region are formed. , the amount of overlap can be increased. Thereby, the effect shown in the feature C5 can be exhibited more preferably.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the overlapping portion of the first motion area and the second motion area is positioned between the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section.

As shown in feature C6, in the structure in which the entrance portions of both ball-entering portions face each other, a game ball enters each ball-entering portion through between the ball-entering portions. In this way, it becomes difficult or impossible to arrange other game parts in the area through which the game ball passes. Therefore, as a configuration in which the overlapping portion is located in this region, that is, a configuration in which the first action region and the second action region overlap between the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion, the regions between the above are each By adopting a configuration that serves as both the operation area of the guide portion and the introduction area of the game ball, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in the size of the ball-entering device.

Feature C8. The first guide portion forms a first guide passage (first guide path GP1) that guides the game ball to the first ball entering portion by being arranged at the first guide position, and flows down the game area. It is configured to change the flowing direction of the game ball to the first ball entry part side by receiving the game ball to be played.
The second guide portion forms a second guide passage (second guide route GP2) that guides the game ball to the second ball entry portion by being arranged at the second guide position, and flows down the game area. It is configured to change the flowing direction of the game ball to the second ball entry part side by receiving the game ball to be played.
The first operation area is configured to partially overlap with an area where the second guide passage is formed in the predetermined area,
The gaming machine according to feature C6 or feature C7, wherein the second operation area partially overlaps an area where the first guide path is formed in the predetermined area.

It becomes difficult or impossible to arrange other game parts in the area where the guide passage is formed. Therefore, if this area is used as the operation area of the other guide part, even if the total length of the first guide path and the second guide path is increased to increase the receiving width of the game ball, the It is possible to suitably suppress the enlargement of the ball-entering device caused by this.

Feature C9. When switching to one of a first guiding state in which the first guiding portion is arranged at the first guiding position and a second guiding state in which the second guiding portion is arranged at the second guiding position, the other The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C8, characterized in that it is configured such that switching to is disabled.

By avoiding simultaneous occurrence of each guidance state as shown in this feature, overlap of each displacement area can be preferably realized.

Feature C10. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A first ball-entering portion (first ball-entering portion 331) and a second ball-entering portion (second ball-entering portion 341) provided in the game area and into which a game ball enters;
A first guide portion (for example, a first guide portion 400L) that can be displaced to a first guide position that guides the game ball to the first ball entering portion in the game area and a first non-guide position that does not perform the guide;
A second guide portion (for example, a second guide portion 410L) that can be displaced to a second guide position that guides the game ball to the second ball entry portion in the game area and a second non-guide position that does not perform the guide. ,
The first guide portion forms a first guide passage (first guide path GP1) that guides the game ball to the first ball entering portion by being arranged at the first guide position, and flows down the game area. It is configured to change the flowing direction of the game ball to the first ball entry part side by receiving the game ball to be played.
The second guide portion forms a second guide passage (second guide route GP2) that guides the game ball to the second ball entry portion by being arranged at the second guide position, and flows down the game area. It is configured to change the flowing direction of the game ball to the second ball entry part side by receiving the game ball to be played.
A first operation region through which the first guide portion passes when the first guide portion is displaced from the first non-guiding position to the first guiding position is a region in which the second guide passage is formed and a portion thereof. is a duplicate configuration,
A second operation region through which the second guide portion passes when displacing the second guide portion from the second non-guiding position to the second guiding position is partly the region in which the first guide passage is formed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C7, characterized in that it has an overlapping configuration.

It becomes difficult or impossible to arrange other game parts in the area where the guide passage is formed. Therefore, if this area is used as the operation area of the other guide part, even if the total length of the first guide path and the second guide path is increased to increase the receiving width of the game ball, the It is possible to suitably suppress the enlargement of the ball-entering device caused by this.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in the features A to B may be applied to the features C1 to C10.

<Characteristic group D>
The characteristic group D below is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed and a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. By making the ball-entering means variable and switching the ball-entering means between a receiving state and a non-receiving state according to the game situation, diversification of games is achieved (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology has been developed in view of the background and problems that ``the above-described type of gaming machine still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.''

Feature D1. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A ball entry section (for example, a ball entry section 331) provided in the game area and into which a game ball enters;
Guide means (e.g., guide portions 400L, 410L, movable bodies 430N, 440N) capable of switching between a guide state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the ball entering portion and a non-guide state in which the game ball is not guided,
The guide means includes a first movable portion (e.g. upper left movable plate 401L, upper right movable plate 411L, first movable body 430N) and a second movable portion (e.g. lower right movable plate 402L, lower left movable plate 412L, second movable body 440N),
In the guiding state, a series of guiding paths (guide paths GP1, GP2) for guiding the game ball to the ball-entering portion are provided by arranging the first movable portion and the second movable portion at the passage forming positions. is formed so as to straddle the first movable portion and the second movable portion.

In a game machine of a type equipped with a variable ball-entering device that changes the ball-entering probability to a ball-entering portion by guiding means, the monotony of the game is improved by enhancing the contrast between the guided state and the non-guided state. can be suppressed. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the ball-entering device, it is preferable that the target range in the guided state is wide. However, simply enlarging the size of the guiding means tends to cause various problems such as a decrease in responsiveness and a decrease in durability (stability of operation) when performing state switching. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which a series of guide passages are formed by using both the first movable portion and the second movable portion and arranging these movable portions at the passage forming positions, individual It is possible to avoid increasing the size of the movable part. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player and suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by it.

Feature D2. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A ball entry section (for example, ball entry sections 331 and 341) provided in the game area and into which a game ball enters;
Guidance means (for example, guide section 400L) that can be switched between a guided state for guiding a game ball flowing down a predetermined flow path (for example, specific area SE, passing section 420L) to the ball entry section and a non-guided state for not guiding the game ball (for example, guide section 400L) , 410L, movable bodies 430N, 440N),
The guide means includes a first movable portion (e.g., upper left movable plate 401L, upper right movable plate 411L, first movable body 430N) arranged so as to sandwich the predetermined flow path and movable between a standby position and a passage forming position. and a second movable portion (eg, lower right movable plate 402L, lower left movable plate 412L, second movable body 440N),
When the first movable portion and the second movable portion are arranged at the passage forming position, the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path is received and the game ball flows in the flowing direction toward the ball entering portion. and
In the guiding state, by arranging the first movable portion and the second movable portion at the passage forming positions, the game ball is guided to the ball entering portion so as to traverse the predetermined flow-down path. A gaming machine characterized in that guide passages (guide paths GP1, GP2) are formed so as to straddle the first movable portion and the second movable portion.

In a game machine of a type equipped with a variable ball-entering device that changes the ball-entering probability to a ball-entering portion by guiding means, the monotony of the game is improved by enhancing the contrast between the guided state and the non-guided state. can be suppressed. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the ball-entering device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) in the guided state is wide. However, simply enlarging the size of the guide means to increase the receiving width tends to cause various problems such as a decrease in responsiveness and a decrease in durability (stability of operation) at the time of state switching. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the first movable part and the second movable part are used together and a series of guide passages are formed by arranging these movable parts at the passage forming position, the target range It is possible to avoid increasing the size of individual movable parts while widening the (gaming ball receiving width). As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player and suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by it.

Feature D3. Characteristic D1 or The gaming machine according to feature D2.

As shown in this feature, if the movement of each movable part is synchronized, it can contribute to the improvement of responsiveness when a series of guide passages are formed by a plurality of movable parts.

Feature D4. The first movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form a downstream portion of the guide passage, and the second movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form an upstream portion of the guide passage. It is configured to
Characteristic D1 or D2, characterized in that when the guide passage is formed, the first movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position after the second movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position. The game machine described.

Whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering portion depends on the first movable portion forming the downstream portion. That is, even if the game ball moves along the second movable portion arranged at the passage forming position, if the first movable portion is not arranged at the passage forming position, the guidance to the entering ball portion is performed well. do not have. In such a configuration, the movement of the first movable portion to the passage forming position is delayed from the arrangement of the second movable portion to the passage forming position. can be improved to

In addition, when the second movable portion forms the upstream portion of the guide passage, a certain amount of time lag occurs until the game ball that has reached the second movable portion reaches the first movable portion. Therefore, by delaying the movement of the first movable portion to the passage forming position, it is possible to generate a branch as to whether or not the game ball that has passed through the second movable portion moves to the first movable portion.

Feature D5. The guide passage is an inclined passage that descends to the entrance portion (e.g., entrance portions 332, 342) of the ball entry portion,
The first movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form a downstream portion of the guide passage, and the second movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form an upstream portion of the guide passage. It is configured to
The game according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the downstream end of the second movable portion is shifted upward from the upstream extension of the first movable portion. machine.

As shown in feature D1 and the like, when a series of passages are formed by combining a plurality of movable portions, steps are generated in the passage due to displacement of the relative positions of the movable portions. It is assumed that the game ball being caught on this step becomes a factor that hinders the smooth flow of the game ball. As shown in this feature, if the downstream end of the second movable portion forming the upstream portion is configured to be shifted upward from the extension of the first movable portion, the game from the second movable portion to the first movable portion can be performed. It is possible to suitably suppress catching when the ball moves.

Feature D6. The game machine according to feature D5, wherein a gap is formed between the upstream end of the first movable portion and the downstream end of the second movable portion.

In order to expand the guide passage (width of receiving game balls), the size of the first movable portion and the second movable portion should be increased. However, when such countermeasures are taken, various inconveniences such as slow movement of the movable portion occur. Therefore, as shown in feature D5, if a step is provided at the boundary between the two movable bodies and a gap is formed at the boundary, the guide passage (the receiving width of the game ball) can be expanded while each movable body An increase in size can be suitably avoided.

In order to ensure the function as a guide passage, it is preferable that the gap is smaller than the diameter of the game ball so that the game ball cannot pass through.

Feature D7. In the guide passage, the passage length of the portion formed by the first movable portion and the passage length of the portion formed by the second movable portion are equally divided. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6.

When a series of guide passages are formed by a plurality of movable parts, the responsiveness depends on the slower moving part. Here, according to the configuration in which the passage lengths of the movable portions are made uniform as shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience caused by the difference in size can be suitably suppressed.

Feature D8. The guide passage is an inclined passage that descends to the entrance portion (e.g., entrance portions 332, 342) of the ball entry portion,
The first movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form a downstream portion of the guide passage, and the second movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form an upstream portion of the guide passage. It is configured to
The first movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position and the standby position by rotating with the downstream end of the downstream portion as a base end, and the second movable portion is arranged at the upstream side. According to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that it is configured to be disposed at the passage forming position and the standby position by rotating with the upstream end of the portion as a base end. game machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, if the movable portions rotate toward each other to form the guide passage, the impact when the guide passage is formed can be increased. As a result, not only the ball entering the ball entering portion but also the visual change (movement of the movable portion) immediately before the ball entering can be produced in a suitable manner.

In particular, when the movable part is arranged in the game area, the presence of the movable part can be a factor limiting the flow path. Here, if the movable bodies are configured to rotate toward each other to form a guide path, the area between the movable parts can be used as a flow path for the game ball under the condition that the guide path is not formed. It can be used conveniently.

Feature D9. The guide means is configured to guide a game ball flowing down a predetermined flow path in the game area (for example, the passage portion 420L in the specific area SE) to the ball entry portion,
The first movable part and the second movable part constitute a passage wall surface of the predetermined flow-down path in a state where the first movable part and the second movable part are arranged at the standby position. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8.

When the movable parts are arranged at the standby position, the movable parts form the passage wall surface of the predetermined flow-down path. With such a configuration in which the passage wall surface is configured by the movable portion, coexistence with other game components can be suitably realized even when a plurality of movable portions are provided side by side in the game area.

Feature D10. The first movable portion and the second movable portion constitute a passage wall surface of a ball passage through which a game ball passes while facing each other when the first movable portion and the second movable portion are arranged at the standby position. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, characterized in that

When the movable parts are arranged at the standby position, the passage wall surface of the ball passage is formed by the movable parts facing each other. With such a configuration in which the passage wall surface is configured by the movable portion, coexistence with other game components can be suitably realized even when a plurality of movable portions are provided side by side in the game area.

Feature D11. The guide passage is an inclined passage that descends to the entrance portion (e.g., entrance portions 332, 342) of the ball entry portion,
The first movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form a downstream portion of the guide passage, and the second movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form an upstream portion of the guide passage. It is configured to
The first movable portion according to any one of features D1 to D10, wherein the first movable portion functions as a restricting portion that restricts entry of a ball into the ball entering portion when arranged at the standby position. game machine.

As shown in this feature, if one of the two movable parts that forms the downstream part of the guide passage is used as a regulating part (shutter), the ball entering part can In order to avoid entering the ball, it is possible to suppress the structure from becoming excessively complicated.

Feature D12. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A first ball-entering section (for example, a ball-entering section 331) and a second ball-entering section (for example, a ball-entering section 341) which are provided in the game area and into which game balls enter;
Guiding means (e.g. movable bodies 430N, 440N) capable of switching between a guiding state in which a game ball flowing down a predetermined flow path (e.g., specific area SE) in the game area is guided to the ball-entering portion and a non-guiding state in which the ball is not guided; with
The guiding means are
A first regulating position that covers the entrance portion (entrance portion 332) of the first ball-entering portion and regulates the entry of the ball into the first ball-entering portion, and a first inclination downwardly inclined toward the first ball-entering portion. a first movable portion (for example, a first movable body 430N) movable between a position and a second inclined position that slopes down toward the second ball entering portion;
A second regulating position that covers the entrance portion (entrance portion 342) of the second ball-entering portion and regulates the entry of the ball into the second ball-entering portion, and a third inclination downwardly inclined toward the first ball-entering portion. and a second movable part (for example, a second movable body 440N) that can move to a fourth inclined position downwardly inclined toward the second ball entering part,
By arranging the first movable portion at the first tilted position and the second movable portion at the third tilted position, the liquid traverses the predetermined flow-down path to the first ball entrance portion. A series of first guide paths (first guide paths GP1) for guiding game balls are formed across the first movable part and the second movable part,
By arranging the second movable portion at the second tilted position and the second movable portion at the fourth tilted position, the liquid traverses the predetermined flow-down path to the second ball-entering portion. A gaming machine characterized in that a series of second guide paths (second guide paths GP2) for guiding game balls are formed so as to straddle the first movable part and the second movable part.

In a game machine of a type equipped with a variable ball-entering device that changes the ball-entering probability to a ball-entering portion by guiding means, the monotony of the game is improved by enhancing the contrast between the guided state and the non-guided state. can be suppressed. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the ball-entering device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) in the guided state is wide. However, simply enlarging the size of the guide means to increase the receiving width tends to cause various problems such as a decrease in responsiveness and a decrease in durability (stability of operation) at the time of state switching. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the first movable part and the second movable part are used together and a series of guide passages are formed by arranging these movable parts at the passage forming position, the target range It is possible to avoid increasing the size of individual movable parts while widening the (gaming ball receiving width). As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player and suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by it.

In particular, the first guide passage and the second guide passage are formed by using the first movable portion functioning as a shutter for the first ball-entering portion and the second movable portion functioning as a shutter for the second ball-entering portion. With such a configuration, the size of the guide passage (ball receiving portion) can be increased, and the resulting complication of the configuration can be suitably suppressed.

Feature D13. When the first guide passage is formed, the ball entering the second ball entering portion is restricted by the first movable portion and the second movable portion,
The gaming machine according to feature D12, wherein, in the state where the second guide path is formed, entry of a ball into the first ball entry section is restricted by the first movable section and the second movable section. .

As shown in feature D12, each movable part serves as both a shutter and a passage forming part, which increases the size of the guide passage (ball receiving part) and suppresses the resulting complication of the structure. above is advantageous. However, for example, when forming the first guide passage, if the second movable portion is arranged at the third inclined position, the second ball-entering portion is opened, and ball-entering into the second ball-entering portion is restricted. loosen up. Further, when the second guide passage is formed, if the first movable portion is arranged at the second inclined position, the first ball-entering portion is opened and ball-entering regulation to the first ball-entering portion becomes loose. Become. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the first guide passage is formed, the first movable portion and the second movable portion regulate the ball entering the second ball entering portion, and when the second guide passage is formed, the first movable portion Further, the second movable portion restricts the entry of the ball into the first ball-entering portion, and the movable portions compensate for the deterioration of the restricting function, thereby suitably suppressing the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in the above group of features A to C may be applied to feature D1 to feature D12.

<Characteristic group E>
The following characteristic group E is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed and a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls being paid out is given to the player. The game is diversified by making the ball entry means variable and switching the ball entry means between a receiving state and a non-receiving state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology has been developed in view of the background and problems that ``the above-described type of gaming machine still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to realize the diversification of games.''

Feature E1. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A first ball-entering section (for example, first ball-entering section 331) and a second ball-entering section (for example, second ball-entering section 341) provided in the game area and into which game balls enter;
a first guiding portion (for example, first movable bodies 350F and 350G) movable to a first guiding position for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion and a first non-guiding position for not guiding;
A second guide portion (for example, second movable bodies 360F and 360G) that can move to a second guide position that guides the game ball to the second ball entering portion and a second non-guide position that does not guide,
When the first guide portion is arranged at the first guide position, a first guide passage (for example, a first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion is formed together with the first guide portion. Then, a second guide path (for example, a second guide path GP2) that guides the game ball to the second ball entering portion together with the second guide portion when the second guide portion is arranged at the second guide position. A game machine characterized by comprising a passage forming portion (for example, cores 390F and 390G) that forms a .

In a game machine of a type equipped with a variable ball-entering device that changes the probability of entering a ball into the ball-entering portion, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game by enhancing the contrast between guidance and non-guidance. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the ball-entering device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) at the time of guidance is wide. However, simply increasing the size of the guide portion to increase the receiving width increases the area occupied by the ball-entering device. In other words, when trying to increase the number of game balls to be guided by lengthening the guide path, the occupied area of the guide section increases. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if a passage forming portion forming a part of one guide passage is used to form a part of the other guide passage, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suitably suppressed. can. This can contribute to an improvement in the degree of freedom in arranging the ball-entering device.

Feature E2. The passage forming portion protrudes forward of the game area from the front surface of the game board in a state where at least the first guide passage and the second guide passage are formed,
The first guide portion is arranged at the first guide position and the first non-guide position by moving in the thickness direction of the game board,
The game according to feature E1, wherein the second guide portion is arranged at the second guide position and the second non-guide position by moving in the thickness direction of the game board. machine.

When each guide passage is formed by each guide portion and passage-forming portion, a step occurs in the guide passage due to positional deviation between the guide portion and the passage-forming portion. Such a step can be a factor that interferes with smooth flow, such as game balls being caught. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the moving direction of each guide portion is configured to match the projecting direction of the passage forming portion, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience caused by the positional deviation of the guide portion.

Further, when a game ball is caught between the guide portion and the passage forming portion, deformation such as distortion may occur in the passage forming portion. In this regard, by devising the operating direction of each guide part as shown in this feature, when the guide part moves from the non-guiding position to the guiding position, the game ball can be caught between the guide part and the passage forming part. can be avoided. By protecting the passage forming portion in this way, it is possible to contribute to the smooth flow of game balls in the guide passage.

Feature E3. The first guide portion is formed with first insertion portions (for example, cutouts 353F and 353G) through which the passage formation portion is inserted, and the passage formation portion is inserted through the second guide portion. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein second insertion portions (for example, recessed portions 363F and 363G) are formed.

As shown in this feature, each guide portion is provided with an insertion portion for the passage forming portion, and the passage forming portion is inserted through these insertion portions, thereby contributing to space saving of the guide passage as a whole.

Feature E4. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the first guide section and the second guide section intersect at a location where the passage forming section is provided.

As shown in this feature, if both guide portions are configured to intersect at the location where the flow path forming portion is arranged, the total length of each guide passage (the width of the receiving game ball) can be achieved while reducing the space of the entire guide passage. can be increased.

Feature E5. The first guide portion and the second guide portion are flat plate-shaped,
When the first guide portion is placed at the first guide position, the upper plate surface (for example, the upper surface 351F) of the first guide portion slopes downward toward the first ball entry portion,
When the second guide portion is placed at the second guide position, the upper plate surface (for example, the upper surface 361F) of the second guide portion slopes downward toward the second ball entry portion,
The passage forming part is
A first inclined portion (for example, a first inclined portion 391F) that constitutes the rolling surface of the game ball in the first guide passage together with the upper plate surface of the first guide portion;
It is characterized by having a second inclined portion (for example, a second inclined portion 392F) that constitutes the rolling surface of the game ball in the second guide passage together with the upper plate surface of the second guide portion. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E4.

According to the feature E5, by providing the first inclined portion in accordance with the first guide portion and providing the second inclined portion in accordance with the second guide portion, it is possible to preferably relax the restrictions related to the orientation of the guide passage and the like.

Feature E6. The first guide part has a first accommodation part (for example, a notch 353F) that accommodates the second inclined part in a state where the first guide part is arranged at the first guide position,
The second guide portion has a second accommodation portion (for example, recessed portion 363F) that accommodates the first inclined portion when the second guide portion is arranged at the second guide position. The gaming machine according to feature E5, characterized by:

According to feature E6, the unnecessary portion (inclined portion) of the passage forming portion is accommodated in the accommodation portion of the guide portion. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the behavior of the game ball from being disturbed, such as when the game ball is caught in an unnecessary part.

In combination with feature E3, the "insertion portion" shown in feature E3 may be the same as the "accommodating portion" shown in this feature.

Feature E7. The passage forming portion is movable to a protruding position that protrudes into the game area and a retracted position where the protrusion is suppressed, and when neither the first guide passage nor the second guide passage is formed , the gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that it is configured to wait at the retracted position.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the guide passage is not formed, the passage forming portion is prevented from projecting into the game area. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of the game ball flowing down the game area colliding with the passage forming portion. By protecting the passage forming portion in this way, when a guide passage is formed by the passage forming portion and the guiding portion, it is possible to prevent the ball from being smoothly guided due to variations in the relative positions of the two. can be suppressed.

Feature E8. When the first guide portion moves to the first guide position, the passage forming portion follows the first guide portion and moves to the projecting position, and the second guide portion moves to the second guide position. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the game machine is configured to follow the second guide portion and move to the projecting position when moving to.

When the passage forming portion is of a retractable type as shown in feature E7, the passage forming portion moves to the projecting position following the movement of each guiding portion to the guiding position. It is possible to suppress deviation of formation timing and the like.

Feature E9. The direction of movement of the first guide portion and the second guide portion is the same as the direction of movement of the passage forming portion,
The first guide portion is provided with a first acting portion (for example, an arm portion 355G) that moves the passage forming portion to the projecting position when the first guide portion moves to the first guide position. ,
The second guide portion is provided with a second action portion (for example, an arm portion 365G) that moves the passage forming portion to the projecting position when the second guide portion moves to the second guide position. The gaming machine according to feature E7 or feature E8, characterized by:

If the passage forming portion is of a retractable type as shown in feature E7, etc., various effects such as protection of the passage forming portion can be expected. However, the need for a separate driving section for driving the passage forming section hinders the simplification and miniaturization of the configuration of the ball-entering device. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by unifying the movement direction of each guide portion and passage forming portion and by adopting a configuration in which the passage forming portion is pushed to the projecting position by the action portion provided in each guide portion, a new No need for additional drives. As a result, excessive complication of the configuration of the ball-entering device can be suppressed, and the size of the ball-entering device can be reduced.

Feature E10. When the state in which the first guide portion is arranged at the first guide position and the state in which the second guide portion is arranged at the second guide position are shifted to the other, the state is arranged at the projecting position. The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics E7 to E9, wherein the passage forming portion is passed from one of the first guide portion and the second guide portion to the other at the projecting position. .

In view of the fact that the passage forming part moves so as to block the flow path of the game ball, there is a possibility that the game ball may get caught when it is arranged at the projecting position. Therefore, when switching from a state in which one of the first guide portion and the second guide portion forms the guide passage to a state in which the other forms the guide passage, the return of the passage forming portion to the retracted position is avoided. Such a problem can be suitably suppressed by adopting a configuration in which it is held (for example, held at the projecting position).

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a case in which one of the state in which the first guide portion is arranged at the first guide position and the state in which the second guide section is arranged at the second guide position is shifted to the other. The game machine according to any one of features E7 to E9, characterized in that movement of the passage forming portion arranged at the projecting position to the retracted position is avoided." is also possible.

Feature E11. The first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are arranged side by side, and the inlet portions (entrance portions 332, 342) are arranged so as to face each other,
Characteristic features E7 through E7, characterized in that the first guide passage and the second guide passage are formed in a region (specific region SE) sandwiched by the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features E10.

As shown in this feature, by arranging the ball-entering portions so as to face each other and forming a guide passage in the region sandwiched between the ball-entering portions, the size of the ball-entering device can be reduced. In such a configuration, when the passage forming portion is used for both guide passages, if the passage forming portion remains in the above region when the guide passage is not formed, the following problems will occur. That is, there is a possibility that the game ball passing through the area may bounce off the passage forming portion and head toward the entering ball portion. In this regard, if the passage forming portion is of a retractable type as shown in feature E7, etc., such movement of the game ball can be avoided, and the game ball is not guided to the ball entering portion. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a ball entering the ball-entering portion.

Feature E12. Features E1 to Characteristic characterized in that the passage forming portion is formed with an engaging portion that engages with at least one of the first guide portion and the second guide portion on the front side of the game board. The gaming machine according to any one of E11.

In a configuration in which a game part protrudes toward the front side of the game board, it is difficult to improve the strength of the game part because the game part is cantilevered. Therefore, if the passage forming portion and the guide portion are engaged with each other so as to complement each other in strength, such a lack of strength can be preferably resolved.

For example, if the passage-forming portion is smaller than the guiding portion, the guiding portion may support (reinforce) the passage-forming portion. It is preferable that the passage forming portion supports (reinforces) the guide portion.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in the above group of features A to D may be applied to feature E1 to feature E12.

<Feature group F>
The following feature group F is "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed and a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. By making the ball-entering means variable and switching the ball-entering means between a receiving state and a non-receiving state according to the game situation, diversification of games is achieved (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, it was made in view of the background and problems that "the above-mentioned type of gaming machine still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to realize the diversification of games by means of variable ball entry means." It is a thing.

Feature F1. A gaming machine provided with a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and provided with ball entry means (for example, a variable winning unit 83R) that allows game balls to enter the game area. There is
The ball entry means
A first ball-entering portion (first ball-entering portion 331) and a second ball-entering portion (second ball-entering portion 341) into which game balls enter,
A first movable body (e.g., first movable body 350, 350H, first guide portion 400L),
A second movable body (e.g., a second movable body 360, 360H, and a second guide portion 410L),
a first state in which the first movable body is arranged at the first guiding position and the second movable body is arranged at the second non-guiding position; and a first state in which the first movable body is arranged at the first non-guiding position. and the second movable body is arranged at the second guide position; and the first movable body is arranged at the first guide position and the second movable body is arranged at the second guide position. A switching means (MPU of the main controller 162) for switching to the third state,
A game machine characterized in that, in the third state, a stage section (stage ST) in which a game ball can be stopped is formed by the first movable body and the second movable body.

For example, in a configuration where guidance/non-guidance by the movable body is repeatedly switched, the player can reduce wasteful investment by devising a shooting operation so that the game ball does not reach the movable body during non-guidance. If such technical intervention is allowed, there will be a difference in the benefits and the like that can be obtained according to the skill of the player. This can be an obstacle to improving game fairness. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the third state in which both the movable bodies are arranged at the guide position forms a stage portion on which the game ball can be stopped by the movable bodies. Therefore, the game ball that reaches the movable body in the third state is not discharged immediately, but a certain amount of delay occurs before discharge. As a result, when the game ball whose discharge is delayed is switched again to the first state or the second state, it is possible to give an opportunity to enter the first ball-entering section or the second ball-entering section. In this way, if the player is provided with an opportunity to enter the ball into the ball-entering portion, wasteful investment can be suppressed without refraining from shooting the game ball in anticipation of the non-guidance period. As a result, the problem of fairness can be solved favorably. Complicated configuration by forming the stage portion by using both the first movable body functioning as a guide portion for the first ball-entering portion and the second movable body functioning as a guide portion for the second ball-entering portion. It is possible to exhibit the above effect while suppressing the deterioration.

It should be noted that, if attention is paid to the fact that the "stage section" shown in this feature is configured to be able to stop the game ball, the "stage section" can also be referred to as the "retaining section".

By the way, the configuration shown in this feature is "provided with a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a ball entry means (for example, variable winning unit 83R) capable of entering a game ball into the game area. ), wherein the ball entry means includes a first ball entry section (first ball entry section 331) and a second ball entry section (second ball entry section 341 ), and a first movable body (for example, the first 1 movable bodies 350, 350H, first guide portion 400L), a second guide position (protruding position) where the game ball can be guided to the second ball entering portion, and a second non-guide position (retracted position) where the guidance is not performed ) and a second movable body (for example, the second movable bodies 360 and 360H and the second guide portion 410L), the first movable body being arranged at the first guide position and the second movable body is arranged at the second non-guiding position, and a second state where the first movable body is arranged at the first non-guiding position and the second movable body is arranged at the second guiding position. and a third state in which the first movable body is arranged at the first guide position and the second movable body is arranged at the second guide position. , a game machine characterized in that, in the third state, a stage section (stage ST) on which a game ball can roll is formed by the first movable body and the second movable body.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the stage portion is formed so as to straddle the first movable body and the second movable body.

As shown in feature F2, if the stage portion is formed so as to straddle both movable bodies, it is possible to increase the number of game balls that can be parked on the stage portion while suppressing an increase in the size of the ball entry means. .

Feature F3. The switching means has means for switching from the third state to either the first state or the second state,
The first movable body can guide a game ball flowing out from the stage section to the first ball entering section by switching to the first state, and the second movable body can be changed to the second state. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the game ball flowing out from the stage portion can be guided to the second ball entering portion by switching the.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball stopped on the stage portion in the third state is guided to the first ball entering portion or the second ball entering portion by switching to the first state or the second state. . As a result, it is possible to suitably give the stationary game ball an opportunity to enter the first ball-entering part or the second ball-entering part, and to suitably exhibit the effect shown in the feature F1.

Feature F4. The switching means includes means for switching from the first state to the third state by moving the second movable body to the second guide position; means for switching to the third state by moving to the first guide position;
The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the stage portion is configured to be maintained until it is switched to either the first state or the second state.

According to the combination of the feature F3 and the feature F4, it is possible to set the first state/second state→third state→first state/second state. At this time, the stage portion formed by switching to the third state is maintained until the next switching to the first state/second state. For this reason, for example, when the guidance of the game ball to the first ball entering part or the second ball entering part is finished, the stage part is formed, and the entrance to the first ball entering part or the second ball entering part A game ball that should not have been given a chance to play a ball is temporarily held in the stationary part, and then the switching to the first state/second state can be waited for. According to this configuration, it is possible to actively use the stage portion to provide a ball-entering opportunity, and to more preferably exhibit the effect shown in the feature F1.

It should be noted that instead of simultaneously moving the two movable bodies to the guide position, one movable body is placed at the guide position while the other movable body is placed at the guide position. This is advantageous in suppressing the occurrence of ball clogging during formation.

Feature F5. When the first state is switched from the third state to the first state, the first movable body moves the game ball stopped in the portion formed by the second movable body in the stage portion to the first input state. It is possible to guide to the ball,
The second movable body moves the game ball that has stopped in the portion formed by the first movable body on the stage portion to the second entering ball when the state is switched from the third state to the second state. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or feature F4, characterized in that it can be guided to the part.

When the stage portion is formed by combining the first movable body and the second movable body, the stage portion gives the game ball stopping on the first movable body an opportunity to enter the second ball entering portion. By giving the game ball stopping on the second movable body in the stage part an opportunity to enter the first ball entering part, the drop of the game ball is more preferably suppressed. In this way, by imparting fluidity to the guide destination of the stationary game ball, it is possible to favorably promote the smooth progress of the game.

Feature F6. The stage section includes a guide path (first guide path GP1) for a game ball to the first ball-entering section by the first movable body and a guide path for the game ball to the second ball-entering section by the second movable body. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F5, characterized in that it is formed over (the second guide route GP2).

If the stage section is configured to extend over two guide paths, it is possible to prevent the presence of the stage section from extending the player's attention to a wide area. This is a preferable configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the stationary game ball.

Feature F7. The stage section is capable of moving a game ball from the first movable body side to the second movable body side and moving the game ball from the second movable body side to the first movable body side. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F6.

According to the feature F7, it is possible to prevent the motion of the game ball reaching the stage from becoming monotonous.

Feature F8. When switching from the third state to the first state, the game ball stationary on the second movable body moves onto the first movable body, and when switching from the third state to the second state, the The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F7, wherein a game ball that has stopped on the first movable body is moved onto the second movable body.

According to the feature F8, when the stoppage by the stage section is canceled, the game ball placed on the movable body that is not guided this time can move to the movable body that is guided this time. It is possible to increase the number of game balls and increase the chances that a plurality of game balls are collectively guided to the ball entry section.

Feature F9. According to any one of features F3 to F8, the switching means includes means for alternately switching between the first state and the second state with the third state interposed therebetween. game machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, a game ball that has not entered one ball entering portion is guided to the other ball entering portion through a dwell. This prevents the motion of the game ball from becoming monotonous and contributes to increasing the attention to the game.

Feature F10. The first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are arranged side by side,
The stage portion is formed at a position between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion in a direction in which the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are arranged side by side. It has a first inclined portion descending from the ball portion side to the second ball entering portion side and a second inclined portion descending from the second ball entering portion side to the second ball entering portion side, the first inclined portion and The boundary portion of the second inclined portion is configured to be the bottom portion of the stage portion,
The game according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the first inclined portion is configured by the first movable body, and the second inclined portion is configured by the second movable body. machine.

With the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball that has reached the stage portion moves to the bottom portion and stops while being in contact with the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion. As a result, it is possible to smoothen the movement of the game ball when the stationary state is released.

Feature F11. A game ball disposed in front or behind the stage portion and stopped on the stage portion flows out from the stage portion without entering either the first ball entering portion or the second ball entering portion. It has an outflow passage (connection passage 317) that allows
The upper surface (upper surface 351) of the first movable body and the upper surface (upper surface 361) of the second movable body are formed with a guide portion for guiding the game ball to the entrance portion side of the outflow passage. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10.

An excessive number of game balls stopped at the stage part can be a factor that hinders the smooth flow of game balls around the ball entry means. Also, if too many game balls are stopped, the game balls are guided to each ball entry portion at once, resulting in excessive entry of balls (so-called over winning). Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which the game ball is appropriately discharged from the stationary portion by the outflow passage shown in the present feature, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature F12. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A ball entry section (for example, a ball entry section 331) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can be entered;
A first position that has a rolling surface (for example, upper surface 351) on which a game ball can roll, and forms a guide passage (for example, first guide path GP1) that guides the game ball to the ball entry portion by the rolling surface. and a movable body (e.g., movable body 350) that can move to a second position where the rolling surface forms a detour (e.g., detour TE1) that bypasses the ball entry portion,
The period required for the game ball to pass through the guide passage when the movable body is positioned at the first position is equal to the period required for the game ball to pass through the guide passage when the movable body is positioned at the second position. A game machine characterized by being constructed so as to be longer than a period required for passage through the passage.

According to the feature F12, when the guide passage is formed, the ball moves quickly to the ball-entering portion, and when the detour passage is formed, the movement slows down. Therefore, by moving the movable body from the second position to the first position, it is possible to increase the chances that the game ball that is moving in the detour passage will enter the game ball.

Feature F13. When the movable body is arranged at the second position, the movement of the game ball is delayed by coming into contact with the game ball moving along the rolling surface, while the movable body is at the first position. The gaming machine according to feature F12, further comprising an abutment portion that avoids abutment with a game ball moving along the rolling surface when the game ball is arranged in the rolling surface.

According to the feature F13, the moving speed of the game ball passing through the detour passage becomes lower than the moving speed of the game ball passing through the guide passage. As a result, the game ball can be quickly moved to the ball entry portion during guidance, while the movement of the game ball can be delayed during detour. As a result, the effect shown in feature F12 can be favorably exhibited.

Feature F14. Posture changing means for changing the inclination angle of the rolling surface with respect to the horizontal plane by changing the posture of the movable body,
When the movable body is arranged at the first position, the inclination of the rolling surface with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than when the movable body is arranged at the second position. The gaming machine according to feature F12 or feature F13, characterized by:

According to the feature F14, the inclination of the rolling surface increases by moving from the second position to the first position. As a result, the moving speed of the game ball passing through the rolling surface is increased. As a result, the period required for passage through the guide passage is shortened. On the other hand, moving from the first position to the second position reduces the inclination of the rolling surface. As a result, the moving speed of the game ball passing through the rolling surface is lowered, and the period required for passage through the detour path is lengthened. By changing the posture of the movable body in this manner to change the movement speed of the game ball, the effect shown in feature F12 can be favorably exhibited.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in the above group of features A to E may be applied to features F1 to F14.

<Characteristic group G>
The following feature group G is defined as ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. By making the ball-entering means variable and switching the ball-entering means between a receiving state and a non-receiving state according to the game situation, diversification of games is achieved (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology has been developed in view of the background and problems that ``the above-described type of gaming machine still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to realize diversification of games.''

Feature G1. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A first ball-entering portion (first ball-entering portion 331) and a second ball-entering portion (second ball-entering portion 341) provided in the game area and into which a game ball enters;
A first guide path (first guide path GP1) that is movable within a predetermined range including a first position (protruding position) and guides the game ball to the first ball entering portion by being placed at the first position. ) forming a first movable body (for example, the first movable bodies 350 and 350H, the first guide portion 400L),
The second guide path (second guide path GP2 ) forming a second movable body (e.g., second movable bodies 360, 360H, second guide portion 410L),
When the first movable body is placed at the first position, the first movable body prevents the game ball from moving to the second ball entering portion through the second guide path,
In a state where the second movable body is arranged at the second position, the movement of the game ball to the first ball entering portion through the first guide path is blocked by the second movable body. game machine.

According to feature G1, when a situation arises in which the game ball should be guided to the first ball-entering part, the first movable body is placed at the first position to guide the game ball to the first ball-entering part. 1 guidance route is formed. At this time, the movement of the game ball toward the second ball entering portion is blocked by the first movable body forming the first guide path. Further, when the game ball should be guided to the second ball-entering portion, the second guide path for guiding the game ball to the second ball-entering portion is established by arranging the second movable body at the second position. It is formed. At this time, the movement of the game ball toward the first ball entering portion is blocked by the second movable body forming the second guide path. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball-entering portion that is not set as the guide destination of the game ball, and it is possible to suitably suppress accidental ball-entering.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a gaming machine provided with a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, provided in the game area, and a game ball enters the game machine. It is movable within a predetermined range including a first ball-entering portion (first ball-entering portion 331) and a second ball-entering portion (second ball-entering portion 341) and a predetermined position (projection position). A movable body (for example, first movable bodies 350, 350H, guide portion 400L) that forms a guide path (first guide path GP1) that guides the game ball to the first ball entering portion by being arranged, A gaming machine characterized in that movement of a game ball to the second ball entering portion is blocked by the movable body in a state where the movable body is arranged at the predetermined position.

Feature G2. The first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are configured such that the entrance portions (for example, the entrance portions 332 and 342) of the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are opposed to each other with a predetermined region (specific region SE) therebetween. are arranged to face
In the state where the first movable body is arranged at the first position, the first movable body is between the inflow point (inflow port OE) where the game ball flows into the predetermined area and the second ball entrance portion. Position to,
wherein the second movable body is positioned between the inflow portion and the entrance portion of the first ball entrance portion when the second movable body is arranged at the second position; The gaming machine according to the characterizing feature G1.

If the entrance portions of the ball-entering portions are opposed to each other, the ball is more likely to enter the ball-entering portion that is not the guide destination. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the game ball is guided to each ball entry portion by the movable body, the movable body is arranged so as to block the inflow point to the predetermined area and the entrance portion of the ball entry portion that is not the guide destination. By arranging , it is possible to suitably avoid entering a ball into a ball entering portion that is not a guide destination.

Feature G3. When the first movable body is arranged at the first position, the game ball cannot pass between the first movable body and the entrance portion of the second ball-entering portion in the predetermined area. is composed of
When the second movable body is arranged at the second position, the game ball cannot pass between the second movable body and the entrance portion of the first ball-entering portion in the predetermined area. The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein:

As shown in this feature, when the movable body is placed at the guide position (first position or second position), the gap between the movable body and the ball-entering portion that is not the guide destination is such that the game ball cannot pass through. With this configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the ball from entering a ball-entering section that is not a guide destination with a configuration in which a plurality of ball-entering sections are provided side by side.

Feature G4. means for arranging the second movable body at the second position under the condition that the first movable body is arranged at the first position;
and means for arranging the first movable body at the first position under the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the second position. or the game machine according to one.

When the second movable body is placed at the second position under the condition that the first guide path is formed by the first movable body, the game ball is moved along the first guide path by the second movable body. Hindered. On the other hand, when the first movable body is placed at the first position under the condition that the second guide path is formed by the second movable body, the game ball is guided along the second guide path by the first movable body. Movement is hindered. In this way, each movable body has a function of forming a flow path and a function of cutting the flow path, so that the movement when switching the destination of the ball can be made novel.

Feature G5. means for disengaging the second movable body from the second position after the second movable body is positioned at the second position when the first movable body is positioned at the first position;
and means for causing the first movable body to move away from the first position after the first movable body has been placed at the first position when the second movable body is placed at the second position. The gaming machine according to feature G4, characterized in that

When the first guide path is formed by the first movable body, switching whether or not the ball can enter the first ball-entering section is performed by arranging/non-arranging the second movable body at the second position. can be done. In addition, when the second guide path is formed by the second movable body, whether or not the ball can enter the second ball entering portion can be determined by arranging/non-arranging the first movable body at the first position. You can switch. In this way, by adopting a configuration that maintains the flow path once formed, the movement of the game ball can be made novel. In this case, it is possible to reproduce the same movement by separately providing a shutter, but there is a concern that the additional shutter will increase the size of the ball-entering device. In this regard, by having the other movable body function as a shutter as shown in the present feature, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball and to suitably suppress the increase in the size of the ball-entering device resulting therefrom.

Feature G6. By arranging the first movable body at the first position and the second movable body at the second position, the game ball is moved to the first ball entering portion through the first guide path. and the movement of the game ball to the second ball entering portion through the second guide path is disabled.

According to the feature G6, the first movable body is arranged at the first position and the second movable body is arranged at the second position, thereby disabling entry of game balls into both ball entry portions. For example, it is possible to prevent a ball from entering each ball-entering section by retracting both the first movable body and the second movable body. It is possible to increase the certainty of avoiding entering a ball. Further, since there is no need to form a new flow path at the time of resuming guidance of the game ball, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the ball can be entered.

Feature G7. The first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are configured such that the entrance portions (for example, the entrance portions 332 and 342) of the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are opposed to each other with a predetermined region (specific region SE) therebetween. are arranged to face
The first ball-entering portion is configured such that the entrance portion of the first ball-entering portion is moved to the predetermined region by the first movable body arranged at the first position and the second movable body arranged at the second position. It is configured to be covered from the side,
The second ball-entering portion is configured such that the entrance portion of the second ball-entering portion is moved to the predetermined region by the first movable body arranged at the first position and the second movable body arranged at the second position. The gaming machine according to feature G6, which is configured to be covered from the sides.

If the entrance portion of each ball entry portion is covered by both movable bodies in this feature, the effect shown in feature G6 can be exhibited favorably. In particular, instead of covering the entrance portion with one movable body, two movable bodies are used together to cover the entrance portion, so that the movable body placed at the guide position (first position or second position) Even in the configuration in which the guide route is formed by using the shielding function, it is possible to suitably suppress the increase in the restrictions related to the routing of the guide route.

Feature G8. By arranging the second movable body at the second position under the condition that the first movable body is arranged at the first position, movement of the game ball along the first guide path is controlled by the second position. a means for regulation by a movable body;
By arranging the first movable body at the first position under the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the second position, movement of the game ball along the second guide path is controlled by the first position. The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G7, further comprising means for restricting by a movable body.

As shown in this feature, if a movable body that functions as a guide means to one ball entering portion is configured to function as a shutter (stopper) that restricts the movement of the game ball to the other ball entering portion, a plurality of variable types When the ball-entering means is configured by the ball-entering device, the complication of the configuration related to the ball-entering means can be suitably suppressed.

Feature G9. When the first movable body is arranged at the first position and the second movable body is arranged at the second position, the game ball is moved from the first movable body side to the second movable body side. and movement of the game ball from the side of the second movable body to the side of the first movable body.

According to feature G9, for example, when the movement of the game ball is hindered by the second movable body while being guided through the first guide route, the game ball immediately stops on the spot. Instead, there is room to move toward another newly formed path. Such behavior of the game ball can suppress the monotony of the movement of the game ball. This is preferable in terms of increasing attention to the movement of the game ball.

Feature G10. a direction in which the game ball is guided by the first movable body and an operating direction of the second movable body intersect;
The gaming machine according to feature G8 or feature G9, wherein the direction in which the game ball is guided by the second movable body and the direction in which the first movable body moves intersects.

As shown in feature G8 and the like, when each movable body has both a guide function and a shutter function (stopper function), the load from the game ball causes the movable body to shift its position, etc., and the guide function is concerned that it will not work well. Such an inconvenience is assumed to become conspicuous when the operating direction and the guiding direction are the same. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by intersecting the operation direction and the guide direction, even if each movable body is configured to have both the guide function and the shutter function, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be preferably avoided. can be suppressed to

Feature G11. Under the condition that the first movable body is placed at the first position and the second movable body is placed at the second position, one of the first movable body and the second movable body is placed at the first position. a position or means for retracting from the second position;
The side where the game ball is guided by the first movable body and the side where the game ball is guided by the second movable body are opposite,
The first movable body and the second movable body are capable of coming into contact with the game ball to be guided from the side opposite to the side on which the game ball is guided by the first movable body, and the second movable body The game according to any one of features G8 to G10, characterized in that the game ball to be guided can be contacted from the side opposite to the side where the game ball is guided by the movable body. machine.

According to the feature G11, when the two movable bodies are both arranged at the guide position (first position or second position) and the game ball is restricted from flowing down, the game ball hits the two movable bodies. be in contact. In a situation where one movable body restricts the guidance of the game ball by the other movable body, the one movable body retreats from the guiding position, so that the game ball under restriction is transferred to the other movable body as it is. It will start flowing down along. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize an improvement in responsiveness and a smooth flow of game balls when guidance is started.

Feature G12. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A first ball-entering section (first ball-entering section) provided in the game area and arranged such that the entrance portions of game balls (for example, entrance portions 332 and 342) face each other across a predetermined area (specific area SE) 331) and a second ball entry portion (second ball entry portion 341),
It is movable within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (protruding position), and forms a guide path (first guide path GP1) that guides the game ball to the first ball entering portion by being arranged at the predetermined position. Movable bodies (e.g., first movable bodies 350, 350H, guide portion 400L),
A gaming machine characterized in that movement of a game ball to the second ball-entering portion is blocked by the movable body in a state where the movable body is arranged at the predetermined position.

According to the feature G12, when the game ball should be guided to the first ball-entering part, a guide path for guiding the game ball to the first ball-entering part is formed by arranging the movable body at a predetermined position. be done. At this time, the movement of the game ball toward the second ball entering portion is blocked by the movable body forming the guide path. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball-entering section that is not set as the guide destination of the game ball, and it is possible to suitably suppress accidental ball-entering into the second ball-entering section.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in the above group of features A to F may be applied to features G1 to G12.

<Characteristic group H>
The following feature group H is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a game board on which a game area is formed. By winning a prize such as an operation hole provided, the player is given benefits such as a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the payout of game balls. (See, for example, Patent Document 1.) In the special game state, for example, the variable ball entry means is switched between a receiving state and a non-receiving state a plurality of times. When the variable ball entering means is in a non-accepting state, the game ball reaching the variable entering means is allowed to enter, and the game ball reaching the variable entering means is not accepted. With regard to the background art "In the above-described type of gaming machine, when the variable ball entering means is in a non-receiving state, the game ball is shot so as not to reach the variable ball entering means." By devising the operation, the player can reduce wasteful investment.If such technical intervention is allowed, the benefits that can be obtained will differ according to the skill of the player. can be a hindrance in improving the fairness of the game.”

Feature H1. A game board (game board 80a) formed with a game area (game area PE) is provided, and variable ball entry means (variable winning unit 83) capable of switching between a receiving state and a non-receiving state for receiving game balls in the game area is provided. A gaming machine provided with
The variable ball entry means
A ball-entering section (for example, a first ball-entering section 331) into which a game ball can enter;
A guide that can move to a formation position (e.g., protruding position) that forms a guide path (e.g., first guide path GP1) that guides the game ball to the ball-entering portion and a non-formation position (e.g., retracted position) that does not form the guide path. a path forming portion (e.g., first movable bodies 350, 350H, first guide portion 400L);
A regulating portion (e.g., second movable bodies 360, 360H, third 2 guide portion 410L),
When the guide path forming portion is arranged at the forming position and the restricting portion is arranged at the allowable position to switch the variable ball entering means to the non-receiving state, the guide route forming portion is moved to the forming position. A gaming machine characterized in that the movement precedes the movement of the restricting portion to the allowable position.

According to the characteristic H1, since the guide path is formed prior to the opening of the ball-entering portion, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game balls reaching the guide path prior to the opening are avoided from falling out. . By relieving the lost ball in this way, it is possible to suppress the interruption of the shooting operation of the game ball while waiting for the opening of the ball entry part, and encourage the continuation of the shooting of the game ball. . This is preferable for suppressing delays in game progress. In addition, by suppressing the occurrence of a difference in the benefits and the like obtained according to the skill of the player, the fairness of the game can be favorably improved.

Feature H2. The regulating portion is formed with a guiding inclined surface (for example, the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350 and the upper surface 361 of the second movable body 360) that guides the game ball that has reached the regulating portion to the formation position. The gaming machine according to the characterizing feature H1.

As shown in feature H1, in the configuration in which the movement of the guide passage forming portion from the non-forming position to the forming position precedes the movement of the restricting portion from the restricting position to the permitting position, the movement of the restricting portion moves to the flow path forming portion. The delay in the movement of the ball may give the player the impression that the game ball that should have entered the ball is dropped and the player has missed the opportunity to enter the ball. It is assumed that this hinders the various effects shown in feature H1. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which the game ball that has fallen to the regulation portion while the guide path is being formed is guided to the formation position (guide path formation portion side), the game ball enters You can give the ball a chance. Therefore, it is difficult to give the impression that the movement of the regulating part is behind the movement of the flow path forming part, which is a factor in missing an opportunity to enter the ball, and it is preferably suppressed from becoming a factor that lowers the player's desire to play. can.

Feature H3. The game according to feature H2, wherein the restricting portion is configured such that a moving direction of the game ball moving to the formation position along the guiding inclined surface is a direction away from the ball entering portion. machine.

Assuming that the movement of the game ball is restricted at a position close to the ball-entering portion, as soon as the restricting portion moves to the allowable position, the game ball that was being restricted flows into the ball-entering portion, There is concern that it will be difficult to visually confirm the movement of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which the game ball guided to the forming position by the inclined surface is kept away from the ball entry portion, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature H4. According to feature H2 or feature H3, the guide path forming part is formed so that the inclination angle of the guide path with respect to the horizontal plane is the same as or larger than the inclination angle of the guide inclined surface with respect to the horizontal plane. The game machine described.

As shown in feature H2, etc., in the case of guiding the game ball that has fallen to the regulating part side to the guide path side, if the guided game ball jumps over the guide path, the effect shown in feature H2, etc. will not be obtained. It is assumed that it will not perform well. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the inclination angle of the guide path with respect to the horizontal plane to be equal to or greater than the inclination angle of the guide inclined surface with respect to the horizontal plane, such behavior of the game ball can be suppressed.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the restricting part is configured to cut into the middle of the guide route when placed at the restricting position.

As shown in feature H1, in the configuration in which the guide path is formed first, a plurality of game balls blocked by the regulation section can flow into the ball section at once when the regulation is released. Such movement of the game ball is preferable for enhancing visual impact. Here, as shown in this feature, if the regulation section is arranged at a position in the middle of the guide path, and the guide path extends downstream from the regulation section, the movement of the game ball as described above can be achieved. occurs, the movement distance of the group of game balls can be earned, and the chances of overlooking the movement of the game balls can be reduced.

Feature H6. The guide path forming part has a passage length of a portion of the guide path located upstream of the regulating position by the regulating part is longer than the radial dimension of the game ball, and the regulating part located at the regulating position The game ball whose movement to the ball entry part side is prevented by the part can wait on the guide path forming part. game machine.

According to the feature H6, after the restriction is released by the restricting part, the game ball positioned on the guiding path moves quickly to the ball entry part, which contributes to the smooth progress of the game.

In particular, in embodying the technical ideas shown in feature H2 to feature H4, it is possible to give a difference in the density of game balls heading toward the ball entry section by combining with the configuration shown in this feature. . This is preferable for suppressing monotonous movement of the game ball toward the entering ball portion.

Feature H7. The restricting portion is maintained at the restricting position when the variable ball entering means is in the non-receiving state,
When the variable ball entry means is switched to the receiving state, the guide path forming portion is configured to move to the forming position under the condition that the restricting portion is arranged at the restricting position. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6 characterized by:

As shown in the feature H1 and the like, when the variable ball entering means is switched to the receiving state, various effects can be expected by releasing the movement restriction by the restricting section after forming the guide path. However, if the movement of the variable ball-entering means becomes complicated, there is a concern that the operation period will be lengthened and the responsiveness in switching between the receiving state and non-receiving state will decrease. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the variable ball entry means is switched to the receiving state, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be preferably suppressed by placing the restricting portion in the restricting position in advance. .

Feature H8. The gaming machine according to feature H7, wherein the restricting portion prevents the ball from entering the ball-entering portion when the restricting portion is arranged at the restricting position.

As shown in feature H7, in the case where the restricting portion is arranged at the restricting position in the non-receiving state, the restricting portion prevents the ball from entering the ball entering portion. Unexpected (accidental) ball entry can be avoided without using . In other words, the regulating portion has both the function of regulating the movement of the game ball along the guide path and the function of preventing the ball from entering the ball-entering portion, thereby suppressing the complication of the configuration.

Feature H9. The guide path forming part is arranged at the forming position and the non-forming position by sliding movement in the thickness direction of the game board,
When switching the variable ball entry means from the receiving state to the non-receiving state, the restricting portion is moved from the allowable position to the restricting position under the condition that the guide path forming portion is arranged at the forming position. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, characterized in that it is configured to return.

A game ball moving along the guide path gains momentum toward the ball entering section. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to disallow ball entry by retracting (sliding) the guide path forming portion to the non-formation position, there is a concern that the game ball may enter the ball entering portion as it is. Therefore, by causing the movement of the restricting portion to precede the end of the reception, contrary to the start of the reception, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature H10. The ball entry portion is a first ball entry portion,
A second ball entry portion (second ball entry portion 341) provided separately from the first ball entry portion,
The regulating portion has a function of forming a guide path for guiding a game ball positioned on the regulating portion to the second ball entering portion in a state of being arranged at the regulating position,
The guide path forming portion is arranged at the non-guiding position and the regulation portion is arranged at the regulation position so that the game ball reaching the regulation portion enters the second ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, characterized in that

If the game ball reaching the regulation part is guided to the second ball entry part by the regulation part, the movement of the game ball can be diversified and the attention to the game can be improved. Further, since the restricting portion also has a function of forming a guide path to the second ball-entering portion, it is possible to suitably suppress the complication of the configuration of the entire apparatus.

Feature H11. In a state in which the guide path forming portion is arranged at the formation position, movement of the game ball toward the second ball entering portion side along the restricting portion is restricted by the guide path forming portion. The game machine according to feature H10, characterized by:

According to the feature H11, when the guide path forming section is arranged at the formation position, the guiding path formed by the restricting section is cut off by the guide path forming section, and movement of the game ball to the second ball entering section is restricted. Become. In this way, the guiding path forming part has a function of guiding the game ball to the first ball entering part and a function of regulating the movement of the game ball toward the second ball entering part. While achieving diversification, it is possible to suitably suppress the complication of the apparatus resulting therefrom.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in the above group of features A to G may be applied to feature H1 to feature H11.

<Characteristic group I>
The following characteristic group I is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a game board on which a game area is formed and game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. By making the ball-entering means variable and switching the ball-entering means between a receiving state and a non-receiving state according to the game situation, diversification of games is achieved (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, it was made in view of the background and problems that "the above-mentioned type of gaming machine still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to realize the diversification of games by means of variable ball entry means." It is.

Features I1. Equipped with a game board (game board 80a) formed with a game area (game area PE), ball entry means (for example, variable winning units 83N, 83R, 83U, 83V, 83W) capable of entering game balls into the game area A gaming machine provided with
The ball entry means
a first ball-entering portion (first ball-entering portion 331) and a second ball-entering portion (second ball-entering portion 341);
Movable bodies (movable bodies 430N, 440N, 450R, 450U, 470V, 450W) which are rotatably pivoted and formed with rolling surfaces (for example, upper surfaces 452R, 452U, 472V, 452W) on which game balls can roll and,
a drive unit (for example, a drive motor 321) that drives the movable body,
Posture changing means (MPU of main controller 162) for changing the posture of the movable body by drive control of the drive unit,
The posture changing means is
A game ball is guided to the first ball-entering portion by rotating the movable body to change the posture of the movable body so that the rolling surface slopes downward toward the first ball-entering portion. a first guide route forming means for forming a first guide route (first guide route GP1);
A game ball is guided to the second ball-entering portion by rotating the movable body to change the posture of the movable body so that the rolling surface slopes downward toward the second ball-entering portion. and second guide route forming means for forming a second guide route (second guide route GP2).

For example, when a guide means dedicated to the first ball-entering section and a guide means dedicated to the second ball-entering section are separately provided, the ball-entering device can be improved by increasing the receiving width of the game ball in the guide means. occupies a large area. In such a configuration, there is a concern that the arrangement of the ball-entering device will be severely restricted in order to coexist with other game components in the game area. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the movable body (rolling surface) functioning as the guide means is shared, and the tilt destination (guide destination) of the rolling surface changes according to the change in the attitude of the movable body. Therefore, compared to the case where the movable bodies (rolling surfaces) are individually provided as described above, it is possible to increase the receiving width while suppressing the expansion of the area occupied by the movable bodies.

Further, for example, if a movable body for guiding is provided for each ball-entering portion, each ball-entering portion becomes independent, and only the effect (diversification) of having a plurality of ball-entering portions can be expected. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the movable body shared by the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section is used, and the guide destination changes depending on the change in the posture of the movable body. It is assumed that the user pays attention to the movement of the movable body while imagining which direction it will be guided to. As a result, it is possible to expect an effect (effect of improving attention) that surpasses the effect of simply increasing the ball entry portion.

Feature I2. A game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
ball entry means (for example, variable winning units 83N, 83R, 83U, 83V, 83W) provided in the game area;
A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the MPU of the main control device 162) that shifts the game state to a special game state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied;
As the special game state, a first special game state (opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode) and a second special game state (opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode) are provided,
The ball entry means
A first ball-entering portion (first ball-entering portion 331) to be the destination of the game ball when the first special game state is entered;
A second ball-entering portion (second ball-entering portion 341) to be the destination of the game ball when the second special game state is entered;
movable bodies (movable bodies 430N, 440N, 450R, 450U, 470V, 450W) that are rotatably supported and have rolling surfaces on which game balls can roll (for example, upper surfaces 452R, 452U, 472V, 452W);
a drive unit (driving motor 321) for driving the movable body,
Posture changing means (MPU of main controller 162) for changing the posture of the movable body by drive control of the drive unit,
The posture changing means is
By rotating the movable body and changing the posture of the movable body so that the rolling surface slopes downward toward the first ball entering portion when the first special game state is established. , a first guide path forming means for forming a first guide path (first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion;
By rotating the movable body and changing the posture of the movable body so that the rolling surface slopes downward toward the second ball entering portion when the second special game state is established. and second guide path forming means for forming a second guide path (second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second ball entering portion.

For example, a guide means dedicated to the first ball-entering section and a guide means dedicated to the second ball-entering section may be separately provided to change the guide destination of the game ball according to the game state, thereby diversifying the game. is preferred. However, in such a configuration, by increasing the receiving width of the game ball in the guiding means, the area occupied by the ball-entering device becomes large. In such a configuration, there is a concern that the arrangement of the ball-entering device will be severely restricted in order to coexist with other game components in the game area. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the movable body (rolling surface) functioning as the guide means is shared, and the tilt destination (guide destination) of the rolling surface changes according to the change in the attitude of the movable body. Therefore, compared to the case where the movable bodies (rolling surfaces) are individually provided as described above, it is possible to increase the receiving width while suppressing the expansion of the area occupied by the movable bodies.

Further, for example, if a movable body for guiding is provided for each ball-entering portion, each ball-entering portion becomes independent, and only the effect (diversification) of having a plurality of ball-entering portions can be expected. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the movable body shared by the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section is used, and the guide destination changes depending on the change in the posture of the movable body. is expected to pay attention to the movable object while imagining which direction it will be guided to. As a result, it is possible to expect an effect (effect of improving attention) that surpasses the effect of simply increasing the ball entry portion.

Feature I3. The movable body is in a first guiding state forming the first guiding path, in a second guiding state forming the second guiding path, and in any of the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion. It is possible to switch to a non-guided state that does not guide the game ball,
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2, wherein the movable body is maintained in the non-guiding state when the game state is not the special game state.

When the game state is not the special game state (for example, when it is the normal game state), the movable body is maintained in the non-guiding state, and the ball entering the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion is prevented. Avoided. In this way, making the movable body switchable between the first guided state/second guided state/non-guided state is preferable in terms of improving the degree of freedom in arranging the ball-entering device.

Feature I4. A first privilege is granted to the player based on the ball entering the first ball-entering section, and a second privilege different from the first privilege is granted to the player based on the ball entering the second ball-entering section. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that it comprises privilege giving means (payout device 224) to give to the player.

When a plurality of ball-entering sections are used in combination, it is possible to promote diversification of games by providing a difference in benefits to be obtained. In such a configuration, when the first ball-entering device including the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering device including the second ball-entering portion are separately provided, the areas occupied by the respective ball-entering devices increases. Therefore, as games are diversified, the coexistence of the ball-entering device and the peripheral parts becomes difficult, and the restrictions on the placement of the ball-entering device become stronger. Therefore, by applying the technical ideas shown in feature I1 and the like to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences and realize a practically preferable configuration.

Feature I5. The first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are arranged side by side in a predetermined direction,
The game according to any one of Features I1 to I4, wherein the movable body is arranged between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion in the predetermined direction. machine.

As shown in feature I5, disposing the movable body between the two ball entry portions contributes to miniaturization of the movable body and reduction of the amount of change in posture of the movable body (operation range).

Feature I6. a rotation center portion of the movable body is positioned between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion;
The first guide path forming means forms the first guide path by rotating the movable body in a first predetermined direction,
Characteristic I1, wherein the second guide path forming means forms the second guide path by rotating the movable body in a second predetermined direction opposite to the first predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to any one of Features 15 to 15.

According to feature I6, the rotation direction when forming the first guide path is opposite to the rotation direction when forming the second guide path. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the operating area compared to the case where the movable body is limited to one rotating direction.

Feature I7. The movable body is in a first guiding state forming the first guiding path, in a second guiding state forming the second guiding path, and in any of the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion. It is possible to switch to a non-guided state that does not guide the game ball,
When the game state is not the special game state, the movable body is maintained in the non-guiding state,
The rotating direction of the movable body when switching from the non-guiding state to the first guiding state is opposite to the rotating direction of the movable body when switching from the non-guiding state to the second guiding state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6 characterized by:

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to switch from the non-guiding state to the second guiding state without going through the first guiding state. Also, the non-guiding state can be switched to the first guiding state without going through the second guiding state. This can contribute to improvement in responsiveness when switching to the guidance state.

Feature I8. The movable body is in a first guiding state forming the first guiding path, in a second guiding state forming the second guiding path, and in any of the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion. It is possible to switch to a non-guided state that does not guide the game ball,
When the game state is not the special game state, the movable body is maintained in the non-guiding state,
The game according to any one of features I1 to I7, wherein in the standby state, ball entry into the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion is restricted by the movable body. game machine.

According to feature I8, when the movable body is maintained in the standby state, the movable body restricts the entry of a ball into each ball entry portion. As a result, it is possible to suitably avoid the accidental entry of a ball into each ball entry section under a situation where the special game state is not set.

Feature I9. The first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are arranged such that the inlet portions (entrance portions 332, 342) face each other,
A game ball flowing down the game area is configured to enter the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section through the area between the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section,
When the movable body is in the standby state, the area between the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section is covered by the movable body from the upstream side of the game area. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I8.

According to feature I9, when the movable body is maintained in the standby state, the movable body restricts the entry of a ball into each ball entry portion. As a result, it is possible to suitably avoid the accidental entry of a ball into each ball entry section under a situation where the special game state is not set.

Feature I10. The first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are arranged side by side,
The movable body is configured such that the rolling surface faces upward when in the standby state,
When the movable body is in the standby state, the rolling contact surface constitutes a portion on the rolling contact surface that faces the first ball entry portion, and is inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion. a first inclined portion (for example, a first inclined portion 453R), and a second inclined portion that constitutes a portion on the rolling contact surface that is on the side of the second ball entry portion and is downwardly inclined toward the side of the second ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to feature I9, characterized in that it has a portion (for example, the second inclined portion 454R).

According to the feature I9, the game ball that reaches the ball entry means in the standby state is divided into the first ball entry part side and the second ball entry part side and flows down. With such a configuration, the ball entry means can function as a branching section for branching the flow-down path of the game ball.

Feature I11. The second inclined portion slopes downward toward the first ball-entering portion in a state where the first guide path is formed, and the first inclined portion is in a state where the second guide path is formed. The gaming machine according to feature I10, characterized in that it is formed so as to slope downward toward the second ball-entering portion.

According to feature I11, the first guide path is formed by the first slope and the second slope in the first guidance state, and the second guide path is formed by the first slope and the second slope in the second guidance state. can be formed. As a result, it is possible to avoid the presence of the inclined portions from shortening the total length of the guide route.

Further, the inclination angle of the first guide path is steeper on the downstream side than on the upstream side, and the acceleration of the game ball is higher on the downstream side. When a plurality of game balls are guided to the first ball entry part, the interval between the game balls can be increased. This is advantageous in suppressing the number of winning balls exceeding the upper limit (so-called over-winning). Similarly, the inclination angle of the second guide path is steeper on the downstream side than on the upstream side, and the acceleration of the game ball is higher on the downstream side. When a plurality of game balls are guided to the second ball portion, the intervals between the game balls can be increased. This is advantageous in suppressing the number of balls entering the upper limit (so-called over-winning).

Feature I12. A wall portion (wall portion 491W) is formed on at least one of the front side and the rear side of the movable body,
When a game ball comes into contact with a portion of the wall portion that overlaps the movement path (detour paths TE1, TE2) along which the game ball moves along the movable body in the standby state, the game ball is decelerated. deceleration parts (projections 492W, 493W) are formed to
The gaming machine according to feature I10 or feature I11, wherein the deceleration unit is arranged so as to avoid contact with a game ball passing through the first guide path or the second guide path. .

For example, in a configuration in which the movable body repeatedly switches between the standby state and the guide state, the player can reduce wasteful investment by devising the shooting operation so that the game ball does not reach the movable body during the standby state. . If such technical intervention is allowed, there will be a difference in the benefits and the like that can be obtained according to the skill of the player. This can be an obstacle to improving game fairness. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball that reaches the movable body during the standby state does not immediately leave the movable body, but delays its movement. A game ball that has reached the movable body and is moving slowly during the standby state is guided to the ball entry portion by switching the movable body to the guiding state. In this way, if the player is provided with an opportunity to enter the ball into the ball-entering section, wasteful investment can be suppressed even if the game ball shooting operation is not refrained in anticipation of the standby state. As a result, the problem of fairness can be solved favorably.

However, when the acceleration of the game ball is suppressed by the deceleration part, the effect on the game ball heading for the ball entry part gives the player the impression that the ball entry is delayed unnecessarily. There is a concern that it will be a factor that lowers the desire to play games. In this respect, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed by devising the arrangement of the deceleration section so that the game ball passing through the first guide path and the second guide path does not come into contact with the deceleration section. .

Feature I13. The first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are arranged side by side,
The length of the first guide path and the length of the second guide path in the side-by-side direction are configured to be equal to the separation distance between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I12 characterized by:

According to the characteristic I13, in the first guiding state, the game ball falling toward between the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion is guided to the first ball entering portion, and in the second guiding state, the first ball entering portion is guided. A game ball falling between the part and the second ball entering part can be guided to the second ball entering part. As a result, the gap between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion can be used as the inflow port to the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion. It is possible to increase the receiving width of the game ball in the ball entry portion.

Feature I14. An accommodating portion (accommodating portion 461U) that accommodates the movable body is provided,
According to any one of features I1 to I13, characterized in that when the movable body is housed in the housing part, the movable body is prevented from protruding into the game area. game machine.

In the structure in which the movable body functions as a ball receiving portion for receiving a game ball, as shown in the feature I1 and the like, the stress generated when the game ball hits is transmitted to the pivot point. This hinders stabilization of the posture of the movable body. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the movable body is retracted to the accommodation portion as shown in this feature, unnecessary contact with the game ball can be suppressed, and the support portion can be protected.

In addition, by retracting the movable body into the accommodation portion, the area in front of the movable body can be utilized as a passage area for game balls. As a result, it is possible to relax the restrictions on the flow path of the game ball.

Feature I15. A first motion area through which the movable body passes when forming the first guide path and a second motion area through which the movable body passes when forming the second guide path overlap each other. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I14.

According to the feature I15, if the motion regions of the movable bodies overlap each other, it is possible to suitably suppress unnecessary expansion of the motion regions of the movable body.

Feature I16. The movable bodies include a first movable body (for example, a first movable body 430N) arranged on the first ball-entering portion side and a second movable body (for example, a second movable body) arranged on the second ball-entering portion side. 2 movable bodies 440N),
According to any one of features I1 to I15, wherein the first guide path and the second guide path are formed by rotating the first movable body and the second movable body, respectively. The game machine described.

As shown in this feature, if each guide path is formed by a combination of the first movable body on the first ball entering portion side and the second movable body on the second ball entering portion side, the motion area of the movable body can be increased. Useless spread can be suitably suppressed.

Feature I17. The first movable body and the second movable body rotate in the same direction when forming the first guide path, and the first movable body and the second movable body when forming the second guide path. The game machine according to feature I16, wherein the rotation directions of the second movable bodies are the same.

As shown in characteristic I17, the drive mechanism can be simplified by unifying the rotation directions of the movable bodies. This is preferable in terms of miniaturizing the ball-entering device.

Feature I18. Of the first movable body and the second movable body, the movable body constituting the upstream portion of the guide path is disposed at a formation position where the leading end portion of rotation rises to form the guide path, and the movable body constitutes the downstream portion. is arranged at the formation position where the leading end of the rotation descends to form a guide path,
When the first movable body and the second movable body are arranged at the formation position, a rotation restricting portion (for example, guide grooves 433N, 434N, 443N, 444N) that restricts further rotation is provided. The gaming machine according to feature I16 or feature I17, characterized by:

According to feature I18, it is possible to absorb impact by sinking of the movable body in the upstream portion of the guide path, and to suppress deviation of the rotational position of the movable body in the downstream portion, thereby suppressing variations in movement toward the entrance portion. This can contribute to smoother guidance of game balls.

Feature I19. In the standby state in which the game ball is not guided to either the first ball-entering portion or the second ball-entering portion, the first movable body is arranged at a position covering the entrance portion of the first ball-entering portion and the second The gaming machine according to any one of Features I16 to I18, wherein the second movable body is arranged at a position covering the entrance portion of the second ball-entering portion.

As shown in feature I19, when each movable body functions as a lid that covers the entrance portion of the entrance portion, a certain size is ensured for each movable body. By forming the guide path using such a configuration, it is possible to suitably avoid the area occupied by the movable body from increasing unnecessarily when the guide path is lengthened to increase the receiving width of the game ball.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in the above group of features A to H may be applied to feature I1 to feature I19.

<Characteristic group J>
The following characteristic group J is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for shooting game balls into the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. By making the ball-entering means variable and switching the ball-entering means between a receiving state and a non-receiving state according to the game situation, diversification of games is achieved (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology has been developed in view of the background and problems that ``the above-described type of gaming machine still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.''

Feature J1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed is provided, and the game area is provided with guide portions (for example, movable bodies 430N, 440N, 470V) for guiding game balls,
The guide portion includes a first rotation center portion (eg, lower shaft portion 432N, upper shaft portion 441N, second shaft portion 482V) and a second rotation center portion (eg, upper shaft portion 431N, lower shaft portion 442N, 481V), rotates about the first rotation center to form a first guide path (for example, first guide path GP1), and rotates about the second rotation center. A gaming machine characterized by forming a second guide route (for example, a second guide route GP2) by rotating to the right.

If the guiding portion provided in the game area changes the guide destination of the game ball, the movement of the game ball can be diversified, and it can contribute to the improvement of attention to the game. In the guide part shown in this feature, the center of rotation for forming the first guide path is configured differently from the center of rotation for forming the second guide path. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress useless expansion of the operation area of the guide portion when forming two guide paths using the guide portion, and to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the guide portion. This is advantageous in exhibiting the effect of improving the degree of attention described above.

Feature J2. A gaming machine provided with a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and provided with ball entry means (for example, a variable winning unit 83R) that allows game balls to enter the game area. There is
The ball entry means
a first ball-entering portion (first ball-entering portion 331) and a second ball-entering portion (second ball-entering portion 341);
A first rotation center portion (eg, lower shaft portion 432N, upper shaft portion 441N, second shaft portion 482V) and a second rotation center portion (eg, upper shaft portion 431N, lower shaft portion 442N, first shaft portion 481V) ), and rotates about the first rotation center to form a first guide path (for example, the first guide path GP1) that guides the game ball to the first ball entering portion; Guide portions (for example, movable bodies 430N, 440N, 470V).

If the guiding portion provided in the game area changes the guide destination of the game ball, the movement of the game ball can be diversified, and it can contribute to the improvement of attention to the game. In the guide part shown in this feature, the center of rotation for forming the first guide path is configured differently from the center of rotation for forming the second guide path. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress useless expansion of the operation area of the guide portion when forming two guide paths using the guide portion, and to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the guide portion. This is advantageous in exhibiting the effect of improving the degree of attention described above.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is "provided with a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a ball entering means (for example, variable winning unit 83R) capable of entering a game ball into the game area. ), wherein the ball entry means includes a first ball entry section (first ball entry section 331), a second ball entry section (second ball entry section 341), and two times It has a dynamic center portion (for example, the upper shaft portion 431N, the lower shaft portion 432N, the upper shaft portion 441N, the lower shaft portion 442N, the first shaft portion 481V, and the second shaft portion 482V), and one of the rotation center portions to form a first guide path (e.g., first guide path GP1) that guides the game ball to the first ball entering portion by rotating around the center and rotating around the other of these rotation centers A game characterized by comprising a guide portion (for example, movable bodies 430N, 440N, 470V) that forms a second guide path (second guide path GP2) that guides the game ball to the second ball entering portion. Machine." is also possible.

Feature J3. The rotation direction of the guide portion when the first guide path is formed by rotation about the first rotation center, and the second rotation direction by rotation about the second rotation center. The game machine according to feature J2, wherein the direction of rotation of the guide portion when forming the guide path is opposite to that of the guide portion.

According to feature J3, a passage area (operating range) through which the guide section passes when forming the first guide route and a passage area (operating range) through which the guide section passes when forming the second guide route are defined. Can be duplicated. As a result, it is possible to suppress useless expansion of the operation range compared to the case where the operation range for the guide section is secured individually.

Feature J4. a passage area through which the guide portion passes when the first guide path is formed by rotation about the first rotation center; 2. The gaming machine according to feature J2 or feature J3, wherein the passage area through which the guide section passes when forming the second guide route overlaps at least a part of the passage area.

As shown in feature J4, when the passage areas (operating ranges) for forming each guide route are configured to overlap at least partially, compared to the case where the operating ranges for the guide sections are individually ensured, It is possible to suppress the expansion of the operation range. As a result, the area occupied by the ball entering means can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in arranging the ball entering means can be dramatically increased.

Feature J5. The guide portion is disposed between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion, and extends in a direction in which the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are arranged side by side,
The first rotation center portion is arranged at an end portion of the guide portion on the second ball entering portion side,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J4, wherein the second rotation center is arranged at an end of the guide section on the first ball-entering section side.

When a guide route is formed, the center of rotation, which is the starting point, is positioned at the most upstream portion of the guide route. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from hitting the part on the upstream side of the center of rotation. Even if the game ball hits the guide portion and the flowing direction changes, it is possible to prevent the pressing force of the game ball from acting to prompt the guide portion to return to the position before the rotation. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the disturbance of the posture of the guide portion due to the hitting of the game ball.

Feature J6. When the guide portion rotates around one of the first rotation center portion and the second rotation center portion, the ball-entering means moves between the first rotation center portion and the second rotation center portion. Characteristic J2 or Characteristic characterized in that it has a regulation portion (guide grooves 433N, 434N, 443N, 444N, 483V, 484V) that regulates the rotation of the guide portion about the other of the rotation center portions. The gaming machine according to any one of J5.

In the case of a configuration in which two pivoting centers are used together, the stability during operation of the guide section may decrease. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which rotation about both rotation center portions is restricted, the occurrence of such a problem can be suitably suppressed.

Feature J7. The first ball entrance portion and the second ball entrance portion are arranged side by side, and the entrance portion (entrance portion 332) of the first ball entrance portion and the entrance portion (entrance portion 342) of the second ball entrance portion face each other. are arranged in such a way that
A game ball that reaches the ball-entering means enters the first ball-entering part and the second ball-entering part through an area (specific area SE) sandwiched by the first ball-entering part and the second ball-entering part. It is composed of
Any one of features J2 to J6, wherein the guide part is arranged at a predetermined position covering from above a region sandwiched by the first ball-entering part and the second ball-entering part. The gaming machine described in .

According to the characteristic J7, the guiding portion can prevent the ball from entering the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion. When the guide portion rotates from this state, the first inclined passage and the second inclined passage are formed. It can be moved to and given an opportunity to enter. In addition, when the first guide path is formed, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball-entering part, and when the second guide path is formed, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the first ball-entering part. can be suppressed.

In particular, in combination with feature J4, etc., the rotation center is located on the side opposite to the guide destination and closer to the entering ball portion, so the rotation angle when forming the guide path can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress abrupt changes in the movement of the game ball and prevent the above-described movement of the game ball from being difficult to follow with the eyes. This is preferable in terms of improving the player's attention to the movement of the game ball.

Feature J8. Positions of the first rotation center portion and the second rotation center portion when the guide portion is arranged at the predetermined position are initial positions;
The ball-entering means includes first biasing means (second biasing member 486V) for biasing the first rotation center of the guide portion to the initial position, and the second rotation center of the guide portion. a second biasing means (first biasing member 485V) for biasing the portion to the initial position;
Under the condition that the guide portion is arranged at the predetermined position, the second rotation center portion descends against the biasing force of the second biasing means, so that the first ball-entering portion side The first guide path that inclines to the direction is formed, and the first rotation center portion descends against the urging force of the first urging means, thereby inclining to the second ball entering portion side. The game machine according to feature J7, wherein a guide route is formed.

According to the configuration shown in feature J8, it is possible to simplify the drive mechanism for enabling switching between the first guide route and the second guide route. Also, when a game ball hits a guide portion arranged at a predetermined position, the impact can be relieved by both urging means. By protecting the guide portion in this way, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the durability of the ball-entering means.

Feature J9. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and provided with ball entry means (for example, a variable winning unit 83V) that allows game balls to enter the game area. There is
The ball entry means
a first ball-entering portion (first ball-entering portion 331) and a second ball-entering portion (second ball-entering portion 341) arranged side by side;
It has a guide portion (movable body 470V) capable of guiding the game ball to the first guide portion and the second guide portion,
The guide portion is disposed between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion and extends in a direction in which the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are arranged side by side,
A game ball is guided to the first ball-entering portion by changing the height position of either one of the end portion on the side of the first ball-entering portion and the end portion on the side of the second ball-entering portion in the guide portion. A first guide route (guide route GP1) is formed, and the height position of the other of the end portion on the first ball entry portion side and the end portion on the second ball entry portion side of the guide portion is changed. A gaming machine characterized by forming a second guide path (guide path GP1) for guiding a game ball to a second ball entry portion.

As shown in feature J9, a configuration in which the first guide path is formed by changing the height position of one of the two ends of the guide portion, and the second guide path is formed by changing the height position of the other end. If so, it is possible to relax the restrictions on the initial position (orientation) of the guide part while diversifying the guide routes. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the ball entering means can be improved.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in the above group of features A to I may be applied to feature J1 to feature J9.

<Characteristic group K>
The following feature group K is defined as ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. By making the ball-entering means variable and switching the ball-entering means between a receiving state and a non-receiving state according to the game situation, diversification of games is achieved (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, it was made in view of the background and problems that "the above-mentioned type of gaming machine still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to realize the diversification of games by means of variable ball entry means." It is.

Features K1. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A ball entry section (for example, a ball entry section 331) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can be entered;
Privilege granting means (for example, a payout device 224) that grants a privilege to a player based on the ball entering the ball entering section;
Guiding means (for example, movable bodies 430P, 440P, 430Q, 440Q) that can be switched between a guiding state for guiding the game ball to the ball entering portion and a non-guiding state for not guiding,
As the guide state, a first guide state in which a game ball flowing down a first region (for example, the first region GE1) is guided to the ball entry portion, and a second region that includes the first region and is wider than the first region. A game machine characterized in that a second guide state is provided in which a game ball flowing down (for example, the first area GE1 and the second area GE2) is guided to the ball entry portion.

According to the feature K1, the game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the ball entry portion by switching the guiding means from the non-guiding state to the guiding state. Here, a first guidance state and a second guidance state are provided as the guidance states, and in the second guidance state, the area to be guided is expanded with respect to the first guidance state. Therefore, the ball-entering probability is higher in the second guidance state than in the first guidance state. In this way, by realizing the diversification of the ball-entering modes and creating a difference in the size of the benefit to be obtained, it is possible to contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

In the game area, a first flow-down path for guiding the game ball to the first area and a second flow-down path for guiding the game ball to a portion outside the first area in the second area may be provided in parallel. .

By the way, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a game machine provided with a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, which is provided in the game area and a game ball can be entered. A ball-entering portion (for example, a ball-entering portion 331) and guide means (for example, movable bodies 430P, 440P, 430Q, 440Q) for guiding game balls to the ball-entering portion. For example, a first guide state in which a game ball flowing down the first region GE1) is guided to the ball entry portion, and a second region wider than the first region (eg, the first region GE1 and the second region GE2). A game machine characterized by being switchable to a second guide state in which a game ball is guided to the ball-entering portion.".

Feature K2. The guide means forms a first inclined passage that slopes downward to the ball entry portion by being in the first guiding state, receives the game ball that has flowed down to the first area, and guides the game ball in the flowing direction. The guidance is performed by changing the direction of inclination of the first inclined passage, and the second inclined passage is formed so as to be inclined downward to the ball entering portion by being in the second guiding state, and the first inclined passage is inclined downward. The guide is performed by receiving the game ball that has flowed down to the area and changing the flowing direction of the game ball to the inclination direction of the second inclined passage,
The second inclined passage formed in the second guiding state is the first inclined passage formed in the first guiding state extended in a direction opposite to the ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to feature K1.

As shown in this feature, if the entire length of the inclined passage is changed so as to extend to the upstream side of the inclined passage so as to expand the area to be guided, the player can enter the first guidance state and the It is possible to clearly show the difference in the degree of advantage of the second guidance state.

In addition, the movement of the guiding means can be partly shared between the first guiding state and the second guiding state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration related to the action from becoming excessively complicated in order to realize the diversification of the game as shown in the feature K1.

Feature K3. The guide means has a first movable body (first movable body 430Q) and a second movable body (second movable body 440Q). In the first guidance state, the first movable body is arranged at the passage forming position. Thus, the first inclined passage is formed, and in the second guided state, the second inclined passage is formed by arranging the first movable body and the second movable body at the passage forming position. The game machine according to feature K2, characterized in that:

As shown in feature K3, if the first movable body and the second movable body are used together to form an inclined passage, even if a relatively long second inclined passage is formed, the responsiveness can be improved. Decrease can be suitably suppressed.

Feature K4. In the second guiding state, the first movable body forms the downstream portion of the second inclined passage, and the second movable body forms the upstream portion of the second inclined passage,
The gaming machine according to feature K3, wherein the upstream portion formed by the second movable body is shifted upward from an extension of the downstream portion formed by the first movable body.

In the case where a series of second inclined passages are formed by a plurality of movable bodies, it is assumed that the behavior of the game ball is disturbed by the game ball being caught in the joint portion. When the movable body functions as a ball receiving portion for receiving a game ball, its positional accuracy may decrease due to the influence of distortion or the like. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by arranging the second movable body forming the upstream portion so as to be shifted upward (offset) from the extension of the downstream portion, the occurrence of such inconveniences is preferably suppressed. can.

Feature K5. The first movable body and the second movable body are rotatable along the front surface of the game board and face each other across the second region,
When the guide portion is switched to the second guide state, the first movable body and the second movable body are rotated toward each other to form the second inclined passage. The gaming machine according to feature K3 or feature K4.

As shown in feature K5, if the movable bodies rotate toward each other to form the second inclined passage, the appearance of the second inclined passage can be greatly changed when the second inclined passage is formed. . As a result, it is possible to strengthen the impact when the second inclined passage that is advantageous to the player is formed.

Feature K6. The first movable body and the second movable body extend vertically,
The first movable body is pivotally supported such that its lower end serves as a rotation base end,
The second movable body is pivotally supported such that its upper end serves as a rotation base end,
Characteristic feature K5, characterized in that the rotation direction of the first movable body and the rotation direction of the second movable body when forming the second inclined passage are the same. game machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the movable body forming the inclined passage can be made to stand by in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of the game ball colliding with those movable bodies in the non-guided state where the inclined passage is not formed.

In addition, by making the pivotal support locations of the movable bodies upside down and rotating in the same direction, it is possible to reduce the amount of rotation when forming the second inclined passage. As a result, even when forming the second inclined passage having a long passage length, it is possible to prevent the responsiveness from deteriorating due to the extension of the operation period.

Feature K7. Movement of the first movable body when the first movable body is arranged at the passage forming position and movement of the second movable body when the second movable body is arranged at the passage forming position are synchronized. The gaming machine according to feature K6, wherein the switching to the second guidance state is performed in this way.

A configuration in which the movements of both movable bodies are synchronized as shown in this feature is advantageous in terms of enhancing the responsiveness of switching to the second guidance state. However, when trying to pursue responsiveness in this way, there is a high possibility that the game ball will be caught between the two movable bodies. In this respect, in combination with the characteristic K6, even if a game ball is caught, even if it is incomplete, a path that slopes downward toward the ball entrance side as a whole can be formed. It is possible to suppress the progress of the game while the guidance function is not exhibited at all. This is preferable for suppressing disadvantages for the player.

Feature K8. a restricting portion that restricts further rotation when the first movable body and the second movable body are arranged at the passage forming position;
The length dimension from the rotation base end portion to the rotation tip end portion of the second movable body is the same as or longer than the length dimension from the rotation base end portion to the rotation tip portion of the second movable body. A gaming machine according to feature K6 or feature K7, characterized in that it is shortened.

When the movable bodies are of a rotating type, a force that rotates the movable bodies is applied by the collision of the game ball. As for the first movable body, when the second inclined passage is formed, further rotation is prevented by the restricting portion, so even if it is pushed by the game ball, it is possible to avoid a change in posture. On the other hand, in the case where the second movable body forms the second inclined passage, the restricting portion prevents further rotation, but the direction in which the rotation is induced by the collision of the game ball is It is opposite to the regulatory direction. In other words, it cannot be expected that the restricting portion for the second movable body will not be prevented from rotating due to the collision of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the second movable body, which is easily affected by the collision of the game ball, is made to have the same or shorter overall length as the first movable body, thereby suppressing the occurrence of such inconveniences. can.

Feature K9. The movement of the first movable body when switching from the non-guiding state to the first guiding state is the same as the movement of the first movable body when switching from the non-guiding state to the second guiding state. The gaming machine according to any one of features K3 to K8.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to prevent the movement of the first movable body when switching to the guiding state from revealing which of the first guiding state and the second guiding state is to be switched to. Making it difficult to guess whether the movement of the first movable body will switch to the first guide state or the second guide state in this way is advantageous in increasing the attention of the player to the game. .

Feature K10. The ball entry portion is formed with a first passage (first downstream passage portion 337Q) and a second passage (second downstream passage portion 338Q) through which the game ball passes,
A game ball guided to the ball-entering portion from a portion other than the first region in the second region flows into the second passage more than a game ball guided to the ball-entering portion from the first region. The game machine according to any one of features K1 to K9, which is configured to facilitate playing.

In this feature, although the guide destination is the ball-entering section, the movement destination after the ball-entering is different depending on which path the player takes. With such a configuration, further diversification of games can be realized.

For example, in combination with feature K2, the total length of the inclined passage formed in each guiding state is different. Specifically, the second inclined passage has a longer overall length than the first inclined passage, and the acceleration section is longer. In view of the fact that there is a difference in the moving speed of the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the moving destination changes due to such a speed difference.

Feature K11. game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing by the MPU of the main controller 162) for transitioning to a special game state more advantageous to the player than normal when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied;
Switching means for switching the guiding means to the non-guiding state, the first guiding state, and the second guiding state (a function of performing state switching control by the MPU of the main controller 162),
As switching modes by the switching means, a first switching mode for alternately switching between the non-guiding state and the first guiding state, and a second switching mode for alternately switching between the non-guiding state and the second guiding state are provided. and
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K10, further comprising means for shifting a switching mode in the special game state from the first switching mode to the second switching mode.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by changing from the first switching mode to the second switching mode, it is possible to accelerate the acquisition frequency of benefits (for example, the speed at which the ball is held), the progress speed of the game, and the like. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the special game state.

Feature K12. As the special game state, a first special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode corresponding to 16R jackpot result A) and a second special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode corresponding to 16R jackpot result B) are provided,
The gaming machine according to feature K11, wherein the period of the second switching mode differs between the first special game state and the second special game state.

According to the feature K12, the period in which the second switching mode is advantageous to the player, that is, the period in which the acquisition frequency of benefits (for example, the speed of increase in possession balls) and the progress speed of the game are accelerated change depending on the transition to the special game state. do. With such a configuration, it is possible to more preferably suppress the monotony of the game in the special game state.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in the above group of features A to J may be applied to features K1 to K12.

<Characteristic group L>
The following feature group L is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. By making the ball-entering means variable and switching the ball-entering means between a receiving state and a non-receiving state according to the game situation, diversification of games is achieved (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, it was made in view of the background and problems that "the above-mentioned type of gaming machine still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to realize the diversification of games by means of variable ball entry means." It is.

Feature L1. A game provided with a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and provided with ball entry means (for example, variable winning units 83, 83R) for allowing game balls to enter the game area. machine and
The ball entry means
A first ball-entering portion (first ball-entering portion 331) and a second ball-entering portion (second ball-entering portion 341) into which game balls enter,
A first guide state that guides a game ball to the first ball entering portion, a second guide state that guides a game ball to the second ball entering portion, and the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion. a guide part (for example, movable bodies 350, 360, 450R) that can be switched to a non-planned state in which the game ball is not guided to any of them;
a drive unit (for example, a drive motor 321) that operates the movable body,
A control unit (MPU of the main control unit 162) that performs drive control of the drive unit,
The control unit places the guide unit in the first guide state by controlling a drive mode of the drive unit to be in a first drive mode (for example, rotation in a first specific direction); and means for setting the guide portion to the second guide state by controlling the drive portion so that the drive portion is in a second drive state (for example, rotation in a second specific direction). Amusement machine.

A configuration in which a plurality of ball entry sections are provided side by side in the game area and a game ball is guided to each ball entry section using a variable guide section realizes diversification of the game and attracts more attention to the game. This is preferable for improvement. However, if a drive section (actuator) is provided for each ball entry section, there is a concern that the electrical configuration of the gaming machine will become complicated.

In this regard, as shown in this feature, the driving mode of the driving section is set to the first driving mode to set the guide section to the first guiding state, and the second driving mode is set to set the guiding section to the second guiding state. By adopting a structure for switching the guide destination of the ball, that is, a structure for switching between the non-guided state/first guided state/second guided state depending on the driving mode, the electrical configuration of the game machine can be suppressed from becoming complicated, and the game can be improved. Diversification can be achieved.

Feature L2. A game provided with a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and provided with ball entry means (for example, variable winning units 83, 83R) for allowing game balls to enter the game area. machine and
The ball entry means
A first ball entering portion (first ball entering portion 331) and a second ball entering portion (second ball entering portion 341) into which a game ball flowing down the game area enters;
A first guide state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the first ball entering portion, and a second guide state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the second ball entering portion. a guide portion (e.g., movable bodies 350, 360, 450R) that can be switched between a guide state and an unplanned state in which the game ball is not guided to either the first ball-entering portion or the second ball-entering portion;
a drive unit (for example, a drive motor 321) that operates the movable body,
A control unit (MPU of the main control unit 162) that performs drive control of the drive unit,
The control unit
When the guide part is in the non-guiding state, the driving mode of the driving part is controlled to be in a first driving mode (for example, rotation in a first specific direction), so that the guide part is moved to the above-mentioned state. means for switching to the first guidance state;
When the guide portion is in the non-guiding state, the driving portion is controlled to be in a second driving mode (for example, rotation in a second specific direction), thereby moving the guide portion to the above-described position. and means for switching to the second guidance state.

A configuration in which a plurality of ball entry sections are provided side by side in the game area and a game ball is guided to each ball entry section using a variable guide section realizes diversification of the game and attracts more attention to the game. This is preferable for improvement. However, if a drive section (actuator) is provided for each ball entry section, there is a concern that the electrical configuration of the gaming machine will become complicated.

In this regard, as shown in this feature, the driving mode of the driving section is set to the first driving mode to set the guide section to the first guiding state, and the second driving mode is set to set the guiding section to the second guiding state. By adopting a structure for switching the guide destination of the ball, that is, a structure for switching between the non-guided state/first guided state/second guided state depending on the driving mode, the electrical configuration of the game machine can be suppressed from becoming complicated, and the game can be improved. Diversification can be achieved.

Feature L3. In the first drive mode, the control section performs drive control so that the output shaft (output shaft 322) of the drive section operates in a first specific direction, and in the second drive mode, the output shaft is The game machine according to feature L1 or feature L2, wherein drive control is performed so as to operate in a second specific direction opposite to the first specific direction.

In order to switch the guidance destination according to the difference in the operation mode of the drive unit as shown in the feature L1, etc., by reversing the operation direction of the output shaft of the drive unit as shown in this feature, when switching the state It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation stability of As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the reliability of the game machine due to the operation failure or the like with a simple configuration.

Feature L4. The drive unit is a motor,
The control unit rotates the motor in a first specific direction in the first driving mode, and rotates the motor in a second specific direction opposite to the first specific direction in the second driving mode. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2, characterized in that it is configured to allow the game to be played.

In order to switch the guidance destination according to the difference in the operation mode of the drive unit as shown in feature L1, etc., the state is switched by reversing the rotation direction of the output shaft of the drive unit as shown in this feature. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operational stability at the time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the reliability of the game machine due to the operation failure or the like with a simple configuration.

Feature L5. The guide section has a first movable body (for example, a first movable body 350) and a second movable body (for example, a second movable body 360), and in the first guidance state, the first movable body is the first guide. A first guide path (for example, first guide path GP1) that guides the game ball to the first ball entering portion is formed by being arranged at a position (for example, a protruding position), and in the second guide state, the second guide path is formed. The two movable bodies are arranged at a second guide position (for example, a projecting position) to form a second guide path (for example, a second guide path GP2) that guides the game ball to the second ball entering portion. cage,
A transmission unit (transmission block 325) that transmits the power of the driving unit to the first movable body and the second movable body,
When the first movable body is arranged at the first guide position, the transmission section avoids transmission of power to the second movable body and arranges the second movable body at the second guide position. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that, when it does, the transmission of power to the first movable body is avoided.

When the first movable body for the first ball-entering portion and the second movable body for the second ball-entering portion are used together, the following problems may arise if the movable bodies simply share the driving portion. That is, when the first movable body is moved, the second movable body follows it, and when the second movable body is moved, the first movable body follows it, whereby the driving There is concern that the load on the unit will increase and the responsiveness during state switching will decrease.

Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the first movable body is moved, power transmission to the second movable body is avoided, and when the second movable body is moved, power is transmitted to the first movable body. By avoiding the above, it is possible to suppress an increase in load when a plurality of movable bodies are to be driven, and to suitably suppress a decrease in responsiveness.

Feature L6. The guide section has a first movable body (for example, a first movable body 350) and a second movable body (for example, a second movable body 360), and in the first guidance state, the first movable body is the first guide. A first guide path (for example, first guide path GP1) that guides the game ball to the first ball entering portion is formed by being arranged at a position (for example, a protruding position), and in the second guide state, the second guide path is formed. The two movable bodies are arranged at a second guide position (for example, a projecting position) to form a second guide path (for example, a second guide path GP2) that guides the game ball to the second ball entering portion. cage,
a first transmission path connecting the driving section and the first movable body and capable of transmitting power of the driving section to the first movable body; and connecting the driving section and the second movable body and transmitting power of the driving section to the second movable body.
The transmission section cuts off the second transmission path when the first movable body is arranged at the first guide position, and cuts off the second transmission path when the second movable body is arranged at the second guide position. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that it is configured to cut off one transmission path.

In the case where the guide portion is composed of the first movable body and the second movable body and the drive portion is shared, the second movable body acts as a resistance when the first movable body is moved, or the second movable body acts as a resistance. There is concern that the responsiveness of state switching may be reduced because the first movable body acts as a resistance when moving the body.

Therefore, when moving the first movable body, the power transmission path to the second movable body is cut off (disconnected), and when moving the second movable body, power transmission to the first movable body is interrupted. By interrupting (disconnecting) the transmission path, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load when a plurality of movable bodies are to be driven, and to suitably suppress a decrease in responsiveness.

Feature L7. When the first movable body is moved to the first guide position, the second movable body remains at the non-guide position, and when the second movable body is arranged at the second guide position, the first movable body is moved to the first guide position. The gaming machine according to feature L5 or feature L6, characterized in that it is configured so that the body stays in the non-guiding position.

As shown in this feature, the configuration shown in feature L5 or the like is suitable by devising so that the timings of the operations of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap, and by limiting the target of power transmission from the drive unit. can be realized.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in the above group of features A to K may be applied to features L1 to L7.

Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball shooting handle 41) operated by a player, game ball shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, and A ball path (guidance rail 100) that guides a game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and each game part (such as a nail) arranged in the game area. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a section (general prize winning opening 81, etc.).

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a final stop after variably displaying the symbol row; A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 80... Game board unit, 80a... Game board, 82... Operation opening unit, 83... Variable winning unit, 84... Through gate, 86... Out opening, 162... Main control device, 224... Dispensing device 242 Dispensing control device 310 Housing 311 Main body 317 Communication passage 321 Drive motor 322 Output shaft 325 Transmission block 331 First entrance portion 332 Entrance portion , 334...Detection sensor 341...Second ball entry part 342...Entrance part 344...Detection sensor 350...First movable body 351...Upper surface 355...Arm part 360...Second movable body 361...Upper surface , 363... Notch 365... Arm part 370... First shutter 380... Second shutter 390... Core 391... First inclined part 392... Second inclined part 395... Receiving part 400... First Guiding parts 401 Upper left movable plate 402 Lower right movable plate 410 Second guide part 411 Upper right movable plate 412 Lower left movable plate 420 Passing part 430 First movable body 431 Upper side Shaft 432 Lower shaft 433 Guide groove 434 Guide groove 435 Spring 436 Spring 440 Second movable body 441 Upper shaft 442 Lower shaft 443 Guide groove 444 Guide groove 445 Spring 446 Spring 450 Movable body 451 Axial support portion 452 Upper surface 453 First inclined portion 454 Second inclined portion 456 End portion 457... End 461... Accommodating part 470... Movable body 472... Upper surface 473... First inclined part 474... Second inclined part 481... First shaft part 482... Second shaft part 483... Third 1 guide groove 484 second guide groove GE1 first area GE2 second area GP1 first guide path GP2 second guide path ME passing area OE inlet PE game Regions, TE1...first detour, TE2...second detour.

Claims (1)

A game machine comprising a game board on which a game area is formed,
a first ball-entering section and a second ball-entering section provided in the game area, into which game balls enter;
A first guide means for moving the game ball to a first guide position for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion and a first non-guide position for not performing the guide;
A second guide means for moving the game ball to a second guide position for guiding the game ball to the second ball entering portion and a second non-guide position for not performing the guide;
It is possible to configure a first guide path that guides the game ball to the first ball entering portion together with a guide path formed by the first guide means when the game ball is arranged at the first guide position by the first guide means. There is a guide path formed by the second guide means and a second guide path for guiding the game ball to the second ball entering portion when the game ball is positioned at the second guide position by the second guide means. a passage forming means capable of
Of the passage structuring means, the predetermined passage structuring means and the specific passage structuring means are displaceable between a projecting position projecting into the game area and a retracted position where projection into the game area is suppressed,
The first guide passage is formed with a first insertion portion through which the predetermined passage forming means is inserted , and the second guide passage is inserted with the specific passage forming means. A gaming machine characterized in that a second insertion portion is formed .

Images